Samsung Medical Alarms 7100 Users Manual UK_OfficeServ Call Server Programming Guide

7100 to the manual df2b25fe-4fcf-42ee-8246-a7a744abd573

2015-01-23

: Samsung Samsung-Samsung-Medical-Alarms-7100-Users-Manual-280843 samsung-samsung-medical-alarms-7100-users-manual-280843 samsung pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 407 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Ed. 00

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server

Programming Guide

This guide is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. and is protected by copyright.

No information contained herein may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated for any commercial pur-

poses or disclosed to the third party in any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG Electronics Co.,

Ltd.

TRADEMARKS

is the trademark of SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

Product names mentioned in this guide may be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective

companies.

This guide should be read and used as a guideline for properly installing and operating the product.

This guide may be changed for the system improvement, standardization and other technical reasons without prior

notice.

If you need updated guides or have any questions concerning the contents of the guides, contact our Document Center

at the following address or Web site:

Address: Document Center 18th Floor IT Center. Dong-Suwon P.O. Box 105, 416, Maetan-3dong Yeongtong-

gu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea 442-600

Homepage: http://www.samsungdocs.com

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications I

INTRODUCTION

Purpose

This guide describes a programming method for the OfficeServ 7100 system users.

OfficeServ 7100 allows you to utilize a digital phone to simply change the system setup.

Likewise, using a phone to change the system setup is called MMC(Man Machine Com-

munication) program. This guide describes how to program a digital phone.

Audience

This guide is intended for users who program the MMC of the OfficeServ 7100 system.

Guide Contents

This guide is composed of two Chapters and Abbreviation. Each chapter is introduced as

follows:

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

This chapter describes things to know before starting MMC programming and about the

buttons of digital phone and cautions.

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

This chapter describes in detail how to use each MMC program. MMCs are listed in nu-

merical order.

ABBREVIATION

Acronyms frequently used in this document are described.

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

II Samsung Business Communications

Conventions

The following types of paragraphs contain special information that must be carefully read

and thoroughly understood. Such information may or may not be enclosed in a rectangular

box, separating it from the main text, but is always preceded by an icon and/or a bold title.

WARNING

Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid

personal injury or fatality.

CAUTION

Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid

a service failure or damage to the system.

CHECKPOINT

Provides the operator with checkpoints for stable system operation.

NOTE

Indicates additional information as a reference.

Console Screen Output

y The lined box with ‘Courier New’ font will be used to distinguish between the main

content and console output screen text.

y ‘Bold Courier New’ font will indicate the value entered by the operator on the

console screen.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications III

Reference Guides

The following guides are also provided with your OfficeServ 7100 system.

OfficeServ 7100 Installation Guide

Describes the installation procedures and specifications for the OfficeServ 7100 system.

OfficeServ 7100 General Description

Describes the business features available with the OfficeServ 7100 system.

WIP-5000M User Guide

This is a user’s guide for the WIP-5000M mobile telephone that is designed to use the

wireless LAN provided by the OfficeServ 7100 system.

Revision History

EDITION DATE OF ISSUE REMARKS

00 02. 2007. First Edition

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

IV Samsung Business Communications

This page is intentionally left blank.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications V

SAFETY CONCERNS

For product safety and correct operation, the following information must be given to the

operator/user and shall be read before the installation and operation.

Symbols

Caution

Indication of a general caution

Restriction

Indication for prohibiting an action for a product

Instruction

Indication for commanding a specifically required action

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

VI Samsung Business Communications

Warning

CautionBefore using the Auto Record feature

Before using the Auto Record feature, make sure that you are not violating any

laws. Samsung is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature.

Caution

CALL COST(MMC 508)

Changing this value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate

call cost. This MPD facility requires the Meter Pulse Detection version of the trunk

card.

When changing the MMC [506], [807] and [812]

MMC [506], [510], [807] and [812] should not be changed from the default levels

without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

Compliance with the National Version Standards

For the national version, OfficeServ 7100 is designed to comply with the stan-

dards of the corresponding country. Therefore, if you need to use MMC 812 (Set

Country Code), please consult your dealer for advice.

WARNING

CAUTION

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications VII

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION I

Purpose ...........................................................................................................................................I

Audience..........................................................................................................................................I

Guide Contents ................................................................................................................................I

Conventions....................................................................................................................................II

Console Screen Output...................................................................................................................II

Reference Guides ..........................................................................................................................III

Revision History .............................................................................................................................III

SAFETY CONCERNS V

Symbols ......................................................................................................................................... V

Warning......................................................................................................................................... VI

Caution ......................................................................................................................................... VI

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming 1-1

1.1 Introduction to Programming................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Digital Phones ........................................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2.1 DCS Euro Phones.......................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2.2 DS/ITP-5000 Series Phones .......................................................................................... 1-3

1.3 Cautions in Programming ........................................................................................................ 1-6

1.4 Program List by User’s Level................................................................................................... 1-7

1.4.1 Station Level Programming ............................................................................................ 1-7

1.4.2 Operator Level Programming......................................................................................... 1-8

1.5 Programming List by Name.....................................................................................................1-16

1.6 Program List by Function........................................................................................................1-23

1.6.1 Phone Function .............................................................................................................1-23

1.6.2 Networking Function .....................................................................................................1-24

1.6.3 VoIP Function................................................................................................................1-24

1.6.4 WLAN Function .............................................................................................................1-25

1.6.5 LCR Function ................................................................................................................1-25

1.6.6 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function...............................................................................1-26

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

VIII © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

1.6.7 Diagnosis Function........................................................................................................1-27

1.6.8 Hotel Function ...............................................................................................................1-27

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming 2-1

2.1 Overview of Programming Procedure..................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 Programming Procedure .......................................................................................................... 2-2

[100] STATION LOCK ................................................................................................................. 2-2

[101] CHANGE USER PASSCODE ............................................................................................ 2-4

[102] CALL FORWARD............................................................................................................... 2-5

[103] SET ANSWER MODE........................................................................................................ 2-7

[104] STATION NAME................................................................................................................. 2-9

[105] STATION SPEED DIAL.....................................................................................................2-11

[106] STATION SPEED DIAL NAME..........................................................................................2-13

[107] KEY EXTENDER ..............................................................................................................2-14

[108] STATION STATUS ............................................................................................................2-16

[109] DATE DISPLAY.................................................................................................................2-18

[110] STATION ON/OFF.............................................................................................................2-20

[111] PHONE RING TONE .........................................................................................................2-23

[112] ALARM REMINDER CLOCK.............................................................................................2-24

[113] VIEW MEMO NUMBER ....................................................................................................2-26

[114] PHONE VOLUME .............................................................................................................2-27

[115] SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE .....................................................................................2-29

[116] ALARM AND MESSAGE ...................................................................................................2-30

[117] EDIT TEXT MESSAGE .....................................................................................................2-32

[118] CONFERENCE GROUP ...................................................................................................2-33

[119] CALLER ID DISPLAY........................................................................................................2-35

[120] LARGE LCD OPTIONS.....................................................................................................2-36

[121] PHONE LANGUAGE ........................................................................................................2-38

[122] NEWS DISPLAY SPEED ..................................................................................................2-40

[125] EXECUTIVE STATE..........................................................................................................2-41

[199] SHOW LICENSE STATUS................................................................................................2-43

[200] OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING..............................................................................2-44

[201] CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE.................................................................................2-45

[202] CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE.....................................................................................2-46

[203] ASSIGN UA DEVICE ........................................................................................................2-48

[204] COMMON BELL CONTROL .............................................................................................2-49

[205] ASSIGN LOUD BELL........................................................................................................2-50

[206] BARGE-IN TYPE ..............................................................................................................2-51

[207] ASSIGN VM/AA PORT......................................................................................................2-52

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications IX

[209] ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE .............................................................................................2-54

[210] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT ...............................................................................2-55

[211] DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT .............................................................................................2-60

[214] DISA ALARM RINGING STATION ....................................................................................2-61

[217] TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION ............................................................................................2-62

[219] RELAY TYPE ....................................................................................................................2-64

[220] ISDN SERVICE TYPE ......................................................................................................2-65

[221] EXTENSION TYPE...........................................................................................................2-66

[222] FAX PAIR ..........................................................................................................................2-68

[224] WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT ..........................................................................................2-69

[300] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION...............................................................................2-71

[301] ASSIGN STATION COS....................................................................................................2-73

[302] PICKUP GROUPS ............................................................................................................2-75

[303] ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY ...........................................................................................2-76

[304] ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE .................................................................................2-77

[305] ASSIGN FORCED CODE .................................................................................................2-79

[306] HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION.................................................................................2-80

[308] ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE .....................................................................2-81

[309] ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE ...................................................................................2-82

[310] LCR CLASS OF SERVICE ...............................................................................................2-83

[312] ALLOW CALLER ID ..........................................................................................................2-84

[314] CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL...........................................................................................2-85

[315] CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION......................................................................................2-86

[316] COPY STATION USABLE.................................................................................................2-89

[317] ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE ....................................................................................2-90

[318] DISTINCTIVE RINGING ...................................................................................................2-91

[319] BRANCH GROUP.............................................................................................................2-93

[320] PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER..................................................................................2-94

[323] CALLING PARTY NUMBER..............................................................................................2-96

[326] RINGBACK TONE MESSAGE..........................................................................................2-97

[401] TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE..................................................................................................2-100

[402] TRUNK DIAL TYPE.........................................................................................................2-101

[403] TRUNK TOLL CLASS .....................................................................................................2-102

[404] TRUNK NAME ................................................................................................................2-104

[405] TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER .............................................................................................2-105

[406] TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT .........................................................................................2-106

[407] FORCED TRUNK RELEASE ..........................................................................................2-107

[408] ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE....................................................................................2-108

[409] TRUNK STATUS READ ..................................................................................................2-109

[410] ASSIGN DISA TRUNK .................................................................................................... 2-111

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

X © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

[412] ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL ...............................................................................................2-112

[414] MPD/PRS SIGNAL .........................................................................................................2-113

[415] REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA ...............................................................................2-115

[417] E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION ...................................................................................................2-116

[418] BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART ......................................................................................2-117

[419] BRI OPTIONS.................................................................................................................2-118

[420] PRI OPTIONS.................................................................................................................2-122

[421] MSN DIGIT .....................................................................................................................2-124

[422] TRUNK COS...................................................................................................................2-125

[423] S/T MODE.......................................................................................................................2-127

[424] BRI S0 MAPPING ...........................................................................................................2-128

[425] CID TRUNKS ..................................................................................................................2-129

[426] TRUNK GAIN CONTROL ...............................................................................................2-130

[428] ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE........................................................................................2-131

[432] SET H-TRK .....................................................................................................................2-132

[433] COST RATE....................................................................................................................2-133

[434] CONNECTION STATUS .................................................................................................2-134

[436] TRUNK TMC GAIN .........................................................................................................2-137

[437] 16TRK GAIN CONTROL.................................................................................................2-138

[500] SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS..........................................................................................2-139

[501] SYSTEM TIMERS...........................................................................................................2-141

[502] STATION-WIDE TIMERS................................................................................................2-147

[503] TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS...................................................................................................2-149

[504] PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO ........................................................................................2-152

[505] ASSIGN DATE AND TIME ..............................................................................................2-153

[506] TONE CADENCE............................................................................................................2-154

[507] ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME.............................................................................................2-156

[508] CALL COST ....................................................................................................................2-158

[510] SLI RING CADENCE ......................................................................................................2-159

[511] MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE...................................................................................2-161

[512] HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT ................................................................................................2-162

[513] HOTEL TIMER ................................................................................................................2-163

[514] TONE SOURCE..............................................................................................................2-164

[515] DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT..............................................................................................2-165

[600] ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP........................................................................................2-166

[601] ASSIGN STATION GROUP ............................................................................................2-167

[602] STATION GROUP NAME................................................................................................2-172

[603] ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP ...............................................................................................2-173

[604] ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE ...............................................................................2-175

[605] ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE .................................................................................2-176

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications XI

[606] ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK ................................................................................................2-177

[607] UCD OPTIONS ...............................................................................................................2-179

[608] ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK ..............................................................................................2-183

[609] CALL LOG BLOCK .........................................................................................................2-184

[611] ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING ...........................................................................................2-185

[612] ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE ...................................................................................2-186

[614] STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP .....................................................................................2-187

[615] MGI GROUP ...................................................................................................................2-188

[616] MGI USER ......................................................................................................................2-190

[700] COPY COS CONTENTS ................................................................................................2-191

[701] ASSIGN COS CONTENTS .............................................................................................2-192

[702] TOLL DENY TABLE ........................................................................................................2-196

[703] TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE ............................................................................................2-197

[704] ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER .........................................................................................2-199

[705] ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL.....................................................................................2-200

[706] SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME ..................................................................................2-201

[707] AUTHORIZATION CODE................................................................................................2-203

[708] ACCOUNT CODE ...........................................................................................................2-204

[709] TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE ..................................................................2-205

[710] LCR DIGIT TABLE ..........................................................................................................2-207

[711] LCR TIME TABLE............................................................................................................2-208

[712] LCR ROUTE TABLE .......................................................................................................2-209

[713] LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE ...........................................................................................2-211

[714] DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION....................................................................2-213

[715] PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE...........................................................................2-216

[716] UK LCR OPTION ............................................................................................................2-217

[717] UCD AGENT ID ..............................................................................................................2-219

[718] MY AREA CODE .............................................................................................................2-220

[719] IDLE DISPLAY ................................................................................................................2-221

[720] COPY KEY PROGRAMMING.........................................................................................2-222

[721] SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING..........................................................................2-223

[722] STATION KEY PROGRAMMING ....................................................................................2-224

[723] SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING ....................................................................................2-228

[724] DIAL NUMBERING PLAN...............................................................................................2-230

[725] SMDR OPTIONS ............................................................................................................2-236

[727] SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY ........................................................................................2-239

[728] CID TRANSLATION TABLE ............................................................................................2-240

[740] STATION PAIR................................................................................................................2-241

[746] COSTING DIAL PLAN ....................................................................................................2-242

[747] RATE CALCULATION TABLE.........................................................................................2-244

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

XII © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

[750] VM CARD RESTART ......................................................................................................2-246

[751] ASSIGN MAILBOX..........................................................................................................2-248

[752] AUTO RECORD..............................................................................................................2-249

[753] WARNING DESTINATION..............................................................................................2-251

[754] VM HALT.........................................................................................................................2-252

[755] VM ALARM .....................................................................................................................2-253

[756] ASSIGN VMMOH............................................................................................................2-254

[757] VM IN/OUT .....................................................................................................................2-255

[758] VM DAY/NIGHT ..............................................................................................................2-256

[759] CLI RINGING ..................................................................................................................2-257

[760] ITEM COST TABLE ........................................................................................................2-259

[761] TAX RATE SETUP..........................................................................................................2-261

[762] ROOM COST RATE........................................................................................................2-263

[763] SECOND LCR ................................................................................................................2-264

[800] ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM................................................................................2-266

[801] CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE .............................................................................2-267

[802] CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER ..........................................................................2-268

[805] TX LEVEL AND GAIN .....................................................................................................2-269

[806] CARD PRE-INSTALL......................................................................................................2-271

[807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL.........................................................................................2-273

[810] HALT PROCESSING ......................................................................................................2-275

[811] RESET SYSTEM.............................................................................................................2-276

[812] SET COUNTRY CODE ...................................................................................................2-277

[813] HOTEL OPERATION ......................................................................................................2-278

[815] CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY.....................................................................................2-279

[818] PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ...............................................................................................2-281

[819] MC FILE CONTROL .......................................................................................................2-282

[820] ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID .............................................................................................2-284

[821] ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK ..........................................................................................2-285

[822] VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE .........................................................................................2-286

[823] ASSIGN NETWORK COS...............................................................................................2-288

[824] NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION ...................................................................................2-290

[825] ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS................................................................................2-292

[826] ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK.......................................................................2-294

[829] LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS.......................................................................................2-295

[830] ETHERNET PARAMETERS ...........................................................................................2-297

[831] MGI PARAMETERS........................................................................................................2-300

[832] VoIP ACCESS CODE......................................................................................................2-302

[833] VoIP IP TABLE ................................................................................................................2-304

[834] H.323 OPTIONS .............................................................................................................2-305

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications XIII

[835] MGI DSP OPTIONS........................................................................................................2-307

[836] H.323 GK OPTIONS .......................................................................................................2-310

[837] SIP OPTIONS .................................................................................................................2-312

[839] SIP USER .......................................................................................................................2-316

[838] PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES..............................................................................................2-317

[840] IP PHONE INFORMATION .............................................................................................2-318

[841] SYSTEM IP OPTIONS....................................................................................................2-321

[845] WLAN PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................2-325

[846] WIP INFORMATION .......................................................................................................2-330

[848] WLAN IP/MAC LIST........................................................................................................2-332

[849] WLAN CONFIGURATION...............................................................................................2-333

[850] SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY ....................................................................................2-335

[851] ALARM REPORTING......................................................................................................2-336

[852] SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS .................................................................................2-338

[853] MAINTENANCE BUSY ...................................................................................................2-345

[854] DIAGNOSTIC TIME ........................................................................................................2-347

[856] TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS ......................................................................................2-348

[857] VIRTUAL CABINET SET.................................................................................................2-349

[859] HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY ..................................................................................2-351

[861] SYSTEM OPTIONS ........................................................................................................2-352

[863] NODE INFO ....................................................................................................................2-355

[890] INITIALIZE PORT ...........................................................................................................2-356

ABBREVIATION I

A ~ C................................................................................................................................................I

D ~ I ................................................................................................................................................II

K ~ N..............................................................................................................................................III

O ~ S............................................................................................................................................. IV

T ~ V .............................................................................................................................................. V

W ~ X............................................................................................................................................ VI

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

XIV © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1.1 24B LCD DCS Euro Phone ..................................................................................... 1-2

Figure 1.2 DS-5038S Phone .................................................................................................... 1-3

Figure 1.3 DS/ITP-5014D/5021D Phone .................................................................................. 1-4

Figure 1.4 DS-5014S/5007S Phone ......................................................................................... 1-5

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1.1 Station Level Programming list ................................................................................. 1-7

Table 1.2 System Related MMC list.......................................................................................... 1-8

Table 1.3 Station Related MMC list........................................................................................... 1-9

Table 1.4 Trunk Related MMC list........................................................................................... 1-10

Table 1.5 Timer and Tone Related MMC list............................................................................1-11

Table 1.6 Group Related MMC list...........................................................................................1-11

Table 1.7 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC list........................................................... 1-12

Table 1.8 Technician Level Programming list.......................................................................... 1-14

Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list............................................................... 1-16

Table 1.10 Phone Function Programming list......................................................................... 1-23

Table 1.11 Networking Function Programming list.................................................................. 1-24

Table 1.12 VoIP Function Programming list............................................................................ 1-24

Table 1.13 WLAN Function Programming list......................................................................... 1-25

Table 1.14 LCR Function Programming list ............................................................................ 1-25

Table 1.15 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function Programming list........................................... 1-26

Table 1.16 Diagnosis Function Programming list.................................................................... 1-27

Table 1.17 Hotel Function Programming list........................................................................... 1-27

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 1-1

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Pro-

gramming

In this chapter, the things to know before you start MMC programming, and the phone but-

tons and cautions will be discussed.

1.1 Introduction to Programming

The MMC means the changes on the data that is used for the system operation program.

The MMC can be divided into programmable one and non-programmable one.

The programmable MMC is classified into 3 levels, such as technician, operator, and sta-

tion level. The technician level programming and the operator level programming require a

passcode for each level and the station level programming does not require a passcode.

Program List by User’s Level

For more information about the programming level, refer to ‘1.4 Program List by

User’s Level’ of this chapter.

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1-2 Samsung Business Communications

1.2 Digital Phones

You need a digital display(LCD) phone in order to carry out programming. These include

DCS Euro keysets and DS/ITP 5000 Series keysets, and some examples are described in

the following sections. All use special programming buttons to select options on the display

screen.

1.2.1 DCS Euro Phones

Figure 1.1 24B LCD DCS Euro Phone

24B LCD phone has 24 programmable buttons: left column is numbered 1-12 from the top;

right column is numbered 13-24 from the top. Buttons 19 to 24 are special buttons ‘A–F’

used for programming.

12B LCD phone has 12 programmable buttons numbered 1-12 from top to bottom. But-

tons 7 to 12 are special buttons ‘A–F’ used for programming.

6B LCD phone has 6 programmable buttons: left column is numbered 1-3 from the top;

right column is numbered 4-6 from the top. Buttons 1 to 3 are special buttons ‘A–C’ and

buttons 4 to 6 are special buttons ‘D–F’ used for programming.

ume

ons

Volume control for handset,

ring, speaker, etc

cro

Used to select start menu and

scroll through display options

ons

(3)

Used to activate

features via the display

LCD

Microphone

Speaker Button

DND Button

Memor

Button

Redial Button

rogramma

ons

With tri-coloured LEDs:

24B = 16

12B = 8

rogramma

ons

With red LEDs:

24B = 8, 12B = 4, 6B = 6

pea

For hands-free operation.

Used in place of handset

Transfer Button

Hold Button

ANS/RLS Button

Recall Button

Dial Button

rec

ory

Tray

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 1-3

The special buttons are referred to within the relevant MMCs. For example, button ‘A’ is

used to toggle between uppercase and lowercase characters when entering text on the dis-

play.

All programmable buttons can be programmed with functions as required.

The left soft button is used to save data or to move the cursor in the LCD display to the left.

The right soft button is used to save data or to move the cursor in the display to the right.

Other buttons also have special functions when in programming mode:

y ANS/RLS Button: Select ‘ALL’ option for making changes to all—rather than

individual—stations/trunks/etc.

y Hold Button: Clear an entry in the display.

y Volume Buttons: Scroll through display options.

y Transfer Button: Enter MMC programming mode or store data and exit programming

mode.

y Speaker Button: Store data and advance to next MMC.

1.2.2 DS/ITP-5000 Series Phones

These include the DS-5038S, DS/ITP-5021L, DS/ITP-5021D, DS/ITP-5014D, DS-5014S,

and DS-5007S. Examples are shown in the figures below.

Figure 1.2 DS-5038S Phone

Dial Buttons

Soft Buttons

Scroll Button

Redial Button

Conference Button

Transfer Button

Hold Button

Speaker Button

Telephone Status Indicator

Microphone

Programmable Buttons(21)

Volume Buttons

A Button LCD Display

Programmable Buttons(17)

Speaker

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1-4 Samsung Business Communications

Figure 1.3 DS/ITP-5014D/5021D Phone

Microphone

DS/ITP-5014D

(Programmable Buttons: 14)

DS-/ITP5021D

(Programmable Buttons: 21)

Soft Buttons

Transfer Button

Programmable Buttons

Scroll Button

Telephone

Status Indicator

Conference Button

Redial Button

Volume Button

Dial Buttons

Speaker

eaker Button

Hold Button

A Button

LCD Display

Navigation Button

A Button

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 1-5

Figure 1.4 DS-5014S/5007S Phone

The DS/ITP-5000 series phones have 38, 21, 14 or 7 programmable buttons that can be

programmed with functions. Also, there are several other function buttons: the dial buttons,

the volume control buttons, the redial button that allows you to redial the last phone num-

ber dialled, the conference button for setting up conference calls, the transfer button used to

transfer a call to another station, the hold button to hold a call, the speaker button, and the

navigation buttons for easy selection of phone options and menus.

The LCD displays the station status and various other kinds of information. Using three

colors(red, green, and yellow) the station status indicator displays the current status of sta-

tion.

When programming, other functions programmed on buttons are as follows:

y Volume Buttons: Scroll through items in the display.

y Redial Button: Select ‘ALL’ option for making changes to all, rather than individual,

stations/trunks/etc.

y Soft Buttons: Save data or move the cursor left and right.

y Speaker Button: Save data and proceed to the next program.

y Hold Button: Erase the previously entered item.

y A Button: Select uppercase or lowercase text.

y Transfer Button: Enter the programming mode.

DS-5014S

(Programmable Buttons: 14)

DS-5007S

(Programmable Buttons: 7)

Soft Buttons

Transfer Button

LCD screen

Programmable Buttons

Scroll Button

Status Indicator

Conference Button

Redial Button

Volume Button

Dial Buttons

Speaker

Speaker Button

Hold Button

Microphone

A Button A Button

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1-6 Samsung Business Communications

Using large LCD Phones

Large LCD phones(DS/ITP-5012L) do not have programmable buttons.

Instead, they display programming functions on the LCD to be selected

via the selection buttons. Refer to your keyset user guide for more infor-

mation.

1.3 Cautions in Programming

y Programming can be done only while the handset is placed on the phone in idle state.

y Full programming can be done on any digital LCD phone.

y Only station level programming is allowed on a phone that does not have an

LCD display.

y If the LCD displays an ‘INVALID DATA’ message while programming, reenter the

correct data.

y If no button is pressed for a certain period of time during programming

(default is 60 seconds), the phone returns to the idle state from programming mode.

y Programming mode halts if the handset is picked up or the Transfer button is

pressed or the phone is unplugged. Any data previously entered in the display is

saved.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 1-7

1.4 Program List by User’s Level

The MMC program can be divided into programmable one and non-programmable one.

The programmable MMC is classified into 3 levels, such as technician, operator, and sta-

tion level. In this section, the programmable MMC for each level will be introduced.

1.4.1 Station Level Programming

Programming can be done for only station level programs.

Table 1.1 Station Level Programming list

MMC No. MMC Name

MMC: 100 STATION LOCK

MMC: 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE

MMC: 102 CALL FORWARD

MMC: 103 SET ANSWER MODE

MMC: 104 STATION NAME

MMC: 105 STATION SPEED DIAL

MMC: 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

MMC: 107 KEY EXTENDER

MMC: 108 STATION STATUS

MMC: 109 DATE DISPLAY

MMC: 110 STATION ON/OFF

MMC: 111 PHONE RING TONE

MMC: 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

MMC: 113 VIEW MEMO NUMBER

MMC: 114 PHONE VOLUME

MMC: 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

MMC: 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE

MMC: 117 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE

MMC: 118 CONFERENCE GROUP

MMC: 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY

MMC: 120 LARGE LCD OPTIONS

MMC: 121 PHONE LANGUAGE

MMC: 122 NEWS DISPLAY SPEED

MMC: 125 EXECUTIVE STATE

MMC: 199 SHOW LICENSE

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1-8 Samsung Business Communications

1.4.2 Operator Level Programming

A technician can do programming within the range set by the MMC [802] CUSTOMER

ACCESS MMC NUMBER.

Programming is allowed for any phone within the tenant group, but it can be done for only

one phone at a time.

1.4.2.1 System Related MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of the system are as follows:

Table 1.2 System Related MMC list

MMC No. MMC Name

MMC: 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

MMC: 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE

MMC: 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE

MMC: 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE

MMC: 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL

MMC: 205 ASSIGN LOUD BELL

MMC: 206 BARGE-IN TYPE

MMC: 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

MMC: 208 ASSIGN RING TYPE

MMC: 209 ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE

MMC: 210 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT

MMC: 211 DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT

MMC: 214 DISA ALARM RINGING STATION

MMC: 217 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION

MMC: 219 RELAY TYPE

MMC: 220 ISDN SERVICE TYPE

MMC: 221 EXTENSION TYPE

MMC: 222 FAX PAIR

MMC: 224 WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 1-9

1.4.2.2 Station Related MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of the station are as follows:

Table 1.3 Station Related MMC list

MMC No. MMC Name

MMC: 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

MMC: 301 ASSIGN STATION COS

MMC: 302 PICKUP GROUPS

MMC: 303 ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY

MMC: 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE

MMC: 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE

MMC: 306 HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION

MMC: 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE

MMC: 309 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE

MMC: 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

MMC: 312 ALLOW CALLER ID

MMC: 314 CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL

MMC: 315 CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION

MMC: 316 COPY STATION USABLE

MMC: 317 ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE

MMC: 318 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

MMC: 319 BRANCH GROUP

MMC: 320 PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER

MMC: 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER

MMC: 326 RBT MESSAGE

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1-10 Samsung Business Communications

1.4.2.3 Trunk Related MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of the trunk are as follows:

Table 1.4 Trunk Related MMC list

MMC No. MMC Name

MMC: 400 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

MMC: 401 TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

MMC: 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE

MMC: 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS

MMC: 404 TRUNK NAME

MMC: 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

MMC: 406 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

MMC: 407 FORCED TRUNK RELEASE

MMC: 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

MMC: 409 TRUNK STATUS READ

MMC: 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

MMC: 412 ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL

MMC: 414 MPD/PRS SIGNAL

MMC: 415 REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA

MMC: 417 E1/PRI CRC4

MMC: 418 BRI & PRI CARD RESTART

MMC: 419 BRI OPTIONS

MMC: 420 PRI OPTIONS

MMC: 421 MSN DIGIT

MMC: 422 TRUNK COS

MMC: 423 S/T MODE

MMC: 424 BRI S0 MAPPING

MMC: 425 CID TRUNKS

MMC: 426 TRUNK GAIN CONTROL

MMC: 428 ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE

MMC: 432 SET H-TRK

MMC: 433 COST RATE

MMC: 434 CONNECTION STATUS

MMC: 436 TRUNK TMC GAIN

MMCL 437 16TRK GAIN

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 1-11

1.4.2.4 Timer and Tone Related MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of the timer and tone are as follows:

Table 1.5 Timer and Tone Related MMC list

MMC No. MMC Name

MMC: 500 SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS

MMC: 501 SYSTEM TIMERS

MMC: 502 STATION-WIDE TIMERS

MMC: 503 TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

MMC: 504 PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO

MMC: 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

MMC: 506 TONE CADENCE

MMC: 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

MMC: 508 CALL COST

MMC: 510 SLI RING CADENCE

MMC: 511 MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE

MMC: 512 HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT

MMC: 513 HOTEL TIMER

MMC: 514 TONE SOURCE

MMC: 515 DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT

1.4.2.5 Group Related MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of a group are as follows:

Table 1.6 Group Related MMC list

MMC No. MMC Name

MMC: 600 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP

MMC: 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

MMC: 602 STATION GROUP NAME

MMC: 603 ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP

MMC: 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE

MMC: 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE

MMC: 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

MMC: 607 UCD OPTIONS

MMC: 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK

MMC: 609 CALL LOG BLOCK

MMC: 611 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING

MMC: 612 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1-12 Samsung Business Communications

Table 1.6 Group Related MMC list(continued)

MMC No. MMC Name

MMC: 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

MMC: 615 MGI GROUP

MMC: 616 MGI USER

1.4.2.6 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of the tables, codes, AA, DECT and VM are as

follows:

Table 1.7 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC list

MMC No. MMC Name

MMC: 700 COPY COS CONTENTS

MMC: 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

MMC: 702 TOLL DENY TABLE

MMC: 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

MMC: 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

MMC: 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

MMC: 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

MMC: 707 AUTHORIZATION CODE

MMC: 708 ACCOUNT CODE

MMC: 709 TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE

MMC: 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE

MMC: 711 LCR TIME TABLE

MMC: 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE

MMC: 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

MMC: 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

MMC: 715 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

MMC: 716 UK LCR OPTION

MMC: 717 UCD AGENT ID

MMC: 718 MY AREA CODE

MMC: 719 IDLE DISPLAY

MMC: 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC: 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC: 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC: 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC: 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

MMC: 725 SMDR OPTIONS

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 1-13

Table 1.7 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC list(continued)

MMC No. MMC Name

MMC: 727 SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY

MMC: 728 CID TRANSLATION TABLE

MMC: 740 STATION PAIR

MMC: 746 COSTING DIAL PLAN

MMC: 747 RATE CALCULATION TABLE

MMC: 750 VM CARD RESTART

MMC: 751 ASSIGN MAILBOX

MMC: 752 AUTO RECORD

MMC: 753 WARNING DESTINATION

MMC: 754 VM HALT

MMC: 755 VM ALARM

MMC: 756 ASSIGN VMMOH

MMC: 757 VM IN/OUT

MMC: 758 VM DAY/NIGHT

MMC: 759 CLI RINGING

MMC: 760 ITEM COST TABLE

MMC: 761 TAX RATE SETUP

MMC: 762 ROOM COST RATE

MMC: 763 SECOND LCR

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1-14 Samsung Business Communications

1.4.3 Technician Level Programming

This level is allowed to program every level of program.

This level of programming can be done on every phone within the system, but it can be

done for only one phone at a time.

Table 1.8 Technician Level Programming list

MMC No. MMC Name

MMC: 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

MMC: 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE

MMC: 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER

MMC: 804 SYS. I/O MODE

MMC: 805 TX LEVEL AND GAIN

MMC: 806 CARD PRE-INSTALL

MMC: 807 PHONE VOLUME CONTROL

MMC: 810 HALT PROCESSING

MMC: 811 RESET SYSTEM

MMC: 812 SET COUNTRY CODE

MMC: 813 HOTEL OPERATION

MMC: 815 CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY

MMC: 818 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

MMC: 819 MC FILE CONTROL

MMC: 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

MMC: 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK

MMC: 822 VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE

MMC: 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS

MMC: 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION

MMC: 825 ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS

MMC: 826 ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK

MMC: 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS

MMC: 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS

MMC: 831 MGI PARAMETERS

MMC: 832 VoIP ACCESS CODE

MMC: 833 VoIP IP TABLE

MMC: 834 H.323 OPTIONS

MMC: 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS

MMC: 836 H.323 GK OPTIONS

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 1-15

Table 1.8 Technician Level Programming list(continued)

MMC No. MMC Name

MMC: 837 SIP OPTIONS

MMC: 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES

MMC: 839 SIP USER

MMC: 840 IP PHONE INFORMATION

MMC: 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

MMC: 845 WLAN PARAMETERS

MMC: 846 WIP INFORMATION

MMC: 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST

MMC: 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION

MMC: 850 SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY

MMC: 851 ALARM REPORTING

MMC: 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

MMC: 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY

MMC: 854 DIAGNOSTIC TIME

MMC: 856 TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS

MMC: 857 VIRTUAL CABINET

MMC: 859 HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY

MMC: 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS

MMC: 863 NODE INFO

MMC: 890 INITIALIZE PORT

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1-16 Samsung Business Communications

1.5 Programming List by Name

This programming list is arranged alphabetically

Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list

MMC Name MMC No.

ACCOUNT CODE MMC: 708

ALARM AND MESSAGE MMC: 116

ALARM REMINDER CLOCK MMC: 112

ALARM REPORTING MMC: 851

ALLOW CALLER ID MMC: 312

ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE MMC: 612

ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING MMC: 611

ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE MMC: 209

ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE MMC: 308

ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY MMC: 303

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS MMC: 701

ASSIGN DATE AND TIME MMC: 505

ASSIGN DISA TRUNK MMC: 410

ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE MMC: 304

ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE MMC: 605

ASSIGN FORCED CODE MMC: 305

ASSIGN LOUD BELL MMC: 205

ASSIGN MAILBOX MMC: 751

ASSIGN NETWORK COS MMC: 823

ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK MMC: 821

ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS MMC: 825

ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP MMC: 600

ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK MMC: 608

ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME MMC: 507

ASSIGN RING TYPE MMC: 208

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK MMC: 606

ASSIGN STATION COS MMC: 301

ASSIGN STATION GROUP MMC: 601

ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE MMC: 309

ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE MMC: 604

ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE MMC: 317

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 1-17

Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued)

MMC Name MMC No.

ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID MMC: 820

ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK MMC: 826

ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL MMC: 705

ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP MMC: 603

ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE MMC: 408

ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL MMC: 412

ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE MMC: 428

ASSIGN UA DEVICE MMC: 203

ASSIGN VMMOH MMC: 756

ASSIGN VM/AA PORT MMC: 207

ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER MMC: 704

AUTHORIZATION CODE MMC: 707

AUTO RECORD MMC: 752

BARGE-IN TYPE MMC: 206

BRANCH GROUP MMC: 319

BRI & PRI CARD RESTART MMC: 418

BRI OPTIONS MMC: 419

BSI RF CARRIER MMC: 747

BRI S0 MAPPING MMC: 424

CALL COST MMC: 508

CALL FORWARD MMC: 102

CALL LOG BLOCK MMC: 609

CALLER ID DISPLAY MMC: 119

CALLING PARTY NUMBER MMC: 323

CARD PRE-INSTALL MMC: 806

CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE MMC: 201

CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE MMC: 202

CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE MMC: 801

CHANGE USER PASSCODE MMC: 101

CID TRANSLATION TABLE MMC: 728

CID TRUNKS MMC: 425

CLI RINGING MMC: 759

COMMON BELL CONTROL MMC: 204

CONFERENCE GROUP MMC: 118

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1-18 Samsung Business Communications

Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued)

MMC Name MMC No.

CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL MMC: 314

CONNECTION STATUS MMC: 434

COPY COS CONTENTS MMC: 700

COPY KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 720

COPY STATION USABLE MMC: 316

COST RATE MMC: 433

COSTING DIAL PLAN MMC: 746

CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER MMC: 802

CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY MMC: 815

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION MMC: 300

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT MMC: 210

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK MMC: 400

CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION MMC: 315

DATE DISPLAY MMC: 109

DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT MMC: 515

DIAGNOSTIC TIME MMC: 854

DIAL NUMBERING PLAN MMC: 724

DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION MMC: 714

DISA ALARM RINGING STATION MMC: 214

DISTINCTIVE RINGING MMC: 318

DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT MMC: 211

E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION MMC: 417

EDIT TEXT MESSAGE MMC: 117

ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM MMC: 800

ETHERNET PARAMETERS MMC: 830

EXECUTIVE STATE MMC: 125

EXTENSION TYPE MMC: 221

FAX PAIR MMC: 222

FORCED TRUNK RELEASE MMC: 407

H.323 GK OPTIONS MMC: 836

H.323 OPTIONS MMC: 834

HALT PROCESSING MMC: 810

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 1-19

Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued)

MMC Name MMC No.

HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY MMC: 859

HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT MMC: 512

HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION MMC: 306

HOTEL OPERATION MMC: 813

HOTEL TIMER MMC: 513

IDLE DISPLAY MMC: 719

INITIALIZE PORT MMC: 890

IP PHONE INFORMATION MMC: 840

ISDN SERVICE TYPE MMC: 220

ITEM COST TABLE MMC: 760

KEY EXTENDER MMC: 107

LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS MMC: 829

LARGE LCD OPTIONS MMC: 120

LCR CLASS OF SERVICE MMC: 310

LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC: 710

LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE MMC: 713

LCR ROUTE TABLE MMC: 712

LCR TIME TABLE MMC: 711

MAINTENANCE BUSY MMC: 853

MGI DSP OPTIONS MMC: 835

MGI GROUP MMC: 615

MGI PARAMETERS MMC: 831

MGI USER MMC: 616

MPD/PRS SIGNAL MMC: 414

MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE MMC: 511

MSN DIGIT MMC: 421

MY AREA CODE MMC: 718

NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION MMC: 824

NEWS DISPLAY SPEED MMC: 122

NODE INFO MMC: 863

OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING MMC: 200

PHONE LANGUAGE MMC: 121

PHONE RING TONE MMC: 111

PHONE VOLUME MMC: 114

PHONE VOLUME CONTROL MMC: 807

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1-20 Samsung Business Communications

Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued)

MMC Name MMC No.

PICKUP GROUPS MMC: 302

PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER MMC: 320

PRI OPTIONS MMC: 420

PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES MMC: 838

PROGRAM DOWNLOAD MMC: 818

PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE MMC: 715

PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO MMC: 504

RATE CALCULATION TABLE MMC: 747

RBT MESSAGE MMC: 326

RELAY TYPE MMC: 219

REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA MMC: 415

RESET SYSTEM MMC: 811

ROOM COST RATE MMC: 762

S/T MODE MMC: 423

SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 721

SECOND LCR MMC: 763

SET ANSWER MODE MMC: 103

SET COUNTRY CODE MMC: 812

SET H-TRK MMC: 432

SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE MMC: 115

SHOW LICENSE MMC: 199

SIP OPTIONS MMC: 837

SIP USER MMC: 839

SLI RING CADENCE MMC: 510

MC FILE CONTROL MMC: 819

SMDR OPTIONS MMC: 725

STATION GROUP NAME MMC: 602

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 722

STATION LOCK MMC: 100

STATION NAME MMC: 104

STATION ON/OFF MMC: 110

STATION PAIR MMC: 740

STATION SPEED DIAL MMC: 105

STATION SPEED DIAL NAME MMC: 106

STATION STATUS MMC: 108

STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP MMC: 614

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 1-21

Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued)

MMC Name MMC No.

STATION-WIDE TIMERS MMC: 502

SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS MMC: 852

SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 723

SYSTEM SIO MODE MMC: 804

SYSTEM IP OPTIONS MMC: 841

SYSTEM OPTIONS MMC: 861

SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY MMC: 850

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME MMC: 706

SYSTEM TIMERS MMC: 501

SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY MMC: 727

SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS MMC: 500

TAX RATE SETUP MMC: 761

TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS MMC: 856

TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE MMC: 703

TOLL DENY TABLE MMC: 702

TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE MMC: 709

TONE CADENCE MMC: 506

TONE SOURCE MMC: 514

TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION MMC: 217

TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER MMC: 405

TRUNK COS MMC: 422

TRUNK DIAL TYPE MMC: 402

TRUNK GAIN CONTROL MMC: 426

TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE MMC: 401

TRUNK NAME MMC: 404

TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT MMC: 406

TRUNK STATUS READ MMC: 409

TRUNK TMC GAIN MMC: 436

TRUNK TOLL CLASS MMC: 403

TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS MMC: 503

TX LEVEL AND GAIN MMC: 805

UCD AGENT ID MMC: 717

UCD OPTIONS MMC: 607

UK LCR OPTION MMC: 716

VIEW MEMO NUMBER MMC: 113

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1-22 Samsung Business Communications

Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued)

MMC Name MMC No.

VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE MMC: 822

VM ALARM MMC: 755

VM CARD RESTART MMC: 750

VM DAY/NIGHT MMC: 758

VM HALT MMC: 754

VM IN/OUT MMC: 757

VoIP ACCESS CODE MMC: 832

VoIP IP TABLE MMC: 833

WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT MMC: 224

WARNING DESTINATION MMC: 753

WIP INFORMATION MMC: 846

WLAN CONFIGURATION MMC: 849

WLAN IP/MAC LIST MMC: 848

WLAN PARAMETERS MMC: 845

16TRK GAIN MMC: 437

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 1-23

1.6 Program List by Function

This section describes MMC programs are classified by the function of the OfficeServ

7100.

1.6.1 Phone Function

The MMC programs related to the function of a phone that is connected with the Office-

Serv 7100 are as follows:

Table 1.10 Phone Function Programming list

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 100 STATION LOCK

MMC: 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE

MMC: 102 CALL FORWARD

MMC: 103 SET ANSWER MODE

MMC: 104 STATION NAME

MMC: 105 STATION SPEED DIAL

MMC: 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

MMC: 107 KEY EXTENDER

MMC: 108 STATION STATUS

MMC: 109 DATE DISPLAY

MMC: 110 STATION ON/OFF

MMC: 111 PHONE RING TONE

MMC: 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

MMC: 114 PHONE VOLUME

MMC: 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

MMC: 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE

MMC: 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1-24 Samsung Business Communications

1.6.2 Networking Function

The MMC programs related to the function of networking are as follows:

Table 1.11 Networking Function Programming list

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

MMC: 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK

MMC: 822 SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE

MMC: 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS

MMC: 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION

MMC: 825 ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION

MMC: 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETER

MMC: 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS

MMC: 837 SIP OPTIONS

MMC: 840 IP PHONE INFORMATIONES

MMC: 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

1.6.3 VoIP Function

The MMC programs related to the function of VoIP(Voice over Internet Protocol) are as

follows:

Table 1.12 VoIP Function Programming list

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 831 MGI PARAMETERS

MMC: 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE

MMC: 833 VoIP IP TABLE

MMC: 834 H.323 OPTIONS

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 1-25

Table 1.12 VoIP Function Programming list(continued)

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS

MMC: 836 H.323 GK OPTIONS

1.6.4 WLAN Function

The MMC programs related to the function of WLAN(Wireless Local Area Network) are

as follows:

Table 1.13 WLAN Function Programming list

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 845 WLAN PARAMETER

MMC: 846 WIP INFORMATION

MMC: 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST

MMC: 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION

1.6.5 LCR Function

The MMC programs related to the function of LCR(Least Cost Routing) are as follows:

Table 1.14 LCR Function Programming list

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE

MMC: 711 LCR TIME TABLE

MMC: 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE

MMC: 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

MMC: 763 SECOND LCR

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1-26 Samsung Business Communications

1.6.6 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function

The MMC programs related to the function of AA(Auto Attendant) or VM(Voice Mail) are

as follows:

Table 1.15 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function Programming list

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

MMC: 215 VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS

MMC: 216 VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS

MMC: 730 AA RECORD GAIN

MMC: 731 AA RAM CLEAR

MMC: 732 AA TRANSLATION TABLE

MMC: 733 AA PLAN TABLE

MMC: 735 AA USE TABLE

MMC: 736 AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH

MMC: 739 ASSIGN AA MOH

MMC: 750 VM CARD RESTART

MMC: 751 ASSIGN MAILBOX

MMC: 752 AUTO RECORD

MMC: 753 WARNING DESTINATION

MMC: 754 VM HALT

MMC: 755 VM ALARM

MMC: 756 ASSIGN VM MOH

MMC: 757 VM IN/OUT

MMC: 758 VM DAY/NIGHT

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 1-27

1.6.7 Diagnosis Function

The MMC programs related to the function of diagnosing the system are as follows:

Table 1.16 Diagnosis Function Programming list

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 434 CONNECTION STATUS

MMC: 851 ALARM REPORTING

MMC: 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

MMC: 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY

MMC: 854 DIAGNOSTIC TIME

MMC: 890 INITIALIZE PORT

1.6.8 Hotel Function

The MMC programs related to the function of a hotel are as follows:

Table 1.17 Hotel Function Programming list

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 221 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION

MMC: 222 EXTENSION TYPE

MMC: 433 COST RATE

MMC: 513 HOTEL TIMER

MMC: 748 COSTING DIAL PLAN

MMC: 749 RATE CALCULATION TABLE

MMC: 760 ITEM COST TABLE

MMC: 761 TAX RATE SETUP

MMC: 762 ROOM COST RATE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-1

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

This chapter describes how to use each MMC program as it was listed.

2.1 Overview of Programming Procedure

The order of programming will be discussed before explaining programming method of

each list. Please read the description carefully before programming.

The programming order is as follows:

1) Make the programmable state.

y Press the Transfer button at pause.

y Enter the program number, either 200 or 800.

y Enter either the operator passcode or the technician passcode.

y Press 1 dial button to ‘enable’ the programming mode.

y In case of Program 800 Technician Program Mode Setting, enter the tenant number

to be programmed.

2) Make the program number selectable state.

If the Speaker button is pressed, the program selection mode appears.

Or, if the Transfer button is pressed, the programming state ends and the pause state

begin.

3) Select a program.

Enter the program number.

Or, select the program number with the Volume button and press the Speaker button.

Or, Press Transfer button in a pause state and enter the program number.

4) Start programming the corresponding program.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-2 Samsung Business Communications

2.2 Programming Procedure

This section describes a procedure of each program. Refer to the programming procedure

corresponding to the MMC.

[100] STATION LOCK

Allows the system administrator or technician to lock or unlock an individual station or all

stations simultaneously. The three options are as follows:

No Type Description

0 UNLOCKED Unlocks a locked station.

1 LOCKED OUT The phone cannot make calls outside the system. It can however make

and receive intercom calls and receive incoming Trunk Line calls. When

in this mode the Hold button will flash slow RED.

2 LOCKED ALL The phone cannot make or receive any calls. When in this mode the

Hold button will light steady RED.

CONDITIONS

y Check if the station lock function is disabled at ‘MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS’.

If so, the station cannot be locked, but a locked station can be unlocked.

y A station can be locked or unlocked under any condition when the station is in Opera-

tor Level Programming or Technician Level Programming.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL STATIONS UNLOCKED

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-3

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 100.

Display shows:

[201] STN LOCK

UNLOCKED

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] STN LOCK

UNLOCKED

Press Volume button to select station and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all stations.

[ALL] STN LOCK

3) Enter 0 to unlock or 1 to lock.(e.g., 1)

[205] STN LOCK

LOCKED OUT

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE

MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS

MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-4 Samsung Business Communications

[101] CHANGE USER PASSCODE

Allows the system administrator or technician to reset any phone’s passcode to its default

value of ‘1234’. This MMC cannot display station passcodes; it can only reset them to de-

fault.

Phone users can set or change their individual passcodes. The passcode is used to lock or

unlock the phone for toll restriction(call barring) override and to access the DISA feature.

CONDITIONS

y The passcode of a station performing Operator Level Programming or Technician

Level Programming cannot be changed while the program mode is ‘ENABLE’.

y An Operator or Technician Level can only delete the passcode of a station and reset the

passcode to the default value, ‘1234’, not permitting to know the passcode.

Default passcodes

Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISA access.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL STATION PASSCODES: 1234

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 101.

Display shows:

[201] PASSCODE

PASSCODE:****

2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)

[205] PASSCODE

PASSCODE:****

Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers

and press Right Soft button to move the cursor right.

3) Press Hold button to reset passcode. [205] PASSCODE

PASSCODE:1234

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 100 STATION LOCK

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-5

[102] CALL FORWARD

Allows the system administrator to program the call forward destinations for other station

users. This MMC also allows call forward to be set after the destination has been entered.

Allows several types of call forwarding: FORWARD ALL, FORWARD NO ANSWER,

FORWARD BUSY and FORWARD DND. There is an additional option, FORWARD

BUSY/NO ANSWER, that allows both of these options to be activated at the same time,

provided that destinations have been entered for both.

No Type

0 FORWARD CANCEL

1 FORWARD ALL CALL

2 FORWARD BUSY

3 FORWARD NO ANSWER

4 FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER

5 FORWARD DND

CONDITIONS

y When ‘FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER’ is selected, calls are forwarded to stations set

in ‘FORWARD BUSY’ and ‘FORWARD NO ANSWER’. Thus, a destination number

must be set for both ‘FORWARD BUSY’ and ‘FORWARD NO ANSWER’ before you

can select the ‘FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER’ option.

y If forwarding is set to ‘OFF’ in MMC 701, ASSIGN COS CONTENTS, call forwarding

cannot be set but can be cancelled.(Default: ‘OFF’)

y Both ‘FORWARD’ and ‘EXT FWD’ must be set to ‘ON’ in MMC 701, ASSIGN COS

CONTENTS in order to forward a call to an external number. If only ‘FORWARD’ is set

to ‘ON’, calls can only be forwarded to internal numbers.(Default: ‘OFF’)

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-6 Samsung Business Communications

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 102.

Display shows:

[201] FORWARD

0:FORWARD CANCEL

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] FORWARD

0:FORWARD CANCEL

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 0-5 to select forward type.

[205] FORWARD

1:ALL CALL:NONE

Press Volume button to select forward type(e.g., 1)

and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Dial destination number.(e.g., 201)

[205] FORWARD

1:ALL CALL:201

Press Volume button to select destination and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

5) Dial 1 for YES, 0 for NO.

[205] FORWARD

CURRENTLY SET:YES

Press Volume button to select YES or NO

and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS

MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS

MMC 502 STATION-WIDE TIMERS

MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-7

[103] SET ANSWER MODE

Allows the system administrator to change the answer mode of any phone. Each phone can

have its answer mode set to one of the following options:

No Type Description

0 RING MODE The phone will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns. Calls

are answered by pressing the ANS/RLS or SEND button or

by lifting the handset.

1 AUTO ANSWER MODE After giving a short attention tone, the phone will automati-

cally answer calls on the speakerphone. When a Trunk line is

transferred to a phone in Auto Answer, the screened portion

of the call will be Auto Answered, but the phone will ring when

the transfer is complete if you have not pressed the ANS/RLS

or SEND button or lifted the handset.*

2 VOICE ANNOUNCE The phone will not ring. After a short attention tone, callers

can make an announcement but the ANS/RLS or SEND but-

ton or handset must be used to answer calls.

To answer the C.O. call automatically

To answer the C.O. call automatically, set ‘ON’ the option ‘AUTO ANS CO’ in

MMC 110.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL PHONES: RING

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-8 Samsung Business Communications

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 103.

Display shows:

[201] ANS MODE

RING MODE

2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)

[205] ANS MODE

RING MODE

Press Volume button to select phone and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all phones.

[ALL] ANS MODE

3) Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change ring mode.

[205] ANS MODE

VOICE ANNOUNCE

Press Volume button to select ring mode and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-9

[104] STATION NAME

Allows the system administrator or technician to enter a name up to 11 characters to iden-

tify an individual station.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing the dial

pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name is ‘SAM

SMITH,’ press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’. Now press the number ‘2’

once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete

your message. Pressing ‘A’ button toggles between upper case and lower case.

Volume Up/Down keys

When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous

character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the Vol-

ume Down button to move the cursor to the left. A space can be entered using

these keys.

COUNT 1 2 3 4 5

DIAL 0 < > . ) 0

DIAL 1 Space ? , ! 1

DIAL 2 A B C @ 2

DIAL 3 D E F # 3

DIAL 4 G H I $ 4

DIAL 5 J K L % 5

DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6

DIAL 7 P Q R S 7

DIAL 8 T U V * 8

DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9

DIAL * : = [ ] *

The # button can be used for the following special characters:

#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , ”, Æ, ’. \.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-10 Samsung Business Communications

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 104.

Display shows:

[201] STN NAME

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] STN NAME

Press Volume button to select station and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter the station name using the procedure

described above and press Right Soft button

[205] STN NAME

SAM SMITH

to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-11

[105] STATION SPEED DIAL

Allows the system administrator or technician to assign phone numbers to a station’s per-

sonal speed dial locations.

CONDITIONS

Each station may have up to 50 locations(or bins) assigned to it in MMC 606(Assign Speed

Block). The speed dial bins are numbered 00~49. Each assigned phone number consists of

a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dial.

These dial digits may consist of 0~9, * and #. If the system recognizes a valid trunk or

trunk group access number, it will automatically insert the separator.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS

B Used to insert a flash code ‘F’

C Used to insert a pause code ‘P’

D Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’

E Used to mask/unmask following digits(shows as ‘[’or ‘]’)

F Used to enter name for speed dial bin(see MMC 106)

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 105.

Display shows:

[201] SPEED DIAL

00:

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] SPEED DIAL

00:

Press Volume button to select station and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

If selected station has no speed dial bins,

the display will be as shown and a new station

[205] SPEED DIAL

SPDBLK NOT EXIST

may be selected.

3) Dial location number.(e.g., 05)

[205] SPEED DIAL

05:_

Press Volume button to select location and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-12 Samsung Business Communications

4) Enter trunk access code(e.g., 9) followed by

the number to be dialed.(e.g., 4264100)

[205] SPEED DIAL

05:9-4264100_

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

Press Hold button to clear an entry.

If an error is made, use VOLUME DOWN arrow to

step back.

5) Press ‘F’ button to access MMC 106(Station Speed

Dial Name) to enter a name for speed dial.

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-13

[106] STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered for each personal speed dial location. This

allows speed dial numbers to be selected by name when the directory dial feature is used.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 106.

Display shows:

[201] SPEED NAME

00:

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] SPEED NAME

00:

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

If selected station has no speed dial bins, the display

will be as shown and a new station may be selected.

[305] SPEED NAME

SPDBLK NOT EXIST

3) Dial speed dial location.(e.g., 01)

[205] SPEED NAME

01:_

Press Volume button to scroll through location num-

bers and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter the location name using the procedure

described above and press Right Soft button to

[205] SPEED NAME

01:SAM SMITH

return to step 2.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL

MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-14 Samsung Business Communications

[107] KEY EXTENDER

Use this program to view the programmable buttons assigned to stations. In addition, it al-

lows the system administrator to assign key extenders to some keys to make a general ac-

cess feature key more specific. The feature keys that can have extenders are listed below.

Key Feature Extender

AB Absence Extension number

ACC Account code bin 000-999

BOSS Boss and Secretary 1-4

CR VM Call Record Mailbox number

CS UCD Call Status UCD group number

DIR Directory dial by name type 1-3

DP Direct Pickup Extension or station group number

DS Direct Station Select Station number

FWRD Call Forward 0-7

GPIK Group Pickup 01-99

IG In/Out of Group Station group number

MMPG Meet Me Page 0-9, *

MW Message Waiting Extension or station group number

MS Manual Signalling Extension or station group number

PAGE Page 0-9, *

PARK Park Orbits 0-9

PMSG Programmed Station Messaging 01-20

RP Ring Plan 1-6

RSV Room Status View(Hotel Application only) 1-5

SG Station Group Station group number

SP UCD Supervisor UCD group number

SPD Speed Dial Personal: 00-49

System: 500-999

VG SVM-800 Group Message Station group number

VM VM Memo Extension or station group number

VT Voice Transfer VM group number

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-15

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 107.

Display shows first station:

[201] EXT (MAST)

01:CALL1Æ

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] EXT (MAST)

01:CALL1Æ

Use Volume button to scroll through station numbers

and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3) Enter key number.(e.g., 18)

[205] EXT (MAST)

18:DSÆ

Use Volume button to scroll through keys and

use Right Soft button to move the cursor.

Press the key to be programmed.

[205] EXT (MAST)

18: DSÆ DS_

4) Dial extender according to above table.

System will return to step 3.

[205] EXT (MAST)

18: DSÆ DS207

5) Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

When using the Right Soft button

When the Right Soft button will not move the cursor to the right, you are attempt-

ing to add an extender to a key that cannot have one.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-16 Samsung Business Communications

[108] STATION STATUS

This is a READ-ONLY MMC. Displays the following attributes of a station port.

No Status Description

0 PORT NO Cabinet(1)/Slot(MP,1,2)/Port(1-12)

1 TYPE Phone Type

2 PICKUP GROUP None, 01-99

3 SGR Station Group Number

4 BOSS-SECR None, 1-4

5 PAGE None, Page Zone(0-4, * )

6 COS 1, COS 2 COS(1-30) per Ring Plan(01-06)

DEFAULT DATA

PORT #: FOLLOWS HARDWARE POSITION

TYPE: DEPENDENT ON CONNECTED PHONE

PICKUP GRP: NONE

SGR: NONE

BOSS-SECR: NONE

PAGE ZONE: NONE

COS NUMBER: 01 IN ALL RING PLANS

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 108.

Display shows first station:

[201] STN STATUS

PORT:C1-S1-P01

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] STN STATUS

PORT:C1- S1-P05

Press Volume button to select station and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 0~9 to select station status type.

[205] STN STATUS

PICKUP GROUP:01

Press Volume button to select status and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-17

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS

MMC 302 PICKUP GROUPS

MMC 303 ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY

MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

MMC 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-18 Samsung Business Communications

[109] DATE DISPLAY

Allows the system administrator or technician to select the date and time display mode on a

per-station basis or system-wide.

No Mode Description

0 COUNTRY Sets overall display format and has two options:

0 = ORIENTAL MM/DD DAY HH:MM

1 = WESTERN DAY DD MON HH:MM

1 CLOCK Sets format of clock display and has two options:

0 = 12 HOUR Displays 1 P.M. as 01:00

1 = 24 HOUR Displays 1 P.M. as 13:00

2 DISPLAY Sets format of DAY and MON display and has two options:

0 = UPPER CASE Displays Friday as ‘FRI’ and March as ‘MAR’.

1 = LOWER CASE Displays Friday as ‘Fri’ and March as ‘Mar’.

CONDITIONS

NONE

DEFAULT DATA

COUNTRY: WESTERN

CLOCK: 12 HOUR

DISPLAY: LOWER CASE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 109.

Display shows:

[201] DAY FORMAT

COUNTRY:WESTERN

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] DAY FORMAT

COUNTRY:WESTERN

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all stations.

[ALL] DAY FORMAT

COUNTRY:?

3) Dial 0~2 to select mode.

[205] DAY FORMAT

COUNTRY:ORIENTAL

Press Volume button to scroll through modes and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Press Volume button to scroll through formats and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-19

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-20 Samsung Business Communications

[110] STATION ON/OFF

Allows the system administrator to set any of the phone features listed below.

No Feature Default Description

00 AUTO HOLD OFF Automatically places an existing Trunk Line call on hold if

a CALL key, trunk key or trunk route key is pressed dur-

ing that call.

01 AUTO TIMER ON Automatically starts the stopwatch timer during a Trunk

Line call.

02 HEADSET USE OFF When ON, this feature disables the hook switch allowing

a headset user to answer all calls by pressing the

ANS/RLS button or SEND and END buttons.

03 HOT KEYPAD ON When ON, this feature allows you to dial directory num-

bers without having to first lift the handset or press the

Speaker button.

04 KEY TONE ON Allows you to hear a slight tone when pressing buttons

on phone.

05 PAGE REJOIN ON Allows you to hear the remaining part of page an-

nouncements if phone becomes free during a page.

06 RING PREF. ON When OFF, requires you to press the fast flashing button

to answer a ringing call after lifting the handset.

07 CALL COST OFF When ON, the cost of the call in progress will show in the

upper right corner of the phone display instead of dura-

tion of the call.

08 AUTO CAMPON OFF When ON, phone users can allow intercom calls to

camp-on to other phones without having to press a

CAMP-ON key.

09 AME BGM OFF This feature selects whether a station using Answer Ma-

chine Emulation will hear their personal greeting or BGM

while callers are listening to the personal greeting.

A BGM source must be selected for this to work.

10 AME PASSCODE OFF When ON, station users who have AME set must enter

their station password to listen to messages being left.

11 DISP SPDNAME OFF When ON, the speed dial name associated with a speed

dial number is displayed on a phone equipped a LCD

display when using speed dial.

12 CID REVW ALL ON When ON, saves information on all calls that ring at an

extension, When OFF, saves information only on calls

that were not answered at the extension or were an-

swered by voice mail.

13 SECURE OHVA ON When ON, OHVA announcements will be heard on the

handset. When OFF, OHVA announcements will be

heard over the phone speaker.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-21

(continued)

No Feature Default Description

14 NOT CONT.CID ON When OFF, the Caller ID will be displayed for the dura-

tion of the call. When ON, displays timer for duration of

call(if AUTO TIMER also set on).

15 AUTO ANS CO OFF When ON, keyset will automatically answer outside calls

through the speakerphone. For this to work, the keyset

must be set to Auto Answer mode in MMC 103. Calls to

groups cannot be auto-answered.

16 ENBLOCK 2LCD OFF Enables Enbloc dialling for 2-Line LCD phones.This op-

tion only works when 2 LINE ENBLOCK option is en-

abled in MMC 861.

17 STN NO RING OFF When ON, no tones will be heard when phone rings.

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 110.

Display shows:

[201] STN ON/OFF

AUTO HOLD :OFF

2) Dial the station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] STN ON/OFF

AUTO HOLD :OFF

Press Volume button to select station and

press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

Select all stations.

3) Dial option number from above list.(e.g., 03)

[205] STN ON/OFF

HOT KEYPAD :ON

Press Volume button to select option and

press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

4) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.

[201] STN ON/OFF

HOT KEYPAD :OFF

Press Volume button to select ON or OFF.

Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-22 Samsung Business Communications

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS

MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-23

[111] PHONE RING TONE

Allows the system administrator or technician to select the ring tone heard at each phone.

Eight ring tones are available. A short tone burst of the selection will be heard when the

dial keypad is pressed.

DEFAULT DATA

FREQUENCY: 5

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 111.

Display shows:

[201] RING TONE

SELECTION 5

2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)

[205] RING TONE

SELECTION 5

Press Volume button to select station and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all stations.

[ALL] RING TONE

SELECTION ?

3) Dial 1~8 to select ring tone.

[205] RING TONE

SELECTION 5

Press Volume button to select ring tone and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 114 PHONE VOLUME

MMC 318 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-24 Samsung Business Communications

[112] ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment

reminder feature for any station. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm

may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm, or as a DAILY alarm. The TODAY alarm

is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same

time. Alarm numbers are 1, 2 and 3. In the case of Station Pair assignments(MMC 740) the

alarm only rings the station that is programmed and does not ring the paired station.

No Type Description

0 NOTSET No alarm

1 TODAY Alarm once only

2 DAILY Alarm daily at set time

DEFAULT DATA

ALARMS ARE NOTSET

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 112.

Display shows:

[201] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM:ÆNOTSET

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM:ÆNOTSET

Press Volume button to select station and

press Right Soft button.

3) Dial 1~3 to select alarm.(e.g., 1)

[205] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM:ÆNOTSET

Press Volume button to select alarm and

press Right Soft button.

4) Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format.

(e.g., 1300 for 1pm)

[205] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM:1300ÆNOTSET

5) Dial entry from above list for alarm type.(e.g., 2)

[205] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM:1300ÆDAILY

Press Volume button to select alarm type and press

Right Soft button to move cursor and return to

step 2.

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-25

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-26 Samsung Business Communications

[113] VIEW MEMO NUMBER

Allows a station user the ability to view a memo left by the user. A memo can be left by en-

tering it via the dial keypad using the table below. A memo of up to and including 13 char-

acters can be entered.

ENTER CHARACTERS

Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 113.

Display shows:

[201] VIEW MEMO

2) Dial the keyset number.(e.g., 205)

[205] VIEW MEMO

Press VOLUME keys to select station and

press RIGHT soft key to move cursor.

3) Dial memo number.(1–3)

[205] VIEW MEMO

1:_

Press VOLUME keys to select and press RIGHT soft

key to move cursor.

4) Enter memo via dial keypad. [205] VIEW MEMO

1:CALL TOM

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-27

[114] PHONE VOLUME

Allows the station user or system administrator to set the ring volume, off-hook ring vol-

ume, handset receive volume, speaker volume, background music volume and page volume

for any or all phones.

No Type Description

0 RING VOLUME This is the volume setting for the phone ringer. There are eight volume

levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.

1 OFF-RING VOL This is the volume of the alert tone that tells you there is a call camped

on to your phone. There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest

and level 8 the highest.

2 HANDSET VOL This is the volume setting for conversations on the handset receiver.

There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the

highest.

3 SPEAKER VOL This is the receive volume setting for conversations on the speaker

phone of a phone. There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest

and level 16 the highest.

4 BGM VOLUME This is the volume you will hear background music over the phone

speaker at when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are

16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.

5 PAGE VOLUME This is the volume you will hear internal page over the phone speaker

when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are 16 volume

levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.

DEFAULT DATA

RING VOLUME: 4

OFF-HOOK RING VOLUME: 4

HANDSET VOLUME: 4

SPEAKER VOLUME: 13

BGM VOLUME: 13

PAGE VOLUME: 13

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-28 Samsung Business Communications

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 114.

Display shows:

[201] STN VOLUME

RING VOLUME :4

2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205) [205] STN VOLUME

RING VOLUME :4

3) Dial volume type.(e.g., 3)

[205] STN VOLUME

SPEAKER VOL :13

Press Volume button to select volume type and press

RIGHT soft key to move cursor.

4) Press Volume button to select volume.(You will hear a

brief tone for the volume you select.)

[205] STN VOLUME

SPEAKER VOL :08

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-29

[115] SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

Allows the system administrator to set a programmed message at any or all display phones.

There are 20 messages(01-20) available. The last five message can be modified by each

phone user.

CONDITIONS

These messages are as set up in MMC 715, PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE.

DEFAULT DATA

NO MESSAGES SELECTED

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 115.

Display shows:

[201] PGMMSG(00)

CANCEL PGM MSG

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] PGMMSG(00)

CANCEL PGM MSG

Press Volume button to select station and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all stations.

[ALL] PGMMSG(??)

3) Dial message number.(e.g., 05)

[205] PGMMSG(05)

PAGE ME

Press Volume button to select message and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

Dial 00 to cancel an existing message.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 715 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-30 Samsung Business Communications

[116] ALARM AND MESSAGE

Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment

reminder feature for any station. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm

may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm, or as a DAILY alarm.

The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings

every day at the same time. It is also possible to set a message to display when the alarm is

sounded.

No Type Description

0 NOTSET No alarm

1 TODAY Alarm once only

2 DAILY Alarm daily at set time

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

ALARMS ARE NOTSET

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 116.

Display shows:

[201] ALM REM(1)

HHMM:ÆNOTSET

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] ALM REM(1)

HHMM:ÆNOTSET

Press Volume button to select station and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all stations.

[ALL] ALM REM(1)

HHMM:ÆNOTSET

3) Dial 1~3 to select alarm.(e.g., 2)

[205] ALM REM(2)

HHMM:ÆNOTSET

Press Volume button to select alarm and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format.

(e.g., 1300 for 1pm)

[205] ALM REM(2)

HHMM:1300ÆNOTSET

Display will automatically advance to step 5.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-31

5) Dial valid entry from above list for alarm type.

(e.g., 2)

[205] ALM REM

HHMM:1300ÆDAILY

Press Volume button to select alarm type and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

6) Enter message and press Right Soft button to

return to step 2.

[205] ALM REM

Meeting

7) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-32 Samsung Business Communications

[117] EDIT TEXT MESSAGE

Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change text messages for any sta-

tion. One station can use up to 10 text messages.

CONDITIONS

Only stations allowed to use text messages in MMC 611 can be selected here. Large LCD

phones are automatically allowed.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

BLANK MESSAGE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 117.

Display shows:

[201] TXTMSG(01)

Blank Message

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] TXTMSG(01)

Blank Message

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 01~10 to select message.

[205] TXTMSG(02)

Blank Message

Press Volume button to select message and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter message and press Right Soft button to return to

step 3.

[205] TXTMSG(02)

SAME TIME

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 611 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-33

[118] CONFERENCE GROUP

Allows the system administrator or technician to set conference groups for any station.

A station is allowed up to five conference groups, and each group can include 4 members

(excluding the station itself). Names can be allocated to groups.

Conference members can be other stations, station groups, and external telephone numbers.

(which must include the outgoing access code)

CONDITIONS

Only stations set to use conference groups in MMC 612 can be selected here. Large LCD

phones are automatically set to use conference groups.

ENTERING CONFERENCE GROUP NAME

Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 118.

Display shows:

[201] GRP(1)NAME

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] GRP(1)NAME

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 1~5 to select group.

[205] GRP(1)NAME

Press Volume button to select group and press.

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Dial 0 to select name or dial 1~4 to select member.

[205] GRP(1)MBR1

NONE

Press Volume button to select name or member

and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-34 Samsung Business Communications

5) Enter conference member dial number and

press Right Soft button to return to step 4.

[205] GRP(1)MBR1

9-2794296

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 612 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-35

[119] CALLER ID DISPLAY

Allows the technician to set the individual station display preference on a per-station basis.

Caller ID or CLI can be selected to either show the name, number first, or no display de-

pending on the type of call. Caller ID or CLI displays have the following options:

No Type Description

0 NO DISPLAY No Caller ID or CLIP data will be displayed.

1 NUMBER FIRST The Caller ID or CLIP number received from the Central Office

will be displayed first.

2 NAME FIRST The Caller ID or CLIP name received will be displayed first.

In the case of CLIP the number must be programmed in the

CLIP translation table(MMC 728). CLIP does not provide

names.

DEFAULT DATA

NUMBER FIRST

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 119.

Display shows first station:

[201] CID DISP

NUMBER FIRST

2) Enter station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] CID DISP

NUMBER FIRST

Press Volume button to select station and press Right

Soft button.

Select all stations.

[ALL] CID DISP

NUMBER FIRST

3) Dial display option 0, 1 or 2.(e.g., 2)

[205] CID DISP

NAME FIRST

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right or Left Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID

MMC 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK

MMC 728 CID TRANSLATION TABLE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-36 Samsung Business Communications

[120] LARGE LCD OPTIONS

Allows the system administrator to set any of the following options for large LCD phones.

No Option Description

0 IDLE DISPLAY Sets whether to display ‘CALENDAR’ or ‘INFORMATION’ on

LCD when idle.

1 DS KEY DISPLAY Sets whether to display extension numbers or names for ‘DS’

keys on LCD.

2 DIAL MODE Sets dial mode to ENBLOCK or OVERLAP.

3 CONV DISP SOFT MENU FIRST

If selected, features assigned to keys are displayed when

SCREEN key is pressed while on a call.

AOM KEY FIRST

If selected, extensions assigned to keys are displayed when

SCREEN key is pressed while on a call.

4 CALENDAR Sets whether to display PREVIOUS screen or CALENDAR

screen on LCD when idle.

5 AOM CURSOR Sets cursor position on AOM menu screen.(01~99, PREV POSI-

TION)

DEFAULT DATA

IDLE DISPLAY: CALENDAR

DS KEY DISPLAY: TEL NUMBER

DIAL MODE: ENBLOCK

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 120.

Display shows:

[201] IDLE DISP

CALENDER

2) Enter station number.(e.g., 203)

[203] IDLE DISP

CALENDER

Press Volume button to scroll through stations and

press Right Soft button to select a station.

Select all stations and press the Right Soft button.

[ALL] IDLE DISP

CALENDER

3) Dial the option number from above list.(e.g., 1)

[203] DS KEY DSP

TEL NUMBER

Press Volume button to select the option and

press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-37

4) Press Volume button to select display type and press Right

Soft button.

[203] DS KEY DSP

EXT NAME

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 719 IDLE DISPLAY

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-38 Samsung Business Communications

[121] PHONE LANGUAGE

Allows the system administrator to assign an LCD display based on the user’s own lan-

guage.

No Language

00 ENGLISH

01 GERMAN

02 PORTUGAL

03 NORSK

04 DANISH

05 DUTCH

06 ITALY

07 SPANISH

08 SWEDISH

09 SPANISH/USA

10 FRENCH/CANADA

11 FINNISH

DEFAULT DATA

ENGLISH

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 121.

Display shows:

[201] LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

Press Volume button to select station and use

Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all stations.

[ALL] LANGUAGE

3) Dial 00~10 for language required.

[205] LANGUAGE

GERMAN

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-39

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-40 Samsung Business Communications

[122] NEWS DISPLAY SPEED

Used to set the Smart News display speed between 0300 mS(fastest) and 1 sec(slowest).

This timer is related to the Smart News PC Application Package.

DEFAULT DATA

03(0300 mS)

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 122.

Display shows first station:

[201] CALL SPEED

03Æ

2) Enter station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] CALL SPEED

03Æ

Press Volume button to scroll through stations

and press Right Soft button to select a station.

Select all stations.

3) Dial speed option.(03~10)

[205] CALL SPEED

03Æ04

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-41

[125] EXECUTIVE STATE

Allows the system administrator or technician to set an executive station’s options, as fol-

lows.

No Option Description

0 EXEC STATE When working with EASYSET, the state of the executive station can

be displayed.(e.g., IN A MEETING)

1 STATE(IN) If EXEC STATE set to OTHERS(IN), EASYSET displays this message.

2 STATE(OUT) If EXEC STATE set to OTHERS(OUT), EASYSET displays this mes-

sage.

3 ANSWER MODE Set answer mode for executive/secretary calling: Ring, Auto Answer,

Voice Announce.(Refer to MMC 103 for a description of answer

modes.)

ENTER CHARACTERS

Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 125.

Display shows:

[201] EXEC STATE

IN THE ROOM

2) Dial executive station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] EXEC STATE

IN THE ROOM

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 0~3 to select option.(see the table above).

[205] EXEC STATE

IN THE ROOM

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

4) Dial 0~9 to select state.(e.g., IN A MEETING)

[205] EXEC STATE

IN A MEETING

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-42 Samsung Business Communications

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-43

[199] SHOW LICENSE STATUS

Allows the system administrator or technician to confirm the status(Valid or Invalid) of the

inserted license key.

No Feature Description

0 MGI MAX The license status for MGI port

1 VMS MAX The license status for VMS port

2 SOFT MAX The license status for SoftPhone max

3 SOFT USE The license status for SoftPhone use

4 SOFT CON The license status for SoftPhone connect

5 NEWS USE The license status for NEWS USE

DEFAULT DATA

INVALID

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 199.

SHOW LICENSE STS

MGI MAX: INVALID

2) Use Volume buttons to confirm the status of the in-

serted license key.

SHOW LICENSE STS

VMS MAX: 8

3) Press Transfer button to exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTION

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-44 Samsung Business Communications

[200] OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

Used to open(enable) and close(disable) customer-level programming. If programming is

not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC, the error message [NOT

PERMIT] will be displayed. A four digits passcode is required to access this MMC. Each

digit can be 0-9. When opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs allowed in MMC

802, Customer Access MMC Number.

No Mode Description

0 DISABLE Open(enable) customer-level programming.

1 ENABLE Close(disable) customer-level programming.

DEFAULT DATA

DISABLE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 200.

Display shows:

ENABLE CUS.PROG.

PASSCODE:

2) Enter passcode. ENABLE CUS.PROG.

PASSCODE:

Correct code shows. ENABLE CUS.PROG.

DISABLE

Incorrect code shows. ENABLE CUS.PROG.

PASSCODE ERROR

3) Press Volume button arrow key to select ENABLE

or DISABLE and press Right Soft button.

ENABLE CUS.PROG.

ENABLE

Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE.

4) Press Speaker button to advance MMC entry level

and press Volume button to select MMC.

201:CUS.PASSCODE

SELECT PROG. ID

Enter MMC number and press Right Soft button

to enter MMC.

5) Press Transfer button to exit.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE

MMC 501 SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS

MMC 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-45

[201] CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE

Used to change the passcode allowing access to MMC 200, Open Customer Programming,

from its current value.

CONDITIONS

y The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0-9.

y The current(old) passcode is required for this MMC.

DEFAULT DATA

PASSCODE: 1234

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 201.

CUST. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:_

2) Enter new passcode via dial keypad.

(maximum four digits)

CUST. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:****

3) Verify new passcode via dial keypad. CUST. PASSCODE

VERIFY :****

Passcode verified.(go to step 4)

CUST. PASSCODE

VERIFY :SUCCESS

Passcode failure.(return to step 2)

CUST. PASSCODE

VERIFY :FAILURE

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-46 Samsung Business Communications

[202] CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE

Used to change the passcodes for the following features.

No Feature Description

0 RING PLAN The passcode required to place the system in different Ring Plans(RP)

or change the Ring Time Override(RTO).

1 DISA ALARM The passcode required to clear a DISA ALARM generated when the

number of DISA attempts are exceeded.

2 ALARM CLR The passcode required to clear an ALARM generated by the disconnec-

tion of BI-PMS SIO.(Hotel Application only)

5 DELETE This passcode is used to allow items to be deleted from a room bill.

(Hotel Application only)

6 WLAN REGST The passcode required to register a WIP phone.

CONDITIONS

y The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0~9.

y The current passcode is required for this MMC.

DEFAULT DATA

RING PLAN: 0000

DISA ALARM: 5678

ALARM CLR: 8765

DECT REGST: 4321

DELETE: 9999

WLAN REGST: 0000

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 202.

Display shows:

CHANGE PASSCODE

RING PLAN :0000

2) Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor to passcode entry.

CHANGE PASSCODE

AA RECORD :4321

3) Enter new passcode via digits from dial keypad. CHANGE PASSCODE

AA RECORD :9999

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

Continue to change other passcodes.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-47

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-48 Samsung Business Communications

[203] ASSIGN UA DEVICE

Assigns ringing device to be accessed when a Universal Answer(UA) key is pressed or the

UA pickup code is dialled. UA assignment is made in MMC 601, Assign Station Group, for

a group and then the group is entered here. The device type is automatically determined by

the Directory Number(DN) entered.

Ringing Device Description

NONE(NO UA) No phone number

STATION Station number

STN GROUP Station group number

RING PAGE External speaker phone number

COMMON BELL Common bell phone number

When setting the MMC [203]

Only one of the above options can be selected. If the ability to ring more than one

item(e.g., all four external page zones) is required, a station group containing all

four zone codes must be created.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 203.

Display shows current assignment:

ASSIGN UA PORT

NONE-NO UA

2) Dial DN of UA device.(e.g., 205)

ASSIGN UA PORT

205 -STATION

Use Volume buttons to scroll through

available devices.

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL

MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

MMC 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-49

[204] COMMON BELL CONTROL

Determines whether the common bell relay contacts have an interrupted or continuous clo-

sure when activated. If interrupted is chosen, the relay follows an internal Trunk Line ring

pattern of one second closed followed by three seconds open.

CONDITIONS

When the common bell is not used for night time ring, the common bell must be set to a

station group so that all stations in the group ring.

DEFAULT DATA

CONTINUOUS

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 204.

Display shows current setting:

[3801]COM. BELL

CONTINUOUS

2) Dial common bell number.

[3801]COM. BELL

CONTINUOUS

Press Volume button to make selection of common

bell numbers and press Right Soft button to advance

cursor.

3) Dial 0 for continuous or 1 for interrupted operation.

[3802]COM. BELL

INTERRUPTED

Use Volume button to scroll through options and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE

MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-50 Samsung Business Communications

[205] ASSIGN LOUD BELL

Designates the station that controls the loud bell ring output of a MIS card.(Each MIS card

provides one loud bell port.) The loud bell will follow the ring cadence of the designated

station.

CONDITIONS

Only a station can be assigned to control the loud bell, not a station group.

DEFAULT DATA

UNASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 205.

Display shows current setting.

[3901]LOUD BELL

RING PAIR:NONE

2) Dial loud bell number.(e.g., 3902)

[3902]LOUD BELL

RING PAIR:NONE

Use Volume button to scroll through loud bell num-

bers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3) Enter station number.(e.g., 201)

[3902]LOUD BELL

RING PAIR:201

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-51

[206] BARGE-IN TYPE

Sets the type of barge-in that is permitted.

No Type Description

0 NO BARGE-IN Barge-in feature is unavailable regardless of a station’s barge-in

status.

1 WITH TONE Barge-in will have an intrusion tone and display at the station

barged-in on.

2 WITHOUT TONE Barge-in is allowed. There is no barge-in tone or display at the

station barged-in on and the barging-in station will be muted.

DEFAULT DATA

NO BARGE-IN

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 206.

Display shows:

BARGE IN TYPE

NO BARGE IN

2) Dial 0-2 to select barge-in type.(e.g., 2)

BARGE IN TYPE

WITHOUT TONE

Press Volume button to select barge-in type and

press Right Soft button.

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS

MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-52 Samsung Business Communications

[207] ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

Enables SLI ports to be designated as NORMAL or VM/AA. VM/AA ports receive digits

and also receive a true disconnect signal on completion of a call. Only SLI cards, not key-

set daughter-boards, support disconnect signal. Do not make VM/AA ports data; this will

return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration. VM/AA ports have the

equivalent of data protect written in the program and are protected against tones.

When using the MMC [207]

This MMC is not used to assign voice mail card ports. Voice mail card ports are

assigned as voice mail ports automatically when the system detects an SVM-400

or SVMi-20 card.

DEFAULT DATA

NORMAL PORT

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 207.

[209] VMAA PORT

NORMAL PORT

Display shows:

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] VMAA PORT

NORMAL PORT

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 1 or 0 to select port type.

(1:VMAA, 0:NORMAL)

[205] VMAA PORT

VMAA PORT

Press Volume button to select type and press

Right Soft button.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-53

[208] ASSIGN RING TYPE

Allows programming of single lines to have ICM ringing, Trunk Line ringing and data se-

cure. With the many types of external ringing devices, all configurations can be met. All

devices will also have a positive disconnect signal. Do not make VM/AA ports data; this

will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration.

No Type Description

0 ICM RING Follows normal SLI ring cadence.

1 CO RING Follows Trunk line ring cadence.

2 DATA RING Follows Trunk line ring cadence and does not support off-hook ring.

DEFAULT DATA

ICM RING

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 208.

Display shows:

[209] RING TYPE

ICM RING

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] RING TYPE

ICM RING

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 1, 2 or 0 to select port type.(e.g., 2)

[205] RING TYPE

DATA RING

Press Volume button to select type and press

Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-54 Samsung Business Communications

[209] ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE

Designates to which phone an add-on module(AOM) is assigned. There is no limit to the

number of AOMs that can be assigned in the system. A maximum of four AOMs can be as-

signed to a keyset.

CONDITIONS

An AOM cannot be designated as Master. If no AOM exists in the system, the ‘AOM NOT

EXIST’ message is displayed.

DEFAULT DATA

MASTER:NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 209.

Display shows first AOM:

[301] AOM MASTER

MASTER:NONE

2) Dial AOM number.

[301] AOM MASTER

MASTER:NONE

Use Volume button to scroll through AOM numbers

and use Soft buttons to move cursor.

3) Enter station number.(e.g., 301)

[301] AOM MASTER

MASTER:201

Use Volume button for selection of stations and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-55

[210] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT

Allows the system administrator to set system features on a per-tenant basis. Each system

option has a corresponding dialling number, as listed below. All options toggle ON/OFF.

No Option Default Description

00 DISA PSWD ON When ON, a caller must enter extension number and DISA

password when they call a DISA trunk. When OFF, extension

number and DISA password are not required and the caller

has full access to all features allowed on this trunk.

01 LCR ENABLE OFF This option determines whether the system will or will not

route outgoing calls based on the information in the LCR

routing tables

03 PERI UCD RPT OFF Periodic UCD Information provider. Enables UCD Statistics

data on a per-UCD group basis to print out on the IO port

which has been set as PERI UCD in real time(every 3~99

seconds). This allows the information to be interfaced and

manipulated by an external package or third party provided

software.

04 CID CODE INS OFF When ON, the system will insert the country code when re-

ceiving CID information. This feature can use the CID display

callback feature.

05 DISA MOH OFF When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of dial

tone from the time the system answers a DISA trunk until the

caller dials a digit.

06 TRANSFER

MOH

OFF When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of

ringback tone from the time a transfer is completed until the

call is answered by an internal party.

08 DID BSY ROUT OFF When ON, a DID call directed to a busy station will re-route

to the destination in MMC 406 for that trunk, if CW is set to

OFF in MMC 714. If the CW option is set to ON the call will

camp on. When OFF and the CW option is set to OFF, the

call will re-route to the operator.

09 ALARM MOH ON When ON, a station user answering an alarm ring will hear

station MOH instead of dial tone.

13 RECALL PIKUP OFF When ON, a call recalling to a station can be picked up using

Direct Call Pickup, Pickup Group and My Group features.

This applies to held calls recalling and transferred calls re-

calling to a station.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-56 Samsung Business Communications

(continued)

No Option Default Description

14 ICM EXT FWD OFF When ON, call forward external is allowed when intercom calls

are placed to a station that has Call Forward External pro-

grammed and set.

16 DID ERR TONE OFF This option provides error tone when an invalid DID number

is received.

18 KTS DISC ALM OFF When ON, generates a system alarm when a phone discon-

nects or connects.

19 OFF HOOK ALM OFF When ON, generates a system alarm when a phone stays

off-hook longer than this timer.

20 SL SELF RING OFF When ON, generates ring of 10 seconds when a single line

phone dials itself and hangs up(self test).

21 SGR INC BUSY OFF When ON, generates busy tone when all station group

members are busy for a group call. This does not work for

station groups which have Unconditional Ring mode set.

24 TRANSFER

CANCEL

OFF When OFF, a single line phone can handle 2 calls simulta-

neously using the hook-flash to toggle between them. When

ON, a single line phone can connect to the second call, but

pressing the hook-flash will not toggle between the two calls

it will disconnect the second call and reconnect the single

line phone to the first call.

26 RECALL DISC OFF When ON, the system disconnects a transferred call when it

recalls.

29 ARD TONE CHK ON When system detects CO BUSY TONE from Central Office,

it returns to auto redial state.

30 VPN ENABLE OFF When ON, VPN is enabled.(Australia only.)

31 IN TOLL CHK OFF When OFF, the system doesn’t toll restrict incoming calls.

32 ISDN PROG-

CON

OFF When ON, if an outgoing call receives PROGRESS mes-

sage from ISDN trunk, the call will connect without CON-

NECT message.

33 INCLUDE VAT OFF When ON, an ‘Inclusive VAT of’ line is printed on Hotel in-

voices(Hotel Application).

36 DSS KEY DPU OFF When ON, pressing a DS key will pick up the call at a ringing

station

37 BEGN DGT DSP OFF When ON, and an outside call is made via speed dial or LNR

where more than 11 digits are dialled, then only the first 11

dialled digits are shown on the phone display.

38 ONE TCH

FACC

OFF When OFF, phone users cannot use one-touch account

code(ACC) key.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-57

(continued)

No Option Default Description

39 SGR ALL OUT OFF When ON, the last remaining station group member can

leave a group.

40 CHAIN FWD ON If ON, an incoming call forwarded from a station to another

station may then be forwarded to the mailbox of the second

station, if the latter is set for ‘forward to voice mail’. If this

option is OFF, the call may only be forwarded to the mailbox

of the first station.

41 TRK MONITER OFF If ON, the system will monitor the trunk supervision signal-

ling. That is, if a disconnection signal is received from the

exchange, the call will be cleared and the extension will go

back on hook.

42 VOIP MFRALOC OFF If ON, this allocates a DTMF receiver for a VOIP tandem

caller breaking out on another trunk group.

43 NTWK

AUTOTMR

OFF If OFF, the call timer in the phone display will not function if

the call is from a network connection(Q-SIG).

44 USE EURO OFF If ON, the unit of currency shown in call displays and on

SMDR reports will be Euros(€).(This will also display on Ho-

tel Application invoices.)

45 NO STAFF

COD

OFF When ON, the steps verifying the staff code will be omitted in

Hotel operation.

46 PERI UCD SIO OFF When ON, the PERI UCD data will be sent to the SMDR IO

port.

47 AUTO

CLEANED

OFF Normally, when a room is checked-out, the room status is

changed to NEED CLEAN. When the option is set to ON, the

room status will be changed to AVAILABLE instead.(Hotel

Application.)

48 REDIAL REVW OFF When ON, the CALL LOG review will appear when the Re-

dial or LNR button is pressed.

50 ISDN KEYFAC OFF If ON, allows Keypad Facility messages to be sent to the

exchange to invoke network features.

52 CHK SPV TRK OFF When ON, if trunks don’t have the supervision feature they

cannot make outgoing transfers or unsupervised confer-

ences.

53 PRE FWD

BUSY

OFF When ON, and a call arrives at a busy station that is not set

for forward busy, if a preset no answer destination is avail-

able the call is re-routed to that destination.

54 ORG DIAL LOG OFF When ON, all dialled digits will be saved in the outgoing call

log for Large LCD phones. When OFF, invalid dialling such

as dialling of a non-existent station number will not be saved

in the outgoing call log for Large LCD phones.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-58 Samsung Business Communications

(continued)

No Option Default Description

56 VOIP REALRBT OFF When ON, the system will connect the real path of the outgo-

ing trunk to the incoming VoIP trunk user instead of providing

virtual ringback tone.

57 CO-CO TM ALL OFF When ON, the system trunk call will be attached timer for

preven the call from locking up

58 SMDR LOG

ALL

OFF In case of admin or normal station, and although cost is 0,

the smdr record can be saved when this option is set.

59 NO ITEM COST OFF When ON, during check-in in hotel, item code and cost don’t

have to be entered. It is possible to skip.

60 SMDR

AUT2ACC

OFF When ON, the AUTHORIZATION CODE will be printed in

ACCOUNT field of SMDR.

64 IPNW REAL RB OFF When ON, the system will connect the real path of the outgo-

ing trunk to the VoIP networking trunk user instead of provid-

ing virtual ringback tone.

66 TRK AUTO

MOH

OFF When ON, an incoming trunk call is connected to MOH

automatically after the DISA ANSWR timer(MMC 503) ex-

pires and the caller hears MOH. If the TRK AUTOMOH DISC

timer in MMC501 expires before the call is answered, it is

disconnected.(To use this feature, MMC 400 AUTO AN-

SWER option must set to ON.)

67 TRSF VT KEY ON When ON, works like the VT key when the user transfers the

call to Voice Mail using the TRSF key.

68 PAIR NO RING OFF When ON, if a paired phone is busy the call camps on and a

message waiting indication is set at the busy phone and

does not ring the free paired extension.

69 DISA NO ACT OFF When ON, a DISA call will go to the station assigned in MMC

406 after the DISA NO ACT timer expires.

70 ICM AUTO-

HOLD

OFF When ON, will allow internal calls to be put on hold auto-

matically when another call is taken.

71 DTMF TO S0 OFF When ON, DTMF can be sent to S0 station

72 STNHOLD

PICK

OFF The holded call can be picked up by other station.

73 AREA DELETE OFF When ON, if call is created by phonebook, area code can be

deleted.

74 ELCR DIALTON OFF In case of second lcr, dial tone can be different.

75 NET DTMF

FWD

OFF When spnet and station is seizing trk port and listening dial

tone, it can be forward to external.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-59

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 210.

Display shows:

TEN. ON AND OFF

DISA PSWD :OFF

2) Dial option number.(e.g., 00)

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

TEN. ON AND OFF

DISA PSWD :OFF

3) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.

TEN. ON AND OFF

DISA PSWD :ON

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

4) Repeat steps 2-3 for other options.

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-60 Samsung Business Communications

[211] DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT

Designates which station or group of stations will ring when a door phone button is pressed.

If the ring plan destinations are not entered the default ring plan 1 is used. Available ring

plans are 1 to 6.

DEFAULT DATA

STATION GROUP: 500

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 211.

Display shows first door phone:

[229] DOOR RING

1:500 2:500

2) Dial door phone number.(e.g., 230)

[230] DOOR RING

1:500 2:500

Press Volume button to scroll through door phone

numbers and use the Right Soft button to move

cursor.

Select All door ring.

[ALL] DOOR RING

1:500 2:500

3) Enter new ring plan number selection via dial

keypad.

[250] DOOR RING

1:301 2:500

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button.

4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-61

[214] DISA ALARM RINGING STATION

Assigns the DISA alarm to ring at a specific phone. It is recommended that the person who

can clear the alarm also receives the notification.

CONDITIONS

y A valid destination can be either a station group or an individual station.

y The alarm ringing station or group will follow the ring plan time destination.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL RING PLANS: 500

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 214.

Display shows:

DISA ALARM RING

1:500 2:500

2) Enter valid destination number for ring plan.

(e.g., 217)

DISA ALARM RING

1:217 2:500

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3) Enter valid destination number for another

ring plan.(e.g., 249)

DISA ALARM RING

1:217 2:249

Press Volume button to make selection.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE

MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-62 Samsung Business Communications

[217] TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION

This MMC is used to print a traffic report and select options. The traffic report can be

printed on demand, or every hour, or at a programmed time each day, or for up to three

separately-timed shifts. Automatic printing will always clear the totals.

When report MANUAL PRINT OUT is selected, the options are:

No Option Description

0 PRINT AND CLEAR A report is printed and all totals are reset to 0.

1 PRINTOUT ONLY A report is printed and all the totals are saved.

2 CANCEL PRINTOUT Cancels printout.

When AUTO PRINT OPTN is selected, the options are:

No Option Description

0 AUTO PRINT OFF Automatic print feature is disabled.

1 DAILY A report is printed at a programmable time every day and all the

totals are reset to ‘0’.

2 EVERY HOUR A report will be printed every hour.

3 THREE TIME SHIFT Up to three separate Start and End times may be programmed to

report traffic within different shifts. A report is printed at the end of

each End time and all totals are reset to ‘0’.

When a report is printed, the totals represent call statistics accumulated from the date of the

last report stated as BEGINNING: D & T up to the date of this printout stated as ENDING

D & T.

If there are no trunks in a group, the trunk group report for that group will not print.

CONDITIONS

If this function is required in an OfficeServ 7100 system with an MCP card, you must con-

nect the LAN cable to the MCP card and be connected to a terminal supporting the TCP/IP

function.

DEFAULT DATA

AUTO PRINT OFF

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-63

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 217.

Display shows:

TRAFFIC REPORT

MANUAL PRINTOUT

2) Dial 0 for manual or 1 for automatic print.

TRAFFIC REPORT

AUTO PRINT OPTN

Press Volume button to select and press Right

Soft button.

3) If AUTO selected, dial 0, 1, 2 or 3 for automatic

print option.

TRAFFIC REPORT

DAILY HHMM:2359

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button.

4) Enter daily report time.(HHMM)

TRAFFIC REPORT

DAILY HHMM:2200

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to

next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-64 Samsung Business Communications

[219] RELAY TYPE

Assigns the service type of three relay ports of misc card. Service consists of External Page,

Common bell , loud bell, NOT USED.

DEFAULT DATA

External Page

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 219.

Display shows:

[362] RELAY TYPE

EXTERNAL PAGE

2) Enter the station number.

[362] ISDN SVC

EXTERNAL PAGE

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button.

3) Select service type.(0-3)

[362] RELAY TYPE

EXTERNAL PAGE

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-65

[220] ISDN SERVICE TYPE

Assigns the ISDN service type of a single line telephone port. Service consists of BC

(Bearer Capability) and HLC(High Layer Capability).

No Type Description BC HLC

0 VOICE Voice service Speech -

1 FAX 3 G3 FAX service 3.1 kHz Audio FAX G2/G3

2 AUDIO 3.1 3.1 kHz Audio service 3.1 kHz Audio None

3 MODEM MODEM service 3.1 kHz Audio Telephony

DEFAULT DATA

VOICE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 220.

Display shows:

[209] ISDN SVC

VOICE

2) Enter the station number.(e.g., 210)

[210] ISDN SVC

VOICE

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button.

3) Select service type.(0-3)

[210] ISDN SVC

AUDIO 3.1

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-66 Samsung Business Communications

[221] EXTENSION TYPE

This MMC assigns station ports for a specific use. Each phone can be designated as one of

five types(see table). These types can be changed by dialling the type number or by scroll-

ing through the types and pressing the Right Soft button to select the type.

No Type Description

0 NORMAL STATION This is the default setting. The station will operate in the normal

manner associated with this type of station. Ports designated as

VMAA in MMC 207 must be designated as normal in this MMC.

1 GUEST SMOKING When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room

status and check-in features as a smoking room.

2 GUEST NO SMOKING When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room

status and check-in features as a non-smoking room.

3 MEETING ROOM Stations designated as Meeting Rooms will have the same attrib-

utes as guest rooms with regard to cleaning and occupied status

but will not show up while scrolling through room status lists.

4 ADMINISTRATOR Only stations designated as administrator stations can use Hotel

features.(check in, etc.)

5 FAX STATION When a station is designated as this type it can be assigned as a

‘pair’ station to a GUEST SMOKING ROOM or GUEST NO

SMOKING ROOM in MMC 222.

CONDITIONS

This MMC can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL

OPERATION.

DEFAULT DATA

NORMAL STATION

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 221.

Display shows:

[201] PHONE USE

NORMAL STATION

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 214)

[214] PHONE USE

NORMAL STATION

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-67

3) Dial 0 - 5 to select station type.

[214] PHONE USE

GUEST NO SMOKING

Press Volume button to select option and

press Right Soft button.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-68 Samsung Business Communications

[222] FAX PAIR

Enables a guest room to have a normal phone line and fax line simultaneously. Only a

Guest No Smoking Room or Guest Smoking Room can be assigned a fax pair station

which is already assigned as a fax station in MMC 221.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

CONDITIONS

This MMC can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL

OPERATION.

This MMC can be used only when there is station that set GUEST SMOKING, GUEST NO

SMOKING in MMC 222, and if not, display ‘ROOM NOT EXIST’:

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 222.

Display shows:

[201] FAX PAIR

NONE

2) Dial guest extension number.(e.g., 205)

[205] FAX PAIR

NONE

Press Volume button to select and press Right

Soft button.

3) Dial fax station number.(e.g., 301)

[205] FAX PAIR

301

Press Volume button to select and press Right

Soft button.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 221 EXTENSION TYPE

MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-69

[224] WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT

This MMC is an enhanced Wake Up feature. The system will play a recorded message

when a Wake Up call is answered by the user. The Wake Up Announcement feature re-

quires an SVMi-20 card to be installed in the system. When a Wake Up call is answered,

the system will access the customized Wake Up message(1-48) recorded in the card. The

end user can record this message and also change it if desired. The Wake Up message will

have no default ROM message assigned to it; however, a ROM message(49-64) may also

be assigned as the Wake Up message if desired.

This MMC has three options.

No Option Description

0 AA GROUP Determines which AA group will be connected when a Wake Up

call is answered. This destination can be any AA group.

1 MESSAGE NO Determines which message will be played when a Wake Up call is

answered. This destination can be a custom recorded message

(1-48) or one of the pre-programmed messages(49-64).

2 GROUP BUSY Determines which tone source will be connected when all AA group

members are busy. This destination can be NONE, TONE or external

music on hold.

If NONE is set then dial tone is connected; if TONE is set then hold tone

is connected.

CONDITIONS

NONE

DEFAULT DATA

AA GROUP: NONE

MESSAGE NO: NONE

GROUP BUSY: NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 224.

Display shows:

WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE

AA GROUP :NONE

2) Dial 0, 1 or 2 for option select.

WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE

AA GROUP :NONE

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-70 Samsung Business Communications

3) Enter the AA group number.

WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE

AA GROUP :520

Press Volume button to select and press Right

Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-71

[300] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

Allows the following features to be enabled/disabled on a per-station basis.

No Option Default Description

00 ACCESS DIAL ON Determines whether a user can select a trunk or trunk

group by dialling its Directory Number(DN). This selec-

tion should be turned off when using LCR.

01 MICROPHONE ON Allows phones to be used in speakerphone mode.

02 OFF-HOOK RING ON Will allow a short burst of ring tone to indicate another call.

03 SMDR PRINT ON When the station is set for no Trunk Line calls to and

from this station, the station will not print on SMDR.

This includes transferred calls or calls picked up from

hold or park.

04 TGR ADV.TONE ON When this feature is set to ON, a warning tone will be

heard each time LCR advances to the next route.

05 VMAA FORWARD ON This feature selects whether Trunk Line calls can be

forwarded to voice mail: ON, permits forward to voice

mail; OFF, no forward to voice mail.

07 NGT PASSCODE ON When ON, the steps verifying the ring plan passcode

will be added in Ring Plan change.

08 INTRCOM SMDR OFF When the station is set to OFF, the station will not print

intercom calls on SMDR.

09 FWD DELAY USE OFF When ON, calls will overflow to the Forward No Answer

destination when the Forward No Answer timer expires

even when the Forward No Answer feature is not acti-

vated at the called party extension.

11 FORWARD OVRD OFF When set to ON and the station calls another station

which has forwarding set, the call will not forward.

12 RECL TO OPER OFF When the station is set to ON, if the station transfers a

call and the destination doesn’t answer, the call will

recall to the operator instead of the station.

13 SLT LP OPEN OFF When ON, SLI port receives real disconnect signal in-

stead of busy or error tone.(VMAA or DATA ports al-

ways receive real disconnect signal.)

15 CID TO SLT OFF When a MIS card is installed and this option is set to

ON, the system will provide the CID signal to SLTs.

22 NO RCL FLASH OFF When the hook switch is flashed or the flash key is

pressed, a recall signal will not be sent to the system.

23 RBK STN NAME OFF When ringback, station name can be displayed, instead

of “Ringing”

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-72 Samsung Business Communications

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 300.

Display shows:

[201] CUS.ON/OFF

ACCESS DIAL :ON

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] CUS.ON/OFF

ACCESS DIAL :ON

Press Volume button to select station.

Select all stations and press Right Soft button to

move cursor.

[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF

ACCESS DIAL :ON

3) Press Volume button to select feature and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF

ACCESS DIAL :ON

4) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.

[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF

ACCESS DIAL :OFF

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button.

5) Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

Press Right Soft button to return to step 1.

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

LCR PROGRAMMING:

MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE

MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE

MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-73

[301] ASSIGN STATION COS

Used to assign a class of service to each phone. There are 30 different classes of service

(defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents) and six ring plans based on the Ring Plan

Time in MMC 507 that can apply to the COS. Classes of service are numbered 01-30. The

default is COS 01.

DEFAULT DATA

RING PLANS 1-6: 01

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 301.

Display shows first station:

[201] STN COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] STN COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

Use Volume button to scroll through stations.

Press Right Soft button to advance step 3.

Use Volume button to scroll through stations and

press Left Soft button to advance to step 4.

Select all stations.

[ALL] STN COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

3) Enter new ring plan selection via dial keypad.

[205] STN COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05)

[205] STN COS

1:05 2:01 3:01

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of

service and press Right Soft button to advance to

the next ring plan.

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service

and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-74 Samsung Business Communications

5) Enter the next ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05)

[205] STN COS

1:05 2:01 3:01

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of

service and press Right Soft button to move cursor

to the next ring plan.

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of

service and press Left Soft button to return to

previous step.

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance

to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-75

[302] PICKUP GROUPS

Allows the assignment of stations into call pickup groups. There is a maximum of 20

pickup groups. An unlimited number of members can belong to each group. Stations can

only be in one pickup group at any given time.

DEFAULT DATA

NO PICKUP GROUPS ASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 302.

Display shows:

[201] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:NONE

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:NONE

Use Volume button to select station number and

press Right Soft button.

Select all stations.

[ALL] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:??

3) Dial pickup group number.(e.g., 05)

[205] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:05

Press Volume button to select group number.

4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 to

enter more stations.

Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER

MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-76 Samsung Business Communications

[303] ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY

Assigns BOSS phones to SECRETARY phones. One BOSS station can have up to and in-

cluding four SECRETARY stations and one SECRETARY station can have up to and in-

cluding four BOSS stations.

CONDITIONS

y A dedicated BOSS button must be programmed on the SECRETARY phone(s).

y A dedicated BOSS button must also be programmed on the BOSS phone.

y A station designated as BOSS may not be assigned as a secretary of another BOSS.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS

F BUTTON Used to toggle BOSS/SECRETARY field

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 303.

Display shows.

BOSS STN:NONE

SECR 1:NONE

2) Dial BOSS station number.(e.g., 205)

BOSS STN:205

SECR 1:NONE

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button.

3) Dial SECRETARY number.(1, 2, 3 or 4)

BOSS STN:205

SECR 1:NONE

Press Volume button to select number and press

Right Soft button.

4) Dial SECRETARY station number.(e.g., 201)

BOSS STN:205

SECR 1:201

Press Volume button to select station.

Press Right Soft button to return to step 3 to

enter more SECR numbers.

BOSS STN:205

SECR 2:202

5) Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 and

continue entries.

Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-77

[304] ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE

Allows you to select which stations are allowed to make calls through C.O. lines or

to answer calls for C.O. lines.(on a station and trunk use group basis)

CONDITIONS

y Stations are set within use group numbers 001~100and trunks are set within use group

numbers 101~200 in MMC 614, ASSIGN USE GROUP.

y If a station group is set to NO Dial, stations cannot place calls on that trunk group.

y If a station group is set to NO Answer, stations cannot answer incoming calls on that

trunk group.

Note: MMC 406, Trunk Ring Assignment, overrides this MMC for the Answer option.

DEFAULT DATA

DIAL: YES

ANS: YES

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 304.

Display shows:

(001) USE (101)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

2) Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 005)

(005) USE (101)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

Press Volume button to select station use group

and press Right Soft button.

Select all station use groups.

(ALL) USE (101)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

3) Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 101)

(005) USE (101)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

Press Volume button to select trunk use group

and press Right Soft button.

Select all trunk use groups.

(005) USE (ALL)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-78 Samsung Business Communications

4) Press Volume button to select YES/NO option.

(005) USE (101)

DIAL:NO ANS:YES

Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right

Soft button to move cursor to ANS option.

Press Volume button to select YES/NO Option.

(005) USE (101)

DIAL:NO ANS:YES

Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right

Soft button to return to step 2.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 316 COPY STATION USABLE

MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-79

[305] ASSIGN FORCED CODE

This MMC allows one of the four options to be selected: the assignment of account codes

with verification, account codes without verification and authorization codes(or none of

these) on a per-station basis or on an all-station basis. The system supports 500 authoriza-

tion codes and 999 account codes which may or may not require verification.

No Type Description

0 NONE No Account or Authorization code required.(strictly voluntary)

1 AUTHORIZE CODE Forces user to enter a valid Authorization code of four or

more digits listed in the AUTHORIZATION CODE Table.(MMC

707)

2 ACCT VERIFIED Forces user to enter a valid Account code listed in the AC-

COUNT CODE Table.(MMC 708)

3 ACCT NO VERIFIED Forces user to enter an Account code which is not verified.

User can enter any code up to 12 digits.(including ∗ and #)

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 305.

Display shows.

[201] FORCD CODE

NONE

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] FORCD CODE

NONE

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial a feature option 0-3.(e.g., 2)

[205] FORCD CODE

ACCT VERIFIED

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 707 AUTHORIZATION CODE

MMC 708 ACCOUNT CODE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-80 Samsung Business Communications

[306] HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION

Allows a station to make a predetermined call, similar to a ring-down circuit, upon the ex-

piration of a timer.(see MMC 502, STATION TIMERS, Off-Hook Selection Timer)

CONDITIONS

y The hotline destination can be a station, a station group, a trunk, a trunk group or an

external number.

y There is a maximum of 18 digits in the dial string for external numbers. The access

code for trunk or trunk group access(e.g., 0 or 9) is not counted as part of the 18.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS

B Used to insert a flash code ‘F’

C Used to insert a pause code ‘P’

D Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’

E Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘[’ or ‘]’

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 306.

Display shows.

[201] HOT LINE

NONE

2) Dial station number.

[205] HOT LINE

NONE

Use Volume button to scroll through stations.

Press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3) Enter the hot line destination of a station or

trunk ID(e.g., 9 or 701) with a maximum of

[205] HOT LINE

9-1305P4264100_

18 outgoing digits after the access code for

the CO call.(see above list of options if needed)

4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 502 STATION-WIDE TIMERS(OFF-HOOK SELECTION TIMER)

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-81

[308] ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE

Assigns a background music source to phones. There is one internal music source/external

music source. The default directory numbers for the music sources are 371.

CONDITIONS

To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the MOH source to the

misc port of MP10/11 card. If ‘NONE’ is set for background music or if a sound source is

not connected to the external sound source port designated as the background music source,

music will not be played even if the background music function is enabled.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 308.

Display shows current setting.

[201] BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE:NONE

2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)

[205] BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE:NONE

Use Volume button to scroll through phone

numbers and press Right Soft button to move

the cursor.

Select all stations.

[ALL] BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE:?

3) Enter source number.(e.g.,371)

[205] BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE: 371

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 309 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE

MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-82 Samsung Business Communications

[309] ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE

Assigns a Music On Hold source to phones. There is one internal music source/external

music source.

The default directory numbers for the music sources is 371.

CONDITIONS

To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the MOH source to the

external sound source of MISC port of MP10/11 card.

DEFAULT DATA

TONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 309.

Display shows current setting:

[201] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:NONE

2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)

[205] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:NONE

Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers

and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations.

[ALL] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:?

3) Enter source number.(e.g., 371)

[205] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:371

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE

MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-83

[310] LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

Assigns the LCR class of service allowed on a per-station/per-trunk basis. There are eight

classes which may be assigned. LCR class of service allows specific users to ‘trunk ad-

vance’ up to a matching LCR class of service programmed in MMC 712.

DEFAULT DATA

LEAST COST ROUTING COS: 1

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 310.

Display shows:

[201] LCR CLASS

LCR CLASS 1

2) Dial station/trunk number.(e.g., 205)

[205] LCR CLASS

LCR CLASS 1

Press Volume button to select station and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all stations.

[ALL] LCR CLASS

LCR CLASS ?

3) Dial 1-8 to select class type.(e.g., 3)

[205] LCR CLASS

LCR CLASS 3

Press Volume button to select class type and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

LCR PROGRAMMING:

MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE

MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE

MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE

MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-84 Samsung Business Communications

[312] ALLOW CALLER ID

Allows the system administrator or technician to allow or deny CID data to be sent from, or

displayed at, LCD phones.

Option Description

RCV Set whether to display CID.

SND Set whether to send CID for ISDN calls.

DEFAULT DATA

RCV: YES

SND: YES

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 312.

Display shows:

[201] CID/ANI

RCV:YES SND:YES

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] CID/ANI

RCV:YES SND:YES

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all stations.

[ALL] CID/ANI

RCV:YES SND:YES

3) Dial 0 or 1 to select Receive option.

[205] CID/ANI

RCV:YES SND:YES

Press Volume button to select receive option and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Dial 0 or 1 to select Send option.

[205] CID/ANI

RCV:YES SND:YES

Press Volume button to select send option and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-85

[314] CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL

Allows outgoing call restriction by call duration time: calls can be disconnected or the user

can receive ‘confirm tone’.(refer to the CO Confirm timer in MMC 501)

No Type Description

0 NONE No action

1 CONFIRM TONE Caller hears confirmation tone at programmed time

2 DISCONNECT Call is disconnected.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 314.

Display shows:

[201] CO CONFIRM

NONE

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] CO CONFIRM

NONE

Press Volume button to select station and use

Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all stations.

[ALL] CO CONFIRM

NONE

3) Dial a feature option 0-2.

[205] CO CONFIRM

CONFIRM TONE

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 501 SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-86 Samsung Business Communications

[315] CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION

Customer Set Relocation allows the system administrator or technician to exchange similar

stations in the system without hardware changes. All the button settings, features, etc. for a

phone can be copied to another. The user can relocate to the new station and work as nor-

mal.

CONDITIONS

Refer to the Relocate Allowed Table(next page) listing which phones/AOMs can be ex-

changed.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 315.

Display shows:

SET RELOCATION

EXT_ EXT

2) Enter number of original station.(e.g., 202)

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

SET RELOCATION

EXT202 EXT_

3) Enter second station number.(e.g., 210)

Press Right Soft button to enter data.

SET RELOCATE

EXT202 EXT210

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

SET RELOCATION

EXT_ EXT

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-87

Relocate

Allowed

Table

SLT EURO

EURO

12B

EURO

24B

48B

AOM

64B

AOM

iDCS

28D

iDCS

18D

SLT YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

EURO 6B NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO

EURO 12B NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO

EURO 24B NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO

48B AOM NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO

64B AOM NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO

iDCS 28D NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES

iDCS 18D NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES

iDCS 8D NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

DS-5012L NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

DS-5014D NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

DS-5021D NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

DS-5007S NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

DS-5014S NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

DS-5038S NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

IP Phone* NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-88 Samsung Business Communications

Relocate

Allowed

Table

iDCS

DS-

5012L

DS-

5014D

DS-

5021D

DS-

5007S

DS-

5014S

DS-

5038S

Phone*

SLT NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

EURO 6B NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

EURO 12B NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

EURO 24B NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

48B AOM NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

64B AOM NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

iDCS 28D NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

iDCS 18D NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

iDCS 8D YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

DS-5012L NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO

DS-5014D NO NO YES NO NO NO NO NO

DS-5021D NO NO NO YES NO NO NO NO

DS-5007S NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO

DS-5014S NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO

DS-5038S NO NO NO NO NO NO YES

IP Phone* NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-89

[316] COPY STATION USABLE

Provides a tool for copying station/trunk use assignments in MMC 304 from one station

user group to another. This can be done on a station use group basis or for all station use

groups.

Use groups are set up in MMC 614.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 316.

Display shows:

(001)COPY USABLE

FROM:NONE

2) Enter station use group number.(e.g., 005)

(005)COPY USABLE

FROM:NONE

Press Volume buttons to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter station use group number to copy from.

Cursor returns to step 2.

(005)COPY USABLE

FROM:003

Press Volume button to make selection.

4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE

MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-90 Samsung Business Communications

[317] ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE

This MMC is used to determine whether stations in one use group can make intercom calls

to stations in other use groups.(within the same tenant)

Use groups are set up in MMC 614.

DEFAULT DATA

DIAL: YES

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 317.

Display shows:

(001) USE (001)

DIAL:YES

2) Dial the first station use group number.(e.g., 005)

(005) USE (001)

DIAL:YES

Press Volume button to select station and

press Right Soft button.

Select all station use groups.

(ALL) USE (001)

DIAL:YES

3) Dial the second station use group number.(e.g., 004)

(005) USE (004)

DIAL:YES

Press Volume button to select station and

press Right Soft button.

4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.(NO means first group

cannot dial second group)

(005) USE (004)

DIAL:NO

Press Volume button to select YES/NO and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-91

[318] DISTINCTIVE RINGING

Allows the technician to select the ring tone heard at a keyset when called by a specific sta-

tion or when a specific trunk rings that keyset. There is also a cadence control option to

perform a similar function for SLTs.

There are eight ring tones available along with a Follow Station option(default) for keysets.

There are five cadences and a Follow Station option(default) for SLTs. See table, below.

It also allows the technician to assign the call priority for a group call when called by a

specific station or when a specific trunk rings that phone. When calls come into a station

group and all group members are busy, the system will assign a priority to a specific station

or a specific trunk so that high priority calls will be placed at the front of the group queue.

If this option is set to NO, the call held longest in the group queue has the highest priority.

There are nine priority levels: level 1 is the highest and level 9 is the lowest.

Option No Description

Calls will ring with the keyset user’s choice of ring frequency. TONE

Option 1~8 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with this frequency.

Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences.

1 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the intercom ring ca-

dence.

2 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the CO ring cadence.

3 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the DOOR ring ca-

dence.

4 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the ALARM ring ca-

dence.

CADENCE

Option

5 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the CALLBACK ring ca-

dence.

CONDITIONS

y Digital phone(keyset) rings are distinguished by their tone. If the T(TONE) of the call-

ing internal/external phone is set to ‘NO’, the bell rings according to the normal set-

ting in MMC 111, PHONE RING TONE, for the receiving station. If T is set to 1-8,

the bell rings according to the designated ring tone.

y SLT rings are distinguished by their ringing interval. If the C(CADENCE) of the call-

ing internal/external phone is set to ‘NO’, the bell rings according to the interval set in

MMC 510, SLI RING CADENCE, for each calling station type. If C is set to 1-5, the

bell rings according to that interval regardless of the calling station type.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-92 Samsung Business Communications

DEFAULT DATA

T: NO (FOLLOW STATION SETTING)

C: NO (FOLLOW STATION SETTING)

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 318.

Display shows first station:

[201] RING TONE

T:NO C:NO PRI:NO

2) Dial trunk or station number.(e.g., 705)

[705] RING TONE

T:NO C:NO PRI:NO

Press Volume button to select trunk or station

and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 1-8 to select ring tone.

[705] RING TONE

T:5 C:NO PRI:NO

Press Volume button to select ring tone and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Dial 1-5 to select ring cadence.

[705] RING TONE

T:5 C:3 PRI:NO

Press Volume button to select ring cadence and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5) Enter priority level via dial keypad.

(1-9 or NO)

[705] RING TONE

T:5 C:3 PRI:NO

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE

MMC 510 SLI RING CADENCE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-93

[319] BRANCH GROUP

Assign stations to branch groups. There is a maximum of four branch groups. When a C.O.

line is ringing at a station, other stations assigned the same branch group can answer the in-

coming call by going off hook.

MMC [319]

This MMC is currently not valid in the UK/EU.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 319.

Display shows.

[201] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:NONE

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205).

[205] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:NONE

Press Volume button to select station and use

Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all stations.

[ALL] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:??

3) Dial a branch group number. (01-20).

[205] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:04

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-94 Samsung Business Communications

[320] PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER

Allows a technician to assign a default destination for Forward No Answer(FNA) to each

station on the system. These destinations may be the same or different for each station. The

preset FNA destination will be temporarily overwritten if the station user enters a different

FNA destination. If you cancel the new destination, the preset destination will once more

be in effect. Preset FNA time follows the station ‘NO ANS FWD’ timer(MMC 502).

Preset FNA can be assigned respectively for each type of call.

No Type Description

0 INT Preset FNA applies only to intercom calls.

1 EXT Preset FNA applies only to incoming calls.

2 BOTH Preset FNA applies to both intercom and incoming calls.

When using PRE FWD BUSY option in MMC [210]

If PRE FWD BUSY option in MMC 210 is set ON, the forward busy follows this

feature.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 320.

Display shows:

[201] PRESET FNA

NONE OPT:BOTH

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] PRESET FNA

NONE OPT:BOTH

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all stations.

[ALL] PRESET FNA

NONE OPT:BOTH

3) Dial valid number via keypad.

[205] PRESET FNA

202 OPT:BOTH

Press Volume button to select call type and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-95

4) Dial call type 0, 1 or 2.(e.g., 1)

[205] PRESET FNA

202 OPT:EXT

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to return to step 2.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 102 CALL FORWARD

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-96 Samsung Business Communications

[323] CALLING PARTY NUMBER

Allows a number up to 16 digits to be entered and associated with a station or trunk num-

ber on a per PRI/BRI basis. When this station makes an outgoing call on this PRI, the

number entered here will be the Calling Party Number sent on the call. There are four ta-

bles for the system. If there are no entries in the tables the system uses the number for the

trunk entered in MMC 405, TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER, for the Calling Party Number.

DEFAULT DATA

EMPTY

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 323.

Display shows:

[201] SEND CLIP

2) Dial extension or trunk number.(e.g., 230)

[230] SEND CLIP

Press Volume button to select extension and

press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3) Dial table number.

[230] SEND CLIP

Press Volume button to select table number and

press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

4) Enter the Calling Party Number.

[230] SEND CLIP

2:3055922900

5) Repeat steps 3 & 4 to enter other tables and Calling

Party Numbers.

Repeat steps 2, 3, & 4 to enter other station or trunk

and Calling Party Numbers.

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 419 BRI OPTIONS

MMC 420 PRI OPTIONS

MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-97

[326] RINGBACK TONE MESSAGE

Assigns Color Ring Message by using SVMi message.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 326.

Display shows:

[301] RBT MSG

NONE

2) Enter the VM station number.

[302] RBT MSG

NONE

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button.

3) Select Ring Message. (0001-9999)

[302] RBT MSG

0001

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-98 Samsung Business Communications

[400] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

Assigns several options(listed below) on a per-trunk basis.

No Option Default Description

0 1A2 EMULATION OFF When this option is set to ON up to 4 internal stations

can participate in a conversation on this trunk by press-

ing the trunk key.

1 TRUNK INC DND OFF When this option is set to ON a trunk that is pro-

grammed to ring a specific station(a private line or DIL)

will ring at that station if the station is in DND.

2 TRUNK FORWARD ON When this option is set to OFF this trunk will not follow a

ringing stations call forwarding.

3 LCR ALLOW OFF Allows LCR to be switched ON/OFF when a trunk is

accessed using a DT key or by dialling its port number

(e.g., 701).

6 EFWD EXT CLI ON This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be

sent to the external forwarded outgoing call.(Station or

Received CLI from Trunk)

7 REPEAT CLI ON This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be

sent to the trunk to trunk call.(Trunk or Received CLI

from Trunk)

8 TONECHK DISC OFF When this option is set to ON, loop trunk can be discon-

nected by detecting busy tone.(To use this feature, the

LP TRK TONE DISC option in MMC 861 must be set to

ENABLE.)

9 AUTO ANSWER OFF When this option is set to ON, Auto Answer mode can

be assigned on a per-trunk basis.

10 COLORRING AS OFF When this options is set to ON, coloring service can be

used by svmi message.

DEFAULT DATA

1A2 EMULATE: OFF

TRK INC. DND: OFF

TRK FORWARD: ON

EFWD EXT CLI: ON

REPEAT CLI: ON

TONECHK DISC: OFF

AUTO ANSWER: OFF

COLORRING AS: OFF

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-99

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 400.

Display show:

[701] TRK ON/OFF

1A2 EMULATE:OFF

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)

[704] TRK ON/OFF

1A2 EMULATE:OFF

Press Volume button to select trunk.

Select all trunks and press Right Soft button to move

cursor to options.

[ALL] TRK ON/OFF

1A2 EMULATE:?

3) Dial option number from above list

[704] TRK ON/OFF

TRK FORWARD:ON

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.

[704] TRK ON/OFF

TRK FORWARD:OFF

Press Volume button to select ON/OFF and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-100 Samsung Business Communications

[401] TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

Used to select the mode of the trunk lines: CO LINE or PBX LINE. If PBX mode is chosen,

this allows PBX access codes to be recognized, thus allowing more complete toll restriction.

(call barring) This mode is assigned on a per-trunk basis.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS: CO LINE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 401.

Display shows:

[701] PBX LINE

CO LINE

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)

[704] PBX LINE

CO LINE

Use Volume button to scroll through trunk

numbers and press Right Soft button to move.

Select all trunks.

[ALL] PBX LINE

3) Dial 1 for PBX or 0 for CO.(e.g., 1)

[704] PBX LINE

PBX LINE

Use Volume button to scroll through options

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-101

[402] TRUNK DIAL TYPE

Used to determine the dialling type of each trunk line. There are two options:

No Type Description

0 DTMF TYPE Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

1 DIAL PULSE TYPE Dial Pulse

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS: DTMF

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 402.

Display shows:

[701] DIAL TYPE

DTMF TYPE

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)

[704] DIAL TYPE

DTMF TYPE

Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers

and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

Select all.

[ALL] DIAL TYPE

3) Dial 0 for DTMF or 1 for PULSE.

[704] DIAL TYPE

DIAL PULSE TYPE

Use Volume button to scroll through options

Press Right Soft buttons to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS

MMC 503 TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-102 Samsung Business Communications

[403] TRUNK TOLL CLASS

Assigns to ll class level assignments on a per-trunk or all-trunk basis in a day or night con-

dition. The options for toll level will follow either the station class or the class of service

defined in MMCs 702, Toll Deny Table, and 703, Toll Allowance Table. The toll classes

available are listed below with their entry numbers.

No Class Description

0 F-STN Follow station toll restriction

1 CLS-A Follow toll class A(Unrestricted)

2 CLS-B Follow toll class B

3 CLS-C Follow toll class C

4 CLS-D Follow toll class D

5 CLS-E Follow toll class E

6 CLS-F Follow toll class F

7 CLS-G Follow toll class G

8 CLS-H Follow toll class H(All restricted)

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS: F-STN

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 403.

Display shows:

[701] TOLL CLASS

1:F-STN 2:F-STN

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)

[704] TOLL CLASS

1:F-STN 2:F-STN

Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers

and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

Select all.

[ALL] TOLL CLASS

1:F-STN 2:F_STN

3) Dial ring plan number.(1~6)

[704] TOLL CLASS

1:F-STN 2:F-STN

Use Volume button to scroll through ring plan

numbers and press Right Soft button to move

the cursor.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-103

4) Enter day toll class.(e.g., 2 for CLS-B)

[704] TOLL CLASS

1:CLS-B 2:F-STN

Press Volume button to scroll through toll classes and

use Right Soft button to move the cursor.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS

MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-104 Samsung Business Communications

[404] TRUNK NAME

Allows a name up to 11 characters long to be entered to identify an individual trunk.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 404.

Display shows:

[701] TRUNK NAME

2) Dial trunk.(e.g., 704)

[704] TRUNK NAME

Press Volume button to select trunk and press

Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3) Enter trunk name.

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[704] TRUNK NAME

TELECOMS

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 104 STATION NAME

MMC 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-105

[405] TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

Allows a number up to 11 digits long to be entered to identify an individual trunk.

ENTERING NUMBERS

Numbers are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects the digit and moves the

cursor to the next position.

The # button can be used for special characters:

#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , \ , " , ~.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 405.

Display shows:

[701] CO TEL NO.

2) Dial trunk.(e.g., 704)

[704] CO TEL NO.

Press Volume button to select trunk and press

Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3) Enter trunk number using the dial keypad. [704] CO TEL NO.

3054264100

4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 404 TRUNK NAME

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-106 Samsung Business Communications

[406] TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

Enables ringing to a specific station or to a group of stations when incoming calls are re-

ceived. This MMC controls ring plan destinations for ring down trunks. If the ring plan

destinations are not entered, the default ring plan is ring plan 1.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS RING DEFAULT OPERATOR GROUP

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 406.

Display shows:

[701] TRK RING

1:500 2:500

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)

[704] TRK RING

1:500 2:500

Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers

and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

Select all.

[All] TRK RING

1:500 2:500

3) Dial ring plan number or press Right Soft button to

move to the next step.

[704] TRK RING

1:500 2:500

4) Dial station number or station group number.

(e.g., 205)

[704] TRK RING

1:205 2:500

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor to the

next ring plan destination and repeat step 4.

[704] TRK RING

1:205 2:501

Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES

MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-107

[407] FORCED TRUNK RELEASE

Provides a positive forced trunk release to a specific trunk or all trunks in the event of a

trunk lock-up.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 407.

Display shows:

[701] TRK RELS.

RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

2) Dial in trunk number.(e.g., 704)

[704] TRK RELS.

RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

Press Volume button selected trunk and press

Right Soft button.

Select all trunks.

[ALL] TRK RELS.

RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

(Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2)

[704] TRK RELS.

RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-108 Samsung Business Communications

[408] ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

Allows the system administrator to select which Music-On-Hold(MOH) source can be

heard on each trunk. There is one internal music source/external music source (371).

CONDITIONS

To use an external sound source, connects the corresponding port of the to the misc port of

MP10/11 card.

DEFAULT DATA

TONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 408.

Display shows: current setting.

[701] TRK MOH

MOH:TONE AA:TONE

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)

[704] TRK MOH

MOH:TONE AA:TONE

Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers

and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all.

[ALL] TRK MOH

MOH:? AA:?

3) Enter source number.(e.g., 371)

[705] TRK MOH

MOH:371 AA:TONE

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 756 ASSIGN VMMOH

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-109

[409] TRUNK STATUS READ

This is a READ-ONLY MMC. Allows the status of trunks to be read in a format that will

enable the servicing personnel to quickly identify the ownership and position of a trunk.

No Type Description

00 PORT Port Number(Cabinet/Slot/Port)

01 TYPE LOOP, GND, E & M, DID, BRI, PRI, VOIP

02 1A2 EMULATE 1A2 Emulation On/Off

03 TRK FORWARD Trunk Forward On/Off

04 LINE CO/PBX

05 DIAL DTFM/Dial Pulse

06-11 TOLL TYPE 1-6 Ring Plan Toll Restriction(1-6)

12-17 RING PLAN 1-6 Ring Plan Ring Destination(1-6)

18 MOH SOURCE MOH Source

19 DISA LINE DISA Status

DEFAULT DATA

FOLLOWS TRUNK

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 409.

Display shows:

[701] TRK STATUS

PORT:C1-S5-P01

2) Enter trunk number via dial keypad.(e.g., 704)

[704] TRK STATUS

PORT:C1-S5-P04

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3) Enter desired option 00-19.(e.g., 01)

[704] TRK STATUS

TYPE:LOOP TRUNK

Press Volume button to make selection.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-110 Samsung Business Communications

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 400 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

MMC 401 TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE

MMC 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS

MMC 404 TRUNK NAME

MMC 406 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE

MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-111

[410] ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

Allows the system to have Direct Inward System Access(DISA). Because there is a possi-

bility that unauthorized calls will be made via this feature, several safeguards have been

added. Users must be informed of these to prevent unnecessary service calls. DISA can

lock out when a predetermined number of invalid consecutive calls are attempted. Callers

will then receive error tone until the programmable timer has expired.

CONDITIONS

y The * key may be used to initiate new dial tone while in a station to station call.

y The # button may be used to terminate the DISA call and disconnect the central office

line. DISA lines must be assigned to the ring plan(s).

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS: NORMAL

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 410.

Display shows:

[701] 123456

DISA LINE:000000

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)

[704] 123456

DISA LINE:000000

Press Volume button to select trunk and press

Right Soft button.

Select all trunks.

[ALL] 123456

DISA LINE:000000

3) Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan.(e.g., 3)

[704] 123456

DISA LINE:001000

Using the dial keypad, press 1 to select or 0 not to se-

lect the Ring Plan.(e.g., 1 to select)

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 500 SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-112 Samsung Business Communications

[412] ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL

Allows the assignment of analogue DID or E & M cards for proper signalling. These trunks

can also use the translation tables in MMC 714.

No Signalling condition type

0 IMMEDIATE START

1 DELAYED START

2 WINK START

3 NO ANSWER BACK

4 DIRECT BACK

CONDITIONS

An analogue E & M/DID Trunk card must be installed in the OfficeServ 7100 system. Oth-

erwise, the ‘NO E&M/DID TRUNK’ message is displayed.

DEFAULT DATA

IMMEDIATE START

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 412.

Display shows:

[701] TRK SIGNAL

IMMEDIATE START

2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)

[705] TRK SIGNAL

IMMEDIATE START

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all trunks.

[ALL] TRK SIGNAL

IMMEDIATE START

3) Enter desired trunk type selection from above list.

[705] TRK SIGNAL

WINK START

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-113

[414] MPD/PRS SIGNAL

Used on a per-trunk basis to define if a Trunk line is to be either a Metering Pulse Detec-

tion(MPD) or a Polarity Reversal Signal(PRS) trunk.

An MPD Trunk will detect a C.O-provided meter pulse. A Polarity Reversal trunk will de-

tect the line reversal signal which may be provided by the Trunk Line when the other party

answers the outgoing call or the outside party clears the call.

Type Description

PRS 1 When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is started. When second PRS is de-

tected, call duration timer is stopped. The call is not released.

PRS 2 When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is started. When second PRS is de-

tected, call duration timer is stopped and the call is released.

PRS 3 The call duration timer starts based on the timer. When first PRS is detected, call dura-

tion timer is stopped and call is released.

MPD Metering Pulse Detection.

CONDITIONS

y If the trunk is designated as PRS, the call duration timer will be started and the results

printed on the SMDR record.

y PRS is also essential for dropping a trunk-to- trunk conversation which is unsupervised

by an internal party.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE(NORMAL)

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 414.

Display shows:

[701] TRK PRS

NONE

2) Dial desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)

[705] TRK PRS

NONE

Press Volume button to select trunk and use

Right Soft button to move cursor.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-114 Samsung Business Communications

3) Dial 0 for PRS 1, 1 for PRS 2, 2 for PRS 3, 3 for

MPD or 4 for NORMAL.

[705] TRK PRS

PRS 2

Press Volume button to scroll through options and

use Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC503 TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-115

[415] REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA

Allows the system administrator or technician to enable or disable the reporting of aban-

doned Trunk Line calls for which CLIP information has been collected on a per-trunk basis.

There are two options for this MMC:

No Option Description

0 REPORT: NO Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will not

be printed on SMDR or stored in the system call abandon list. These

records will continue to be stored in the station review list.

1 REPORT: YES Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will be

printed on SMDR and stored in the system call abandon list. These re-

cords will also be stored in the station review list.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS REPORT: YES

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 415.

Display shows:

[701] TRK ABNDN

REPORT:YES

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705)

[705] TRK ABNDN

REPORT:YES

Use Volume button to select trunk and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

[705] TRK ABNDN

REPORT:NO

Use Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-116 Samsung Business Communications

[417] E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION

This option is used to enable/disable CRC4 generation and checking.

CONDITIONS

y This is useful with some networks which do not support CRC4 framing but only

PCM30 framing.

y After changing this option, MMC 418 must be used to restart the card to make the

change effective.

DEFAULT DATA

CRC4: ON

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 417.

Display shows:

[701] E1/PRI CRC

2) Enter first trunk number in PRI card.(e.g., 701)

[701] E1/PRI CRC

Press Volume button to select trunk and use

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter 1 for ON 0 for OFF.

[701] E1/PRI CRC

OFF

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 418 BRI & PRI CARD RESTART

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-117

[418] BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART

This MMC is used to restart a BRI or PRI card at the card level. This action is required to

update the processor on the BRI or PRI card with any changes in the card setup MMCs and

to put these changes into effect.

CONDITIONS

y A BRI card or TEPRI card or TEPRI2 card must be installed in the system.

y Before setting the PRI program, the J2 jumper of the TEPRI or TEPRI2 card must be

set ON to PRI mode.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 418.

Display shows first BRI or PRI circuit:

[725] RESTART

CARD RESTART?NO

2) Dial first trunk on a BRI or PRI card.(e.g., 733)

[733] RESTART

CARD RESTART?NO

Press Volume button to select the first trunk

and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

Pressing 1 will advance to step 4.

[733] RESTART

CARD RESTART?YES

4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2.

[733] RESTART

ARE YOU SURE?YES

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 419 BRI OPTIONS

MMC 420 PRI OPTIONS

MMC 423 S/T MODE

MMC 424 BRI S0 MAPPING

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-118 Samsung Business Communications

[419] BRI OPTIONS

Assigns several options on a per-BRI basis. There are different options depending on

whether the BRI is programmed as a trunk or station in MMC 423.

OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS TRUNKS

No Option Description

0 CHANNEL ANY When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free

channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to

NO, they will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy

channel even if the other channel on that BRI is free.

BRI MODE BRI access mode select.

P-P NOR Point to Point NORmal. This operates like a standard telephone line with

one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406.

P-P DID Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an

analogue DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single

channel and translated within the system(MMC714) to a single device.

P-M NOR Point to Multi-point NORmal. This type of circuit operates in a similar

manner to P-P NORmal but allows multiple devices to be attached to the

circuit. Ringing is defined in MMC 406.

P-M MSN Point to Multi-point MSN. This setting is used when the line uses the

MSN supplementary service. Ringing is defined in MMC 421.

DLSEND BRI dial sending mode select.

ENBLOCK Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a Cellphone.

OVERLAP Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user.

3 CLIP TABLE Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. If

NONE, MMC405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER is sent to the network; oth-

erwise, the Calling Party Number entry in MMC 323 corresponding with

the selected number is sent to the network.

NB TYPE Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the net-

work.

UNKNOWN Unknown number

INT.NAT International number

NATIONAL National number

NETWORK Network specific number

SUBSCRIB Subscriber number

EXTEN Local number

ABBREV Abbreviated number

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-119

(continued)

No Option Description

NB PLAN Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the net-

work.

UNKNOWN Unknown numbering plan

ISDN ISDN numbering plan(CCITT E.163-164)

DATA Data numbering plan(CCITT X.121)

TELEX Telex numbering plan(CCITT F.69)

NATIONAL National standard numbering plan

PRIVATE Private numbering plan

EXTEN Local numbering plan

OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS STATIONS

No Option Description

0 ANY CHANNEL When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free

channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy.(e.g., Pre-

ferred channel selection) If set to NO, the user will receive a busy signal

if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on

that BRI is free.(e.g., Exclusive channel selection)

1 POWER FEED This field determines if power to a BRI access will be supplied.(YES or

NO)

CONDITIONS

y A BRI card must be installed in the system. Otherwise, the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message

is displayed.

y If any changes are made in this MMC, the BRI card that is affected by these changes

MUST be restarted using MMC 418 in order for the changes to become effective.

DEFAULT DATA

For BRI Ports programmed as Trunks:

CHANNEL ANY: YES

BRI MODE: P-P DDI

DLSEND: OVERLAP

CLIP TABLE: NONE

NB TYPE: NATIONAL

NB PLAN: ISDN

For BRI Ports programmed as Stations:

CHANNEL ANY: YES

POWER FEED: NO

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-120 Samsung Business Communications

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 419.

Display shows first BRI channel.

[725] BRI-TRK

CHANNEL ANY:YES

2) Dial BRI trunk number.(e.g., 727)

[727] BRI-TRK

CHANNEL ANY:YES

Press Volume button to select BRI trunk and

press Right Soft button.

3) Select option item.

[727] BRI-TRK

CHANNEL ANY:NO

Press Volume button to select option item and

press Right Soft button. [727] BRI-TRK

BRI MODE:P-M MSN

[727] BRI-TRK

DLSEND :OVERLAP

[727] BRI-TRK

CLIP TABLE :NONE

[727] BRI-TRK

NB TYPE:UNKNOWN

4) Select option.

[727] BRI-TRK

CLIP TABLE:1

Press Volume button to select BRI station and

press Right Soft button.

5) Dial BRI station number.(e.g., 729)

[729] BRI-STN

CHANNEL ANY:YES

Press Volume button to select BRI station and

press Right Soft button.

6) Select option item.

[729] BRI-STN

CHANNEL ANY:YES

Press Volume button to select BRI station and

press Right Soft button. [729] BRI-STN

POWER FEED :NO

7) Select option.

[729] BRI-STN

POWER FEED :YES

Press Volume button to select option item and

press Right Soft button.

8) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-121

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER

MMC 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

MMC 418 BRI & PRI CARD RESTART

MMC 421 MSN DIGIT

MMC 423 S/T MODE

MMC 714 DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-122 Samsung Business Communications

[420] PRI OPTIONS

This MMC allows the technician to program a PRI trunk card.

No Option Description

0 CHANNEL ANY When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free

channel of that PRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to

NO, they will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy

channel even if the other channel on that PRI is free.

PRI MODE PRI access mode select.

NORMAL Point to Point NORMAL. This operates like a standard telephone line

with one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406.

DID Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an

analogue DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single

channel and translated within the system(MMC714) to a single device.

DLSEND PRI dial sending mode select.

ENBLOCK Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a cellphone.

OVERLAP Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user.

3 CLIP TABLE Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. If

NONE, MMC405 CO TRUNK NUMBER is sent to the network; other-

wise, the Calling Party Number entry in MMC 323 corresponding with

the selected number is sent to the network.

NB TYPE Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the net-

work.

UNKNOWN Unknown number

INT.NAT International number

NATIONAL National number

NETWORK Network specific number

SUBSCRIB Subscriber number

EXTEN Local number

ABBREV Abbreviated number

NB PLAN Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the

network.

UNKNOWN Unknown numbering plan

ISDN ISDN numbering plan(CCITT E.163-164)

DATA Data numbering plan(CCITT X.121)

TELEX Telex numbering plan(CCITT F.69)

NATIONAL National standard numbering plan

PRIVATE Private numbering plan

EXTEN Local numbering plan

6 SAME CONNID When this option is set to OFF, ISDN port is searched by CONN ID and

if set to ON, searched by data channel id.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-123

CONDITIONS

y Before setting the PRI program, the J2 jumper of the TEPRI or TEPRI2 card must be

set to ‘ON’ for PRI mode.

y After changing this program, run MMC 418, BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART, to ap-

ply the new setting.

DEFAULT DATA

CHANNEL ANY: YES

PRI MODE: DDI

DLSEND: OVERLAP

CLIP TABLE: NONE

NB TYPE: NATIONAL

NB PLAN: ISDN

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 420.

Display shows:

[701] PRI OPTION

CHANNEL ANY:YES

2) Dial first PRI trunk number in PRI card.(e.g., 730)

[730] PRI OPTION

CHANNEL ANY:YES

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

3) Enter option number.

[730] PRI OPTION

PRI MODE:DDI

Press Volume button to select option.

4) Press Volume button to make selection.

Then press Right Soft button.

[730] PRI OPTION

PRI MODE:NORMAL

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER

MMC 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

MMC 418 BRI & PRI CARD RESTART

MMC 714 DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-124 Samsung Business Communications

[421] MSN DIGIT

Provides a method of assigning an incoming MSN call to a specific station. If any entry in

the MSN DIGIT TABLE matches an incoming call’s called party number, either the spe-

cific station is alerted, if it is programmed to accept the call, or the call is cleared if it is

programmed to reject the call.

If the incoming called party number does not have a matching entry in the MSN table,

MMC 406 ringing destination is alerted or the call is optionally released.

You can give each MSN number to a specific station and you can select the call waiting op-

tion: when a destination is busy, the incoming call must be cleared or camped-on to the sta-

tion.(which is alerted to the call)

CONDITIONS

y A BRI card must be installed in the system. Otherwise, the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message

is displayed.

y For each BRI access, two adjacent ports are assigned. You need only change the value

for one of the two ports; the value for the other port will be changed automatically.

DEFAULT DATA

1-6: NONE

CW: YES

OPT: ACCEPT

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 421.

Display shows:

[701] MSN DGT (1)

DGT:

2) Enter trunk number.(e.g., 704)

[704] MSN DGT (1)

DGT:

Press Volume button to scroll through ISDN

ports and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter the location 1-8.(e.g., 4)

[704] MSN DGT (4)

DGT:

Press Volume button to select location and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter digits to be translated(e.g., 4603881) via

dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move

[704] MSN DGT (4)

DGT:4603881

to the destination selection.(Max. Digit is 12)

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-125

5) Enter destinations for the six ring plans via the dial

keypad.(e.g., 204 for ring plan 1)

[704] MSN DGT (4)

1:204 2:NONE

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

6) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

[704] MSN DGT (4)

CW:NO OPT:ACEPT

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

7) Enter 1 for ACCEPT or 0 for REJECT.

[704] MSN DGT (4)

CW:NO OPT:ACEPT

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

8) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 423 S/T MODE

[422] TRUNK COS

Used to assign a class of service to each trunk for each of the six ring plans available.

There are 30 different classes of service that are defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Con-

tents. Classes of service are numbered 01-30. Trunk COS applies on Tandem connections.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL RING PLANS: COS 01

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 422.

Display shows first trunk:

[701] TRK COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-126 Samsung Business Communications

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705)

[705] TRK COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

Use Volume button to scroll through trunks.

Press Right Soft button to advance to step 3.

Use Volume button to scroll through trunks and

press Left Soft button to advance to step 4.

Select all trunks.

[ALL] TRK COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

3) Enter ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05)

[705] TRK COS

1:05 2:01 3:01

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of ser-

vice and press Right Soft button to advance to

step 4.

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of ser-

vice and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Enter the next ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05)

[705] TRK COS

1:05 2:05 03:01

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of ser-

vice and press Right Soft button to return to

step 2.

Use Volume button to scroll through classes of ser-

vice and press Left Soft button to return to the previ-

ous step.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next

MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-127

[423] S/T MODE

Allows the technician to select whether a BRI circuit is a station port or a trunk port.

No Type Description

0 TRUNK The BRI trunk port used for ISDN trunk.

1 STATION The BRI trunk port used for ISDN phone.

CONDITIONS

The BRI card must be installed in the system, otherwise the message ‘NO BRI CARD’ is

displayed.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 423.

Display shows first BRI:

[725] S/T MODE

TRUNK

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 727)

[727] S/T MODE

TRUNK

Use Volume button to scroll through BRI numbers

and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all.

[ALL] S/T MODE

TRUNK

3) Enter circuit type.(e.g., station).

[727] S/T MODE

STATION

Press Volume button to select option and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 424 BRI S0 MAPPING

MMC 418 BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART

MMC 419 BRI OPTIONS

MMC 421 MSN DIGIT

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-128 Samsung Business Communications

[424] BRI S0 MAPPING

This MMC assigns an ISDN terminal number to a BRI station port.

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the BRI card or BRM is installed in the system.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 424.

Display shows first terminal number:

[8701]S0 MAPPING

NONE

2) Dial terminal number.

[8704]S0 MAPPING

NONE

Press Volume button to make selection of terminal

numbers and press Right Soft button to advance

cursor.

3) Dial BRI port number.

[8704]S0 MAPPING

712

Use Volume button to scroll through ports and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 419 BRI OPTIONS

MMC 423 S/T MODE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-129

[425] CID TRUNKS

This MMC assigns a TRUNK number to a CID TRUNK.

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the TRM or trunk card is installed in the system.

DEFAULT DATA

NORMAL TRUNK

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 425.

Display shows first terminal number:

[701]CID TRUNKS

NORMAL TRUNK

2) Enter trunk number.

[702]CID TRUNKS

NORMAL TRUNK

Press Volume button to make selection of trunk num-

bers and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

Select all.

[ALL] CID TRUNKS

NORMAL TRUNK

3) Enter trunk type.(e.g., CID TRUNK).

[ALL] CID TRUNKS

CID TRUNK

Press Volume button to select option and

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-130 Samsung Business Communications

[426] TRUNK GAIN CONTROL

Allows loss levels to be adjusted on a per-trunk basis. There are two adjustments available

in this MMC: ‘TX’ is the transmission level adjustment of the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is

the receiving level adjustment of the station to the trunk.

There are four types of adjustment:

No Trunk Gain Description

0 +0.0 No adjustment

1 +1.9 Up 1.9 dB

2 -6.0 Down 6.0 dB

3 -2.5 Down 2.5 dB

DEFAULT DATA

TX: +0.0

RX: +0.0

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 426.

Display shows:

[701] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)

via the dial keypad.

[705] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all.

[ALL] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

3) Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[705] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

4) Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor and

[701] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:-2.5

return to step 1.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-131

[428] ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE

This MMC is used to allow or restrict trunks from making outgoing calls to other trunks

within the same system. By default(DIAL=YES) all trunks can use other trunks. To prevent

use, select NO.

DEFAULT DATA

DIAL: YES

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 428.

Display shows:

(301) USE (301)

DIAL:YES

2) Dial the trunk use group number.(e.g., 305)

(305) USE (301)

DIAL:YES

Press Volume button to selection and press

Right Soft button.

Select all trunk use groups.

(ALL) USE (301)

DIAL:YES

3) Dial the trunk use group number.(e.g., 304)

(305) USE (304)

DIAL:YES

Press Volume button to selection and press Right

Soft button.

4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

(305) USE (304)

DIAL:NO

Press Volume button to select YES/NO and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-132 Samsung Business Communications

[432] SET H-TRK

This MMC is used to select the type of signalling for each H- trunk. There are three opera-

tion types available.(E & M, DID, R/D)

DEFAULT DATA

E & M

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 432.

Display shows:

[701] SET H-TRK

E&M

2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)

[705] SET H-TRK

E&M

Press Volume button to make selection.

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all trunks.

[ALL] SET H-TRK

E&M

3) Press Volume button to select trunk type and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[705] SET H-TRK

DID

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-133

[433] COST RATE

In this MMC, the TRUNK COST RATE flags are entered for each trunk. DIAL PLANs are

defined in MMC 746(Costing Dial Plan). RATE CALCULATION TABLES are defined in

MMC 749. Each trunk may be defined with up to eight cost rates. Enter one or more of the

eight COST RATES per trunk. If an entry is left blank, no call costing will be calculated for

that particular DIAL PLAN.

Call type 8 is fixed for incoming calls. Select cost rate type 8 only if you want incoming

call costing for a trunk.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL TRUNKS/ALL DIAL PLANS: ALL COST RATES ASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 433.

Display shows trunk number and Cost Rate

[701] :12345678

CR :11111111

table numbers:

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705)

[705] :12345678

CR :11111111

Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right

Soft button to move cursor.

Select all.

3) Press Volume button to move cursor along the line until

the cursor is under the Cost Rate number.(e.g., 2)

[701] :12345678

CR :10111111

Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right Soft

button to return to step 1.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 746 COSTING DIAL PLAN

MMC 747 RATE CALCULATION TABLE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-134 Samsung Business Communications

[434] CONNECTION STATUS

This read-only MMC will confirm the connection status of stations or trunks. Display

status displays the status of a station or trunk at the time requested. If a conference is in

progress with the selected trunk or station, the display will show one of the conference par-

ties and an arrow(Æ). The technician or system administrator can then display the other

parties in the conference. If a station or trunk is in an idle state, the display will show

‘IDLE’. If the station or trunk selected is not a valid selection, the display will show ‘IN-

VALID DATA’. If the station or trunk is made busy by the CPU, the display will show

‘MADE BUSY’. If the station is in busy state with no other connection, the display will

show ‘BUSY’ only.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

Display trunk connection status

1) Press Transfer button and enter 434.

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

2) Enter station or trunk number.

Display show connection status:

DISPLAY STATUS

702 227

3) Enter another station or trunk.

DISPLAY STATUS

702 227

Press Transfer button to exit.

Display station connection status

1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

2) Enter station or trunk number.

Display show connection status.

DISPLAY STATUS

235 715

3) Enter another station or trunk.

DISPLAY STATUS

235 715

Press Transfer button to exit.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-135

Display trunk status in conference

1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

2) Enter station or trunk number.

Display shows connection status:

DISPLAY STATUS

702 227 ,215 Æ

3) Press Right Soft button to display the next

station or trunks involved.

DISPLAY STATUS

702 216 Æ

4) Enter another station or trunk.

DISPLAY STATUS

216 702 ,227 Æ

Press Transfer button to exit.

Display status no connection

1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

2) Enter station or trunk number.

Display show connection status.

DISPLAY STATUS

702 NONE

3) Enter another station or trunk.

DISPLAY STATUS

702 NONE

Press Transfer button to exit.

Display status no connection

1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

2) Enter invalid station or trunk number.

Display show INVALID DATA:

DISPLAY STATUS

INVALID DATA

3) Enter another station or trunk.

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

Press Transfer button to exit.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-136 Samsung Business Communications

Display connection status with invalid trunk

or station number

1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

2) Enter invalid station or trunk number

Display show INVALID DATA:

DISPLAY STATUS

INVALID DATA

3) Enter another station or trunk.

DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

Press Transfer button to exit.

Display connection status with trunk or station num-

ber in maintenance busy

1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS

201 IDLE

2) Enter station or trunk number.

Display show connection status:

DISPLAY STATUS

725 MADE BUSY

3) Enter another station or trunk.

DISPLAY STATUS

725 MADE BUSY

Press Transfer button to exit.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 108 STATION STATUS

MMC 409 TRUNK STATUS READ

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-137

[436] TRUNK TMC GAIN

Allows loss levels of TMC for analogue trunks to be adjusted on a per-trunk basis. There

are two adjustments available in this MMC: ‘TX’ is the transmission level adjustment of

the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is the receiving level adjustment of the station to the trunk.

DEFAULT DATA

TX: +0 dB

RX: +0 dB

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 436.

Display shows:

[701] TMC GAIN

RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705) via the

dial keypad.

[705] TMC GAIN

RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all.

[ALL] TMC GAIN

RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

3) Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[705] TMC GAIN

RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

4) Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor and

[701] TMC GAIN

RX:+0 dB TX:-2 dB

return to step 2.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-138 Samsung Business Communications

[437] 16TRK GAIN CONTROL

Allows gain levels to be adjusted on a per-trunk basis. There are two adjustments available

in this MMC: ‘TX’ is the transmission level adjustment of the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is

the receiving level adjustment of the station to the trunk.

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the TRM or trunk card is installed in the system.

DEFAULT DATA

TX: 3

RX: 3

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 437.

Display shows:

[701] TRK TYPE:3

RX:3 TX:3

2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)

via the dial keypad.

[701] TRK TYPE:3

RX:3 TX:3

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all.

[ALL] TRK TYPE:3

RX:3 TX:3

3) Press Volume button to select trunk type (1~4) and

press Right Soft button to move cursor. (e.g. 4)

[ALL] TRK TYPE:4

RX:3 TX:3

4) Press Volume button to select RX value(1~6) and

press Right Soft button to move cursor (e.g. 1)

[ALL] TRK TYPE:4

RX:1 TX:3

5) Press Volume button to select TX value(1~6) and

press Right Soft button to move cursor (e.g. 5)

[ALL] TRK TYPE:4

RX:1 TX:5

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-139

[500] SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS

Used to set the values of the system counters. The counters are listed below with a brief de-

scription of each.

No Counter Default Description

0 ALARM REM.

CNTER

5 The number of times that an alarm reminder will

ring a station before cancelling. RANGE = 1-99.

1 AUTO RDL

COUNTER

5 The number of times the system will redial an out-

side number after the auto redial feature has been

activated. RANGE = 1-99.

2 DISA CALL CNTER 99 Sets the maximum number of intercom calls that

can be made after accessing a DISA line.

RANGE = 1-99.

3 DISA LOCK CNTER 3 Number of attempts the system will allow to incor-

rectly access a DISA line before locking out the

DISA line. RANGE = -99

4 NEW CALL

COUNTER

99 Number of times the system will allow a user to

signal New Call on a Trunk line during one call.

RANGE = 1-99.

5 UCDS VISUAL

ALARM

0 Used to set the Visual alarm threshold. It is trig-

gered when the number of calls waiting to be an-

swered in the UCD group reaches this value.

RANGE = 0-25.

6 UCDS AUDIO ALARM 0 Used to set the Audio alarm threshold. It is trig-

gered when the number of calls waiting to be an-

swered in the UCD group reaches this value.

RANGE = 0-25.

7 UCD CS LEVEL 1 0 Provides call wait indication level 1 if number of

calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches

this value. RANGE = 0-25.

8 UCD CS LEVEL 2 0 Provides call wait indication level 2 if number of

calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches

this value. RANGE = 0-25.

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-140 Samsung Business Communications

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 500.

Display shows:

ALARM REM.CNTER

05Æ

2) Enter number from above list.(e.g., 6)

UCDS AUDIO ALARM

00Æ

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter in new value via dial keypad.

If entry is valid, system will return to step 2.

UCDS AUDIO ALARM

00Æ02

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-141

[501] SYSTEM TIMERS

Allows the technician to adjust individual timers as necessary.

TIMER TABLE

Timer Name Default Range Unit Description

ALARM TIME 100 0-2500 MIN This is the time the system alarm key will start

ringing after the alarm key has been silenced.

ALERT TONE TIME 1000 100-2500

MSEC

This timer sets the duration of the attention

tone preceding a call to a phone in the Voice

Announce or Auto Answer mode. This tone

will also precede a forced Auto Answer call.

ALM REM.INTERVAL 25 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between ring at-

tempts at a station when alarm reminder is

set.

ALM REM RING OFF 10 1-25 SEC This timer controls the length of the ring cycle

duration when an alarm reminder is set at a

station.

ATT. RECALL TIME 30 0-250 SEC This controls how long a transfer recall will

ring at a station before recalling the operator.

AUTO REDIAL INT. 30 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between attempts

after RETRY dialling is set on a station.

AUTO REDIAL RLS. 45 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a Ring No

Answer condition on a retry number dialled

before the auto redial is automatically can-

celled.

BOOTH TIME OUT

(Hotel application only)

005 0-250 MIN Controls the time for which a booth phone is

enabled.

CALLBACK NO ANS 30 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time before the call-

back is automatically cancelled when a call-

back detects Ring No Answer.

CAMP ON RECALL 30 0-250 SEC This timer controls the time a camped-on call

will stay at a destination before recalling to the

transferring station.

CID MSG RECEIVE 6 1-25 SEC The amount of time that the system will allow

a valid message from the analogue CID trunk.

CLI DISPLAY TIME 5 1-25 SEC The amount of time that the Caller ID informa-

tion remains on the phone’s display.

CO CLEAR TIME 30 0-250 SEC The length of time a Direct Trunk Select key

remains busy after cleardown.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-142 Samsung Business Communications

(continued)

Timer Name Default Range Unit Description

CO CONFIRM TIME 3 0-250 MIN According to MMC 314 CO CONFIRM type,

the outgoing call will be disconnected after

this timer expires or the outgoing caller will

hear the confirm tone.

CO-CO DISCONNECT 20 1-250 MIN This timer monitors the duration of an unsu-

pervised conference; when it expires, both

trunks are disconnected.

CONFIRM TONE TM 1000 100-2500

MSEC

The tone heard when a feature is activated or

deactivated.

CRD TONE INT TM 30 0-250 SEC This is the call record tone interval time. An entry

other than zero will cause a tone to be heard by

all the parties in a recorded conversation. The

range for the tone is 001(every second) to 255

(every 255 seconds). A value of 000 means no

tone. Requires an SVMi card.

DIAL PASS TIME 3 0-25 SEC This timer monitors the time before connect-

ing the transmit of the phone to the trunk side

of an outgoing call.

DISA DISCONNECT 30 1-250 MIN This timer controls the maximum duration of a

DISA call.

DISA LOCK OUT TM 30 1-250 MIN This timer controls how long a DISA call is not

allowed to be made after the DISA error

counter has expired(MMC 500).

DISA NOANS DISC. 30 0-250 SEC This timer determines when a DISA call is

disconnected by force when a called party

does not answer.

DISA PASS CHECK 30 1-250 MIN This timer defines the period before the sys-

tem clears the incorrect passcode counter.

DISA NO ACTION 10 0-250 SEC This timer controls how long a DISA line will

wait for further action from the caller.

DISPLAY DELAY TM 2 1-250 SEC This timer controls how long a display is

shown in the LCD and how long error tone is

heard.

DOOR LOCK RELES. 500 100-2500

MSEC

This timer controls how long the door lock

relay will be activated.

DOOR RING DETECT 50 10-250

MSEC

This timer controls the time before a call is

answered by the door phone.

DOOR RING OFF TM 30 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of ringing at

the door ring destination before automatically

cancelling.

E-HOLD RECALL TM 45 0-250 SEC This timer controls how long a call is held ex-

clusively at a station before recalling.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-143

(continued)

Timer Name Default Range Unit Description

FIRST DIGIT TIME 10 1-250 SEC This timer controls how long the system will

wait for dialling to begin before dropping the

dial tone and returning the you to error tone.

HOK FLASH MAX TM 120 20-2500

MSEC

This timer monitors the duration of a hook-

switch flash to ensure that the flash is valid

and not a line noise or an accidental hook-

switch bounce LONGEST duration.

HOK FLASH MIN TM 80 20-2500

MSEC

This timer monitors the duration of a hook-

switch flash to ensure that the flash is valid

and not a line noise or an accidental hook-

switch bounce SHORTEST duration.

HOOK OFF TIME 100 20-2500

MSEC

This timer controls the time before dial tone is

sent to a single line station.

HOOK ON TIME 200 20-2500

MSEC

This timer sets the minimum amount of time that

the system will recognize as an SLT hang up.

INQUIRY RELEASE 30 1-250 SEC This timer monitors the duration of the interac-

tion of the Soft button to determine when to

return the LCD back to a normal status. This

timer affects only display phones.

INTER DIGIT TIME 10 1-250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between

dialling valid digits before dropping the call

and returning you back to error tone.

ISDN INT DGT TM 7 1-15 SEC This timer controls the grace period between

dialling valid digits and the end of the dialling

string on an ISDN call.

KMMC LOCK OUT TM 30 10-50 SEC This timer controls the grace period between

programming actions while in a programming

session. The timer automatically returns the sys-

tem to secure programming status.

LCR ADVANCE TIME 5 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time before selecting

the next allowable route when a station is

allowed to route advance.

LCR INTER DIGIT 5 1-250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between

dialling valid digits before accessing a trunk.

LONG KEY DETECT 600 0-2500

MSEC

This timer controls the time a key must be held

down before the key press is repeated.

LONG KEY REPEAT 300 0-2500

MSEC

This timer controls the time between repeated

digits on a long key press.

MCL DELAY TIME 4 0-9 SEC This timer controls the time when the system

should start transmitting Authorisation Code

after sending MCL access code(Cable& Wire-

less 131 access). Available in UK only.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-144 Samsung Business Communications

(continued)

Timer Name Default Range Unit Description

MS LED ON TIME 5 1-10 SEC This timer controls the duration a Manual Sig-

nalling key will remain on after use.

OFF HOOK RING INT 15 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between ring

bursts to a user who has a camped-on call.

OHVA ANSWER TIME 10 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time allowed to answer

an OHVA call before automatic rejection.

PAGE TIME OUT 20 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a page an-

nouncement.

PAGE TONE TIME 500 100-2500

MSEC

This timer controls the duration of tone burst

heard over the page prior to the page an-

nouncement.

PARK RECALL TIME 45 0-250 SEC This timer controls how long a call is parked

before recalling to the call park originator.

AP-MMC LOCK TIME 5 1-60 MIN This timer monitors the PCMMC activity,

drops the link if no action is created by

PCMMC and returns the system back to se-

cure program status.

PERI UCD REPORT 5 3-99 SEC This timer determines the interval between

periodic UCD reports provided to an SIO port.

POWER DOWN TIME 2000 500-9900

MSEC

This timer monitors the power to the ROM

pack to begin shutdown status.

RECALL

DISCONNECT

2 1-250 MIN This is the time an attendant recall will ring

before being disconnected.

RECALL WAIT TIME 15 0-250 SEC This is the time any recall(hold or transfer)

continues to recall at your station before it

recalls to the operator.

ROUTE OPTIMISE 5 0-250 SEC When a call is made via Q-SIG signalling,

route optimization is activated after this time.

SMDR START /DP 30 1-250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR re-

cording for rotary dialing.

SMDR START /DTMF 15 1-250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR recording

for touchtone dialling. This timer also controls

the LCD duration timer on the phones. The du-

ration time displayed and the SMDR time dura-

tion will be the same.

SYS HOLD RECALL 45 0-250 SEC This timer determines the time calls can be

left on hold before recalling to the holding

station. This is a system-wide timer. Setting

the timer to 000 means that no recalling will

take place.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-145

(continued)

Timer Name Default Range Unit Description

TRANSFER RECALL 20 0-250 SEC This timer determines how long transferred

calls ring before recalling. This is a system-

wide timer.

TRK AUTOMOH DISC 60 1-250 SEC When set to ON, incoming trunk calls are

connected to MOH automatically after the

DISA ANSWR timer(MMC 503) expires. In

this case the caller hears MOH. If the TRK

AUTOMOH DISC timer expires before the

call is answered, the call is disconnected.

TSW CONN. DELAY 0 0-10 SEC When an incoming trunk makes an outgoing

call to another trunk, the system connects the

voice path after this time.

UCDS AUDIO ALARM 0 0-990 SEC When an SVMi-20 card is installed and the digital

UCD package enabled, this counter determines

the maximum number of seconds a call has

been waiting at the UCD group before the UCD

group’s SUPV key begins to flash along with an

audio alarm. For more UCD alarm conditions,

see MMC 500.

UCDS VISUAL ALARM 0 0-250 SEC When an SVMi-20 card is installed and the

digital UCD package enabled, this counter

determines the maximum number of seconds

a call at the UCD group before the UCD

group’s SUPV key begins to flash as an

alarm. For more UCD alarm conditions, see

MMC 500.

VOIP RE-ROUTE TM 15 0-25 SEC If an outgoing call made via a VoIP trunk

does not receive an acknowledgement mes-

sage from the called party within this time,

the call is treated as failed.

When timers value is ‘0’

Some timers are disabled when their value is set to ‘0’.

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

SOME TIMERS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-146 Samsung Business Communications

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 501.

Display shows first timer value:

AA INT DGT TIME

05 SECÆ

2) Press Volume button to select timer and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

KMMC LOCK OUT TM

060 SECÆ

3) Enter new value using keypad; if valid, system

returns to step 2 with new value.

KMMC LOCK OUT TM

060 SECÆ250

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-147

[502] STATION-WIDE TIMERS

Allows certain station timer values to be changed on a per-station basis or for all stations.

No Item Description

0 NO ANS FWD This timer controls how long the station will ring before Forward on No

Answer takes place.(1-250 sec)

1 DTMF DUR. This timer governs the duration of DTMF digits which are transmitted to

an external VMS system port. This can be used when a VMS system fails

to recognise the default DTMF digit duration being transmitted from the

SLT port.(100-9900 ms)

2 F-DGT DELY This timer will be valuable for the system administrator to insert a suitable

delay before generating DTMF digits for In-Band integration.(100-

9900 ms)

3 OFFHK SEL. This timer controls the grace period before placing an internal/external call

as programmed in MMC 306.(0-250 sec)

4 EFWD DELAY This timer controls the External Call Forward feature which will allow a

station to ring before the call is placed on external call forwarding.

(1-250 sec)

5 CC RNG DLY If a station does not answer an incoming call within this time, other sta-

tions with a CC key for that station will ring.

CONDITIONS

NONE

DEFAULT DATA

NO ANS FWD: 015 SEC

DTMF DUR: 100 MSEC

F-DGT DELY: 600 MSEC

OFFHK SEL: 008 SEC

EFWD DELAY: 010 SEC

CC RNG DLY: 010 SEC

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-148 Samsung Business Communications

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 502.

Display shows:

[201] NO ANS FWD

015 SECÆ

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] NO ANS FWD

015 SECÆ_

Press Volume button to select station and

press Right Soft button.

Select all stations and press Right Soft button. [ALL] NO ANS FWD

015 SECÆ_

3) Enter new value(must be three digits) via

dial keypad.(e.g., 020)

[205] NO ANS FWD

015 SECÆ020

System will return to step 2.

4) Dial timer number from above list.(e.g., 1)

[205] DTMF DUR.

0100 MS Æ_

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

5) Enter new timer value.(must be four digits, e.g.,

0200)

[205] DTMP DUR.

0100 MS Æ0200

System returns to step 2.

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 102 CALL FORWARD

MMC 306 HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-149

[503] TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

Allows certain trunk timer values to be changed on a per-trunk basis or for all trunks.

No Item Description Range

00 ANS.BAK TM ANSWER BACK TIME. This timer is used for certain

types of E & M signalling and does not affect normal

CO lines.

0-2500 MSEC

01 CLEARING This timer ensures that a call is fully disconnected at

the CO by preventing CO access outgoing or receiv-

ing incoming ring between a disconnect and the

expiration of this timer.

100-9900 MSEC

02 CO SUPV TM CO SUPERVISION TIME. this is the minimum

length of loop open disconnect received from the

CO that will be seen as a valid hang up on the sys-

tem.

10-2500 MSEC

03 DTMF DUR. DTMF DURATION. This is the length of the DTMF

digits that will be sent to the CO on this line.

100-9900 MSEC

04 F-DGT DELY First-DIGIT DELAY. This is the length of time the

system will wait for CO line conditions to stabilize

after seizure before sending DTMF digits.

100-9900 MSEC

05 FLASH TIME This is the duration of the momentary open sent on

a circuit when FLASH key is pressed.

20-2500 MSEC

06 NO RING TM This is the length of time the system will wait after

detecting a ring burst on a line before deciding the

call has disconnected.

1-25 SEC

07 PAUSE TIME This is the length of time the system will wait before

sending the next digit for a pause in a speed dial

bin.

1-25 SEC

08 PRS DET TM This means the duration of PRS signal pulse. If the

PRS signal is reversed when opposite party is an-

swered and maintain the status before the opposite

party disconnect the call, the PRS DET TM must be

set to 0.

0-2500 MSEC

09 RNG DET TM RING DETECT TIME. This is the minimum length of

ring signal the system will regard as a valid ring.

10-2500 MSEC

10 WINK TIME This is the duration of the acknowledgment signal

that the system will send on an E&M circuit

100-300 MSEC

11 MF/DP INT This is the interval between sending digit. In case of

DTMF signal, over the 500ms will be serviced as

100 ms.

100-9900 MSEC

12 MFR DLY TM This is a delay time to allocate the MFR after incom-

ing trunk is detected. This is to prevent the wrong

detection of DTMF signal by noise.

0-25 SEC

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-150 Samsung Business Communications

(continued)

No Item Description Range

13 DISA ANSWR This is a delay time to answer the DISA trunk call or

to answer the trunk when TRK AUTO ANSWER is

set to ON(MMC400).

0-9 SEC

14 CONN DELAY This is the delay time to connect a voice path when

users make outgoing calls via a loop trunk. This is to

prevent users hearing noise when the loop trunk is

seized.

0-2500 MSEC

DEFAULT DATA

ANS.BAK TM: 0600 MSEC

CLEARING: 2000 MSEC

CO SUPV TM: 0400 MSEC

DTMF DUR.: 0100 MSEC

F-DGT DELY: 0600 MSEC

FLASH TIME: 0090 MSEC

NO RING TM: 04 SEC

PAUSE TIME: 03 SEC

PRS DET TM: 0000 MSEC

RNG DET TM: 0300 MSEC

WINK TIME: 200 MSEC

MF/DP INT: 0800 MSEC

MFR DLY TIME: 00 SEC

DISA ANSWR: 01 SEC

CONN DELAY: 0000 MSEC

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 503.

Display shows:

[701] ANS.BAK TM

0600 MS Æ

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)

[704] ANS.BAK TM

0600 MS Æ

Press Volume button to select trunk and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all trunks.

[ALL] ANS.BAK TM

0600 MS Æ_

3) Dial timer number from the list.

[704] DTMF DUR.

0100 MS Æ_

Press Volume button to select timer and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter new timer value.(must be four digits, e.g., 0200)

System returns to step 2.

[704] DTMF DUR.

0100 MS Æ 0200

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-151

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-152 Samsung Business Communications

[504] PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO

Allows the ability to change the value of pulses per second and the duration of the

make/break time. This will only affect rotary dial trunks.

No Item Description

0 MAKE/BREAK RATIO Make/Break ratio of dial pulse(01-99)

1 PULSE PER SECOND Number of dial pulses per second(10 or 20)

DEFAULT DATA

MAKE/BREAK: 33 MAKE

PULSES PER SECOND: 10 PPS

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 504.

Display shows:

MAKE/BREAK RATIO

33 MAKE Æ

2) Dial 0 or 1 for option.

PULSE PER SECOND

10 PPS Æ_

Press Volume button for selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial new value.

System returns to step 2.

PULSE PER SECOND

10 PPS Æ 20

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-153

[505] ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

Allows the system date and time to be set. This will set the system-wide clock.

Type Description Range

YY Year 00-99

MM Month 01-12

DD Date 01-31

W Day 0-6(0: SUN, 1: MON, 2: TUE, 3: WED, 4: THU, 5: FRI, 6: SAT)

HH Hour 00-23

MM Minute 00-59

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 505.

Display shows:

OLD:0111095:0901

NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM

2) Enter new time and date using above table.

System returns to step 2.

OLD:0111095:0901

NEW:0111121:1445

3) Verify time and date.

Re-enter if necessary.

OLD:0111121:1445

NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS(AUTO UPDATE TIME)

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-154 Samsung Business Communications

[506] TONE CADENCE

Provides the ability to customize the tone cadence on a system-wide basis. The system pro-

vides 11 types of tone and three types of tone provided from Central Office or a PBX sys-

tem can be detected.

When changing the MMC [506]

MMC [506] should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance

of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

No Item Description

00 BUSY TONE The called station is busy.

01 CONFM/BARGE A feature has been successfully activated/cleared or a Barge-In with

Tone has been performed.

02 DIAL TONE The system is ready to interpret key presses/dialled digits.

03 DND/NO MORE The called station is in DND or has no free CALL buttons.

04 ERROR TONE An error has been made.

05 HOLD/CAMPON This is the system generated hold tone.

06 MSGWAT TONE This is the tone heard at an SLT with a message waiting.

07 RGBACK TONE The called station is ringing.

08 RING TONE This is the tone heard from a ROP device or Loud Bell when these de-

vices are called.

09 TRANSFER

TONE

This is the tone heard when the transfer button is pressed or an SLT

hook flashes.

10 DID RNGBACK This is the tone heard by the outside party when they dial a DID number.

11 CO BUSY This is used to detect the busy tone provided from Central Office or a PBX

system.

12 CO RINGBACK This is used to detect the ring back tone provided from Central Office or

PBX system.

13 CO DIAL This is used to detect the dial tone provided from Central Office or PBX

system.

DEFAULT DATA

(unit: milliseconds)

TONE ON OFF ON OFF

BUSY TONE 500 500 500 500

CONFIRM/BARGE-IN 200 200 200 5000

DIAL TONE CONTINUOUS

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-155

(unit: milliseconds)

TONE ON OFF ON OFF

DND/NO MORE TONE 250 250 250 250

ERROR TONE 500 500 500 500

HOLD/CAMP-ON TONE 500 3500 500 3500

MESSAGE WAIT TONE 1000 250 1000 250

RING BACK TONE 400 200 400 2000

RING TONE 1000 3000 1000 3000

TRANSFER TONE 100 100 100 100

DID RINGBACK TONE 1000 3000 1000 3000

CO BUSY TONE 350 350 350 350

CO RINGBACK TONE 400 200 400 2000

CO DIAL TONE CONTINUOUS

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 506.

Display shows:

BUSY TONE

INTERRUPT TONE

2) Dial tone number from above list.(00-13, e.g., 09)

TRANSFER TONE

INTERRUPT TONE

Press Volume button to select tone, press Left Soft

button and advance to step 3.

3) Dial tone option 0 for CONTINUOUS or 1 for IN-

TERRUPT.

TRANSFER TONE

INTERRUPT TONE

Press Volume button to select tone control and press

Right Soft button to advance step 4.

Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Dial new value for interrupt times.

(must be four digits)

TRANSFER TONE:0100

9900 0100 9900

Press Right Soft button advances cursor and

press Left Soft button retreats cursor.

If valid entry, system returns to step 2.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-156 Samsung Business Communications

[507] ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

Use this MMC to program Ring Plans time settings. Ring Plans provide six separate ring-

ing destinations based on day of the week and time of day. The start time within a plan is

the time the system will switch from one ringing destination to the next. The end time is the

time the system will switch from that plan to the previous plan.

An RPO(Ring Plan Override) button is not needed as the system will switch automatically;

however, it is helpful to have a dedicated button so the status can be manually changed if

needed. If a ring plan has no time entry the ring plan defaults to ring plan 1. The ring plans

correlate with all MMCs that program ring or termination destinations and station and

trunk COS.

The following example may be useful when assigning ring plan times:

RING PLAN Start Time End Time

(MON: 1) ST: 0000 END: 23:59

(MON: 2) ST: 0800 END: 2200

(MON: 3) ST: 1000 END: 2000

(MON: 4) ST: 1200 END: 1800

(MON: 5) ST: 1300 END: 1600

(MON: 6) ST: 1400 END: 1500

Using a 24-hour clock in the example above, notice that the END time is within the same

24-hour period as the START time. The system will stay in the last active Ring Plan from

the previous day until the end time which is 23:59. Monday starts Ring Plan 1 at 00:00.

The system will stay in Ring Plan 1 until Ring Plan 2 starts(08:00) and will stay in Ring

Plan 2 until Ring Plan 3 starts(10:00), and so on. As each ring Plan start it will override the

previous Ring Plan.

If a Ring Plan expires and there are no additional Ring Plans set, the system will default to

the Ring Plan with a time that extends past the expired Ring Plan time.

CONDITIONS

y When using a Samsung built-in Voice Mail card that only has day/night mode, the

day/night must be set for each RING PLAN in MMC 758, VM DAY/NIGHT.

y Ring Plans must be programmed in sequence.(RP 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.) A Ring Plan cannot

be omitted.(i.e. you cannot program RP 1, 2, 5, etc.)

y A higher numbered Ring Plan cannot have a START time which begins before a lower

numbered Ring Plan.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-157

Ring Plan 1

Ring Plan 1 is the default Ring Plan for each day. If no Ring Plan destination is

entered, the operator group is the default destination.

DEFAULT DATA

START: NONE

END: NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 507.

Display shows:

RING PLAN (SUN:1)

ST: END:

2) Dial day number.(0-6, e.g., 3 for Weds)

RING PLAN (WED:1)

ST: END:

Press Volume button to select day.

Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 3.

3) Dial ring plan number.(1-6, e.g., 2)

RING PLAN (WED:2)

ST:_ END:

Press Volume button to select day.

Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 4.

4) Dial start time.(e.g., 1030)

If valid, cursor moves to end time.

RING PLAN (WED:1)

ST:1030 END:1800

Enter end time.

If valid, system returns to step 2.

Begin again.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-158 Samsung Business Communications

[508] CALL COST

Set the Call Cost attributes generated by the system during a call. This information can be

displayed on the phone during a call or as an SMDR record.

No Display Description

0 UNIT COST PER MP When the system is installed to receive metering pulses

on a C. O. outgoing call. It is used for generating total call

cost by multiplying it by the number of pulses. Allows a

maximum value of 9999.(Currency is PENCE or ECENTS

depending on USE EURO option setting in MMC 210.)

1 CALL COST RATE This generates additional call cost calculated by multiply-

ing this rate by the original call cost. Ranges from 100 to

255.

CALL COST

Changing this value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate

call cost. This MPD facility requires the Meter Pulse Detection version of the trunk

card.

DEFAULT DATA

UNIT COST PER MP: 0200 PENCE, CALL COST RATE: 100 PERCENT

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 508.

Display shows:

UNIT COST PER MP

0200 PENCE ™

2) Dial 0 or 1.

CALL COST RATE

100 % ™

Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft

button to move cursor.

3) Enter new value.(e.g., 110)

System returns to step 2.

CALL COST RATE

110 % ™

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 110 STATION ON/OFF(CALL COST OPTION)

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-159

[510] SLI RING CADENCE

Provides the ability to customize the ring cadence for single line ports on a system-wide

basis. There are five cadences available.

When changing the MMC [510]

MMC [510] should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance

of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

No Item Description

1 STN RING This is the cadence intercom calls will ring at.

2 TRK RING This is the cadence trunk calls will ring at.

3 DOOR RING This is the cadence door phone calls will ring at.

4 ALM RING This is the cadence alarm reminder calls will ring at.

5 CBK RING This is the cadence callbacks will ring at.

DEFAULT DATA

(unit: milliseconds)

Item ON OFF ON OFF

STN RING 1000 3000 1000 3000

TRK RING 0400 0200 0400 2000

DOOR RING 0400 0100 0400 2000

ALM RING 0400 0200 0400 3000

CBK RING 1000 4000 1000 4000

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 510.

Display shows:

1:STN RING :0400

0200 0400 3000

2) Dial cadence number from above list.(e.g., 3)

3:DOOR RING:0400

0100 0400 2000

Press Volume button to select

Press Left Soft button and advance to step 3.

3) Dial new value for interrupt times.

(must be four digits)

3:DOOR RING:0100

9900 0100 9900

Press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

Press Left Soft button to retreat cursor.

If valid entry, system returns to step 2.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-160 Samsung Business Communications

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-161

[511] MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE

This MMC defines the cadence(flash rate) of single line telephone message waiting lamps

on phones connected to systems with an MWSLI card. There are two choices for the MW

lamp cadence: continuous and interrupted.

No Item Description

0 INTERRUPTED The MW lamp will flash at a rate determined by the timer settings.

The shortest ‘on’ time is 100 ms and the longest ‘on’ time is

3000 ms. The timer is adjusted in 100 ms increments.

1 CONTINUOUS When an MWSLI port has a message, the lamp will be lit steady.

CONDITIONS

Systems with MWSLI cards only.

DEFAULT DATA

INTERRUPT LED: 1000MS-ON 1000MS-OFF

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 511.

Display shows:

MW LAMP CADENCE

INTERRUPT LED

2) Press 0 or 1 to select CADENCE.

MW LAMP CADENCE

INTERRUPT LED

Press Volume button to make selection.

Press Right Soft button to advance step 3.

3) Dial new values for interrupt times.(four digits) MW LAMP CADENCE

2000 2000

Press Right Soft button to move cursor back.

If valid entry, system returns to step 2.

Press Left Soft button to move cursor back.

If valid entry, system returns to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-162 Samsung Business Communications

[512] HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT

This MMC defines up to 60 holiday dates throughout the year. The system will override the

normal ring plan for these days and remain in the ring plan associated with the holiday.

Dates are entered in a month-day format: for example, July 4th would be 0704. One ring

plan applies to all holidays.

DEFAULT DATA

NO HOLIDAY ASSIGNED

FOLLOWS RING PLAN 1

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 512.

Display shows the Ring Plan:

RING PLAN

FOLLOW 1

2) Press Right Soft button advance cursor.

Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan.

RING PLAN

FOLLOW 2

Use the dial keypad to select a Ring Plan.(e.g., 2)

3) Press Right Soft button to enter and advance cursor. RING PLAN

FOLLOW 2

4) Press Volume button to scroll to assign Holiday

and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

ASSIGN HOLIDAY

01:

5) Press Volume button to select entry and press Right

Soft button enter and advance cursor.

ASSIGN HOLIDAY

05:

6) Dial date for holiday using the dial keypad.

(e.g., 0704)

ASSIGN HOLIDAY

05:0704

7) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-163

[513] HOTEL TIMER

This MMC is where the Hotel timers for guest-rooms are set. These are system-wide timers

that affect all rooms. Refer to your Hotel documentation for more details.

No Item Description

0 CHECK OUT TIME If a room is occupied after the checkout time, an additional day’s

room charge will be automatically added to the room bill.(If a

room is flagged as Occupied and HOLD then the additional day’s

room charge will not be added. Setting a room status to HOLD

allows a late checkout to be performed.)

1 ROOM CLEAN TIME This is the time each day that the system will flag all occupied

rooms as NEEDS CLEANING.

2 CHECK IN END TM This is used to decide if an additional day’s room charge will be auto-

matically added to the room bill when the first Check Out Time is

reached. For example, if you set the Check In End time as 5 am, all

rooms checked in before 5 am will be automatically charged an extra

day at the Check Out Time(which might be, say, 11 am). Rooms

checked in after 5 am will not be charged extra until the next day, if still

occupied at the Check Out Time.

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL

OPERATION.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 513.

Display shows:

CHECK OUT TIME

HH:MM : :

2) Select the timer using the Volume buttons. ROOM CLEAN TIME

HH:MM : :

3) Enter new time using 24-hour clock format

system returns to step 2.

ROOM CLEAN TIME

HH:MM : 11:30

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-164 Samsung Business Communications

[514] TONE SOURCE

This program can assign an external tone source(e.g., a music source) instead of the normal

system tone(TONE) for certain calls. The tones that can be changed are:

No Type

0 BUSY TONE

1 DIAL TONE

2 DND TONE

3 TRANSFER TONE

4 MSG WAIT TONE

5 ERROR TONE

6 RINGBACK TONE

DEFAULT DATA

TONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 514.

Display shows:

BUSY TONE

TONE

2) Enter the tone number 0-6.(e.g., 1)

DIAL TONE

TONE

Press Volume button to select tone number and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial a number for external tone source.(e.g., 3762)

DIAL TONE

3762

Press Volume button to select tone number and

press Right Soft button to store.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-165

[515] DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT

Defines up to 10 summertime periods. The system time will automatically increase by an

hour at 2 a.m. on the assigned Start date and will automatically decrease by an hour at 3

a.m. on the assigned End date.

Dates are entered as follows:

NO= entry number 01–10

YY= year(last 2 digits, e.g., 05 for 2005)

START = start date(MMDD, e.g., 0801 is 1st August)

END = end date(MMDD, e.g., 0910 is 10th September)

For example, the entry might be:

NO : YY : START : END

01 : 05 : 3103 : 2710

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 515.

Display shows:

NO : YY : START : END

01 : : :

2) Dial 01–10 to select entry number.(e.g., 01)

NO : YY : START : END

01 :_ : :

Press Volume button to select and press Right

Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter dates as described above. NO : YY : START : END

01 : 05 : 3103 : 2710

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS(AUTO UPDATE TIME)

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-166 Samsung Business Communications

[600] ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP

Used to assign an operator group for each ring plan.

DEFAULT DATA

RING PLAN 1-6: 500

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 600.

Display shows:

OPERATOR GROUP

1:500 2:500

2) Dial the ring plan number.(1~6)

OPERATOR GROUP

1:500 2:500

Press Right Soft button to advance the cursor.

3) Dial the group number.

OPERATOR GROUP

1:501 2:500

Press Volume button to select group and press

Right Soft button.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-167

[601] ASSIGN STATION GROUP

This MMC is used to build all station groups. There are 40 programmable groups available.

The options for setting up these groups are as follows:

No Option Description

0 TYPE This is the type of group you are creating and can be one of the follow-

ing:

0 NORMAL: Used to assign stations in a ring group. The members can

be stations, common bell contacts or Ring over Page relays.

1 VMAA: Used to group a number of voice mail port extensions. These

must have been defined in MMC 207 as VMAA ports or they cannot

be entered here..

2 UCD: Used to build a UCD group. The system will support two

methods of UCD:

TYPE 1 UCD

The group OVERFLOW/N-ANS destination(see below) is defined as

an SLT port to which you must connect some type of announcement

device to play to callers while they are on hold.

Please note that this type of UCD group has the following limitations.

a) The announcement device must be able to terminate the an-

nouncement with a hook-flash and a transfer back to the UCD

group.

b) Only one caller at a time can hear the announcement.

c) Each caller connected to the announcement must hear the an-

nouncement in its entirety.

d) It is possible that a new caller may ‘jump ahead’ in the queue if a

previous caller is currently connected to the announcement de-

vice.

TYPE 2 UCD

The group OVERFLOW/N-ANS destination(see below) is defined as

an AA port or group. This will only work if an AA card has been in-

stalled in the system.

The digital announcer in the AA card will supply two recorded an-

nouncements to callers in queue. The first announcement is played

only once, the second announcement will repeat for as long as the

caller is in queue.

This type of UCD group has the following advantages:

a) No external device need be installed to provide an announce-

ment.

b) Multiple callers can hear the announcement(s) simultaneously.

c) Callers hearing the announcement will be transferred to a free

UCD group member(agent) as soon as the agent becomes

available.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-168 Samsung Business Communications

(continued)

No Option Description

0 TYPE(contd) d) The callers place in queue is always maintained.

Additional programming for this type of UCD group is in MMC

607. There is a maximum of 20 UCD groups available on a sys-

tem due to availability of system resources.

3 AA: This is used to group a number of AA ports. An Auto Atten-

dant(AA) card must be installed in the system to do this.

4 BI-VMS: This is the voice mail group for the Built-In Voice Mail card.

5 MESSAGE: Used to group a number of extensions to serve as a

message desk or message group. When one of the stations in this

type of group leaves a message to another station the messaged

station will return the message to the message group so any mem-

ber can answer the call. If a station is a member of more than one

message group, then any message indications made by that station

would be for the first numerical message group they are a member

of. It is not recommended to program stations in to multiple station

groups.

6 S0 STN GRP: This is used to group a number of S0 stations for a

video conference.

7 VMSUCD GRP: This is used to collect UCD queuing prompts from

the SVMi-20. The group members will be the VM ports.

1 RING MODE Each group can have one of the following ring modes. This will decide

how calls are placed to the group.

0 SEQUENTIAL: The stations listed as ‘members’(see below) will be

called on a ‘first available’ basis. Calls will first go to the first mem-

ber; if the first member is busy, calls will go to the second member; if

the second member is busy, calls will go to the third member, and so

on. This type of group is useful for placing the bulk of the incoming

calls with a selected individual, and other members only getting the

calls when that member is busy. The number of members allowed

for a sequential group is 48.

1 DISTRIBUTED: The first call will go to the first member, the second

call will go to the second member, the third call will go to the third

member. This type of group is useful for evenly distributing the call

among all group members. The number of members allowed for a

distributed group is 48.

2 UNCONDITIONAL: Calls are placed to all group members simulta-

neously.

This reduces the number of members of the groups to 32. If a group

member is busy, they can receive off-hook ring if defined in MMC

300. This ring mode option is not available for UCD or VMAA groups.

The SGR INC BUSY option is not available for unconditional ring

mode.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-169

(continued)

No Option Description

2 OVERFLOW This is the timer value that will cause unanswered calls to a group to

begin also ringing the NEXT PORT(see below) after this timer has

elapsed. If set to 000, no overflow will take place.

3 GROUP

TRANSFER

This is a timer that will determine how long Trunk Line calls transferred

to the group will ring at the group before recalling. If set to 000, no recall

will take place.

4 NEXT PORT This is the station or group number that callers will also ring at if the OVER-

FLOW feature has been programmed. The OVERFLOW DESTINATION

can be defined as:

1 COMMON BELL There is a common bell port on each MIS card.

2 RING OVER PAGE The ROP port can be defined as the NEXT port.

3 STATION OR STATION GROUP. Any station or station group can be

defined as the NEXT port.

5 MEMBER List all members that are to be in the group. Up to 32 members for the

system are allowed in each group, but stations can be assigned to mul-

tiple station groups.

6 NEXT HUNT The length of time a call will ring at a station before it hunts to the next

group member.

7 GROUP BUSY When this option is set to ON, a busy signal will be sent to the caller if

all group members are busy. When this option is set to OFF, the ring

back tone is sent to the caller even if all group members are busy. UCD

is an exception to this rule. This option only works when MMC 210 SGR

INC BUSY is set to OFF. When MMC 210 SGR INC BUSY is set to ON,

all station groups will follow this setting.

9 ALLOUT NEXT If all members are log-out, the call would be send to next port.

10 RBT MSG If set ON, coloring service can be used by using svmi message.

Calls to a group

Calls to a group do not follow the call forwarding instructions of any station in the

group.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-170 Samsung Business Communications

CONDITIONS

y A station can be assigned to all station groups. A station group can accommodate up to

32 members.

y To enable off-hook ring for incoming calls to busy members, set OFFHOOK RING in

MMC 300, CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION, to ON. Even in this case, however,

the off-hook ring is enabled only when the RING MODE is UNCONDITIONAL.

DEFAULT DATA

NORMAL GROUP

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 601.

Display shows:

[501] STN.GROUP

TYPE:NORMAL GRP

2) Dial group number.(e.g., 505)

[505] STN.GROUP

TYPE:NORMAL GRP

Press Volume button to select group and

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial feature option number.(0-7, e.g., 0)

[505] STN GROUP

TYPE:VMAA GROUP

Press Volume button to scroll options and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) DIAL group type.(e.g., 1)

[505] STN GROUP

TYPE:VMAA GROUP

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Left Soft button to move cursor to TYPE.

5) Dial feature option number.(0-6, e.g., 1)

[505] STN GROUP

RING:DISTRIBUTE

Press Volume button to scroll options and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

6) Dial ring option.(0-2, e.g., 0)

[505] STN GROUP

RING:SEQUENTIAL

Press Volume button to make selection.

Press Left Soft button to move cursor

back to RING or press Right Soft button to

return to step 2.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-171

7) Dial next feature option and continue.

[505] STN GROUP

RING:SEQUENTIAL

Press Volume button to select option and

press Right Soft button.

Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

8) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE

MMC 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-172 Samsung Business Communications

[602] STATION GROUP NAME

Allows the system administrator or technician to enter a name up to 11 characters to iden-

tify an individual station group.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 602.

Display shows:

[

500] SGR NAME

2) Dial group number.(e.g., 505)

[505] SGR NAME

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Left or Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter name. [505] SGR NAME

TELECOMS

4) Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 104 STATION NAME

MMC 404 TRUNK NAME

MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-173

[603] ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP

Allows the assignment of trunks to a specific trunk group or to several trunk groups. This is

useful in the programming of LCR when more than one trunk is to be in several dialling

plans. There are two different modes of operation: (1) sequential and (2) distribute. There

are 30 programmable trunk groups with up to 60 members per group.

Trunk group

One trunk can appear in more than one trunk group. If necessary, delete the trunk

member from other groups to prevent accidental access.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL LOOP/ISDN TRUNKS: 9

ALL TIE TRUNKS: 801

ALL VOIP NETWORKING TRUNKS: 803

ALL VOIP H.323 TRUNKS: 804

ALL VOIP SIP TRUNKS: 805

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 603.

Display shows:

[9] TRK GROUP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

2) Enter valid trunk group.(e.g., 9)

[9] TRK GROUP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3) Press Right Soft button to change mode.

[9] TRK GROUP

MEMBER 01:NONE

Press Volume button to change mode to member.

4) Press Right Soft button to move cursor to number

of member and enter valid member number

[9] TRK GROUP

MEMBER 05:NONE

(e.g., 05) via dial keypad.

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-174 Samsung Business Communications

5) Enter valid trunk number.(e.g., 729)

[9] TRK GROUP

MEMBER 01:729

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to return to step 2.

6) Repeat steps 1-5 to remove trunk from group 9

if necessary.

7) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

LCR PROGRAMMING

MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE

MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE

MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE

MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

VoIP PROGRAMMING

MMC 832 VoIP ACCESS CODE

MMC 833 VoIP IP TABLE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-175

[604] ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE

Allows the technician to assign a phone to any of the five internal paging zones. Each page

zone can have up to 32 members. A phone may be assigned to more than one zone. Page

zone(*) will page all external page zones as well as all phones that are members of page

zone 0.

DEFAULT DATA

NO STATIONS ASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 604.

Display shows:

INT.PAGE ZONE(0)

MEMBER 01:NONE

2) Enter the page zone number.(0-4, e.g., 3)

INT.PAGE ZONE(3)

MEMBER 01:NONE

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter index number(e.g., 05) via dial keypad.

INT.PAGE ZONE(3)

MEMBER 05:NONE

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter station number(e.g., 205) via dial keypad.

INT.PAGE ZONE(3)

MEMBER 05:205

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-176 Samsung Business Communications

[605] ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE

Determines which relays will close when one of the four external page zones is accessed.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 605.

Display shows first page zone:

EXT. PAGE ZONE(5)

MEMBER 1 :NONE

2) Dial page zone number.(e.g., 6)

EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)

MEMBER 1 :NONE

Use Volume button to select desired page zone numbers

and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3) Dial member number.(e.g., 3)

EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)

MEMBER 3 :NONE

Use Volume button to select member numbers

and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Dial relay number via dial keypad.(e.g., 3751)

and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)

MEMBER 3 :3751

Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 above.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-177

[606] ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

Provides a means of adding or deleting speed dial blocks to the system or an individual

phone. With the ability to delete a block or blocks of speed dial, it will not be necessary to

waste these on such items as voice mail, DPIMs or stations that do not require the ability to

use speed dial. The Free List will show how many bins are left to be assigned.

A library of up to 200 speed dial numbers may be allocated as needed. The system list can

have up to 50 numbers(or 95 numbers if set in MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS) and each

station can have up to 5 numbers. Speed dial numbers are assigned in blocks of 10. Each

speed number may contain up to 24 digits.

DEFAULT DATA

SYSTEM: 200 ENTRIES

STATIONS: 1 BLOCK ASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 606.

Display shows:

FREE LIST:20

SYSTEM:20

2) Press Right Soft button to advance to next line.

FREE LIST:20

SYSTEM:20

You can view BUSY LIST using Volume button. BUSY LIST:180

SYSTEM:20

3) Make a selection of SYSTEM or EXT using Volume

button and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

FREE LIST:20

EXT201:1

4) Enter desired extension number via dial keypad.

(e.g., 205)

FREE LIST:20

EXT205:1

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance cursor.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-178 Samsung Business Communications

5) Enter valid number for bins.

(e.g., 0-5 for EXT or 00-50 for SYSTEM)

FREE LIST:20

EXT205:5

Press Volume button to make selection.

Press Hold button to delete bin(s).

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL

MMC 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

MMC 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-179

[607] UCD OPTIONS

Sets up UCD options when an AA card has been installed. MMC 601 must have already

been used to define a UCD group with an overflow destination of an AA port or group.

(A group is preferred over a port because a group allows multiple paths into the AA card

and therefore has greater traffic handling capabilities.) When the group overflow timer in

MMC 601 expires, the caller will be routed to the AA card. It is here that the caller is

played the UCD ‘FIRST MESSAGE’ and ‘SECOND MESSAGE’ while in queue. This will

continue until an agent becomes free or the caller is transferred to a final destination.

The following program options apply:

No Option Description

00 FIRST MESSAGE After the caller has overflowed from the UCD group, the first

message will immediately play.

This message will only be played once for the caller.

01 SECOND MESSAGE If no agent has become free after the UCD recall time(see UCD

Recall Time), the caller will be played the second message.

This message will be repeated for as long as the caller is in

queue, at an interval specified in the UCD Recall timer below.

02 EXIT CODE While the caller is hearing a message(but not during MOH),

the caller may dial the DTMF digit specified here and be trans-

ferred immediately to the final destination.(see Final Destination)

The exit code is optional and does not need to be used. If used,

the first and second messages may be modified to provide in-

structions on its use.

03 RETRY COUNT The UCD program is designed to route a caller to a ‘final destina-

tion’ after a programmable number of ‘loops’ through the UCD

message. The range of this counter is 0 to 99. 00 means that

there is no retry counter and the caller will remain in the UCD

queue until answered. Any non zero value will route a caller

through the UCD loop that many times before going to the final

destination. The UCD will route calls to the final destination im-

mediately if all members of the group are either out of group or in

DND.

Example: If this counter is set to 02, callers reaching a busy

group will hear the first UCD message, be placed on hold, hear

the second UCD message, be placed on hold, and finally hear

the second message again before being transferred to the final

destination.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-180 Samsung Business Communications

(continued)

No Option Description

04 FINAL DESTINATION This is the final destination for the caller if not answered by a

UCD agent.

This destination is only reached if(a) the caller dials an exit digit

during a message or(b) the retry count has expired. The final

destination can be a station number, a group number, a discon-

nect or another plan. Plans are entered by pressing button ‘A’

plus two digits 01-12. A disconnect is entered as a destination of

NONE.(Hold button)

If the final destination is a voice mail port, the port will receive a

FWD from UCD group integration message. The final destination

will forward or overflow.

If the forward to destination is a voice mail port the port will re-

ceive FWD from UCD group integration message. If the final des-

tination is not forwarded, the call will ring or camp on to the final

destination indefinitely.

To ensure that you do not get a situation where all the call but-

tons are busy on the final destination it is advisable to make the

final destination a group.(even if the group has only one station in

it.)

05 RING NEXT TIME This timer must be shorter than the overflow timer in MMC 601.

If a higher value is entered, the display will show invalid entry. In

the case where a UCD group has the ring next timer set at 000,

an unanswered call will rotate evenly among all agents until it is

answered. The UCD greetings will be heard during this routing

process, but can be removed by defining the UCD messages in

MMC 607 as unrecorded message numbers. This will simulate a

circular hunt group.

06 UCD RECALL TIME After a caller has heard a UCD announcement, they will be

placed on hold until an agent becomes available or the UCD re-

call timer expires. When the UCD recall timer expires, the caller

will again hear the UCD announcement. The range is

00-99. The default is 10.

07 MOH SOURCE This option determines what Music-On-Hold source callers will

be connected to between messages.

08 WRAP-UP TIME This option will make a UCD agent unavailable to receive addi-

tional UCD calls after hanging up from the last one. This is to

allow agents to complete work associated with the previous call

before the next call begins ringing. The range is 000-250. The

default is 010.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-181

(continued)

No Option Description

09 AUTO LOG OUT This YES/NO option determines if a station will automatically log

out of the UCD group when the RING NEXT timer expires.

This setting will be ignored if the RING NEXT timer is set to 000.

10 ALLOUTÆFINAL This YES/NO option determines if calls forward to the UCD final

destination when all stations are logged out of the UCD group.

If no UCD final destination is assigned then the call will discon-

nect.

11 AGENT PIN NO This YES/NO option determines if an agent is required to enter

an Agent ID when logging on to this group. The Agent ID can be

entered in MMC 717.

12 GROUP BUSY NEXT This YES/NO option determines if all agents are busy, specifies

whether the next port is called immediately during overflow time.

DEFAULT DATA

FIRST MSG: 61

SECOND MSG: 62

EXIT CODE: NONE

RETRY COUNT: 03

FINAL DEST: 500

RING NEXT: 30 SEC

UCD RECALL: 10 SEC

MOH SOURCE: NONE

WRAP-UP: 10 SEC

AUTO LOG OUT: ON

ALL OUT TO FINAL: OFF

AGENT PIN NO: OFF

GROUP BUSY NEXT: OFF

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-182 Samsung Business Communications

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 607.

Display shows:

[530] UCD OPTION

FIRST MSG :61

2) Press Volume button to select UCD group or dial

group number.

[542] UCD OPTION

FIRST MSG :61

Press Left Soft button to position cursor under

message number and enter new message.

[530] UCD OPTION

FIRST MSG :25

Press Right Soft button and advance to next option

using the Volume buttons to select an option.

[530] UCD GROUP

UCD RECALL:10 SEC

3) Press Right Soft button and advance to next option.

Use the Volume buttons to make a selection.

[530] UCD OPTION

UCD RECALL:10 SEC

Make a selection using the dial keypad.

4) Press Left Soft button to enter the selection and

to return to step 1.

[530] UCD OPTION

EXIT CODE :NONE

Press Right Soft button to return to step 3.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-183

[608] ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK

Provides a means of adding or deleting CID review blocks to an individual phone. With the

ability to delete a block or blocks of CID review, it will not be necessary to waste these on

items such as voice mail and DPIMs or phones that do not have displays. The free list will

show how many bins are left to be assigned. The system has 1000 total bins. Each phone

may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins.

DEFAULT DATA

PHONES: 10 BINS

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 608.

Display shows first station:

[201] REVIEW BLK

10:0060 FREE

2) Enter desired EXT number.(e.g., 205)

[205] REVW BLOCK

10:0060 FREE

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3) Enter valid number for bins.(e.g., 50)

[205] REVW BLOCK

50:0010 FREE

Press Volume button to make selection.

Press Hold button to delete bin(s).

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY

MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID

MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-184 Samsung Business Communications

[609] CALL LOG BLOCK

Provides a means of adding or deleting Call Log blocks for an individual phone. With the

ability to delete blocks it will not be necessary to waste these on items such as voice mail

and DPIMs or phones that do not have displays. The free list will show how many bins are

left to be assigned. The system has 1000 total bins. Each phone may be assigned a maxi-

mum of 50 bins.

DEFAULT DATA

PHONES: 10 BINS

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 609.

Display shows first station:

[201] LOG BLOCK

10:0070 FREE

2) Enter desired EXT number.(e.g., 205)

[205] LOG BLOCK

10:0070 FREE

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3) Enter valid number for bins.(e.g., 50)

[205] LOG BLOCK

50:0030 FREE

Press Volume button to make selection.

Press Hold button to delete bin(s).

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-185

[611] ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING

This program allows stations to send text messages to other stations if they are busy or dur-

ing an OHVA. Up to 20 stations can be allowed text messaging.

DEFAULT DATA

y NOT USED(no text messaging allowed)

y ITP-5012L(Large LCD) keysets are automatically set to USED(text messaging al-

lowed)

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 611.

Display shows:

[201] TMSG STN

NOT USED:100 FREE

2) Enter the number of a station.

[202] TMSG STN

NOT USED:100 FREE

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3) Specify whether text messaging will be used or not. [202] TMSG STN

USED

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 117 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-186 Samsung Business Communications

[612] ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE

This program allows a station to use the Group Conference call feature. Up to 20 stations

can be allowed this feature. Each allowed station can have up to five pre-programmed con-

ference groups.

CONDITIONS

This feature is only for Large LCD phones.(e.g., ITP-5012L, DS-5012L, WIP-5000M)

DEFAULT DATA

Large LCD phones are automatically set to allow this feature.(USED)

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 612.

Display shows:

[201] CONF STN

NOT USED:100 FREE

2) Enter the number of a station.

[202] CONF STN

NOT USED :100 FREE

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3) Specify whether Group Conference feature can be

used or not.

[205] CONF STN

USED

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 118 CONFERENCE GROUP

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-187

[614] STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

This program allows you to assign stations to station use groups and trunks to trunk use

groups. This is useful if you want to restrict calling between stations, outgoing calls

through a trunk lines, or call answering.

CONDITIONS

Station use groups are numbered from 001 to 100, and trunk use groups from 101 to 200.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL STATIONS: 001

ALL TRUNKS: NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 614.

Display shows first station:

STATION GROUP

201 :001

2) Enter 0 if you want to set a station group.

Enter 1 if user want to set a trunk group.

TRUNK GROUP

701 :101

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3) Enter number of station/trunk.

TRUNK GROUP

702 : 101

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

4) Enter the number of the use group.

TRUNK GROUP

702 : 101

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE

MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE

MMC 428 ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-188 Samsung Business Communications

[615] MGI GROUP

This program assigns designated MGI ports to specific services. This allows ‘grading’ of

MGI card(s) for traffic conditions. The MGI ports can be segregated into groups. Any en-

tries made here may be ineffective if conflicting entries exist in MMC 616.

No Type Description

0 LOCAL ITP This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones across a

private IP network.

1 PUB IP ITP This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones on a pub-

lic IP network.

2 VOIP NTWK This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary

Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7100 systems across a

private IP network.

3 PUB IP NTWK This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary

Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7100 systems on a pub-

lic IP network.

4 VOIP TRUNK This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard

H.323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications across a private network

5 PUB IP TRK This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard

H.323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications on a public network.

6 MGI3 NEEDED This determines what MGI ports can be used for T.38 facsimile commu-

nications across a private network.

7 PUB IP MGI3 This determines what MGI ports can be used for T.38 facsimile commu-

nications on a public network.

8 ITP PAGED This determines what MGI ports can be used with station page to ITP

phones across a private IP network.

The MGI ports have two selection modes: Sequential or Distributed. The members for each

selection are the actual ports on the MGI card(s).

DEFAULT DATA

LOCAL ITP: MGI1, MGI2, MGI3

PUB IP ITP: MGI2, MGI3

VOIP NTWK: MGI2, MGI3

PUB IP NTWK: MGI2, MGI3

VOIP TRUNK: MGI2, MGI3

PUB IP TRK: MGI2, MGI3

MGI3 NEEDED: MGI3

PUB IP MGI3: MGI3

ITP PAGED: MGI1, MGI2, MGI3

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-189

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 615.

Display shows the first available option:

USER: LOCAL ITP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

2) Press Volume button to select an user type.

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

USER: LOCAL ITP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

3) Press Volume button to select an option and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

USER: LOCAL ITP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

4) Press Volume button to select and press Right

Soft button to store data and return to step 1.

USER: LOCAL ITP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-190 Samsung Business Communications

[616] MGI USER

This program selects which specific MGI ports will be dedicated on a per-port basis for IP

station/trunk devices. If this MMC is not used, allocation of MGI ports will be controlled

by MMC 615. By defining dedicated MGI port usage, the IP station/trunk selected will al-

ways use the port programmed. MGI ports can be assigned for digital stations

(2XX~2XXX), private and public ITP stations(32XX), VoIP Networking trunks(83XX),

H.323 trunks(84XX), SIP trunks(85XX) and MGI3 facsimile. Only one assignment per

MGI port is permitted. Any entries made here will override entries made in MMC 615.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 616.

Display shows the first available option:

[3801] MGI USER

NONE

2) Enter MGI dial number.

[3801] MGI USER

NONE

Press Volume button to select an MGI port and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter MGI user dial number.

[3801] MGI USER

NONE

Press Volume button to select an MGI user and

press Right Soft button to store and move cursor.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-191

[700] COPY COS CONTENTS

This MMC allows the technician to duplicate classes of service.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS

‘F’ KEY Used to advance to MMC 701

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 700.

Display shows:

COPY COS ITEMS

COS01ÆCOS01

2) Dial selected COS to copy.(e.g., 05)

COPY COS ITEMS

COS05ÆCOS01

Press Volume button to select COS and press.

Right Soft button to move cursor and advance

to next step.

3) Dial target COS.(e.g., 06)

COPY COS ITEMS

COS05ÆCOS06

Press Volume button to select COS and press

Right Soft button to move cursor back to step 2.

4) Press F key to advance MMC 701 and press

Right Soft to advance cursor.

COS CONTENTS(06)

TOLL LEVEL:A

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-192 Samsung Business Communications

[701] ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

Similar to MMC 700 but does not allow a copy command. This MMC is primarily used for

creating a new class of service(COS). If the unsupervised conference feature is allowed, a

programmed CONF key must be available to allow re-entry into a conference call.

There are 30 classes of service available.

This MMC is divided into 5 categories.

No Category Description

TOLL LEVEL 0 TOLL LEVEL

A Follow toll class A(Unrestricted)

B Follow toll class B in MMC 702, 703

C Follow toll class C in MMC 702, 703

D Follow toll class D in MMC 702, 703

E Follow toll class E in MMC 702, 703

F Follow toll class F in MMC 702, 703

G Follow toll class G in MMC 702, 703

H Follow toll class H(All restricted)

1 USABLE FEATURE No COS Default Description

00 AA CALER YES Auto answer control by caller

01 ABSENCE YES Absence

02 ALM CLR YES Alarm Clear

03 AUTO RDL YES Retry on busy

04 CALLBACK YES Callback

05 CLIP ABN YES Caller ID Abandon

06 CLIP INQ YES Caller ID Inquire

07 CLIP INV YES Caller ID Investigate

08 CONFER. YES Conference

09 DALM CLR YES DISA alarm ring clear

10 DIRECT. YES Directory dial

11 DISA YES Allow DISA use

12 DND YES Do Not Disturb

13 DND FWRD YES Forward Do Not Disturb

14 DND OVRD NO Do Not Disturb Override

15 DOOR YES Door ring answer

16 DSS YES Direct station select

17 DTS YES Direct trunk select

18 EXT AREC NO Intercom call automatic record

(SVM-800)

19 EXT FWD YES External call forward

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-193

(continued)

No Category Description

1 USABLE FEATURE No COS Default Description

20 FEATURE YES Transfer button

21 FLASH YES Trunk flash

22 FOLLOW-ME YES Call forward-follow me

23 FORWARD YES Call forwarding

24 FWDTOVMS YES Call forward to SVM-800

25 GRP I/O YES Group in/out

26 HOLD YES Hold

27 HOTLINE YES Hot line and Off-hook selec-

tion

28 INTERCOM YES Intercom call

30 MESSAGE YES Message

31 MM PAGE YES Meet me page

32 NEW CALL YES New call

33 OHVAED YES Receive Off-hook voice an-

nouncement

34 OHVAING YES Make Off-hook voice an-

nouncement

35 ONEA2 YES 1A2 emulation

36 OPERATOR YES Call to Operator

37 OUT TRSF YES Outgoing transfer

38 OVERRIDE NO Barge-In

39 PAGE 0 YES Page zone 0 Paging

40 PAGE 1 YES Page zone 1 Paging

41 PAGE 2 YES Page zone 2 Paging

42 PAGE 3 YES Page zone 3 Paging

43 PAGE 4 YES Page zone 4 Paging

44 PAGE 5 YES Page zone 5 Paging

45 PAGE 6 YES Page zone 6 Paging

46 PAGE 7 YES Page zone 7 Paging

47 PAGE 8 YES Page zone 8 Paging

48 PAGE 9 YES Page zone 9 Paging

49 PAGE * YES Page zone * Paging

51 PICKUP YES Call pickup

52 PRB YES Privacy Release and Bridge

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-194 Samsung Business Communications

(continued)

No Category Description

1 USABLE FEATURE No COS Default Description

53 REM. HOLD YES Remote Hold

54 RNG PLAN YES Ring Mode Change

55 SECURE YES Barge-In secure

56 SET RLOC NO Set Relocation

57 SSPD TOL YES System Speed dial toll check

58 STN LOCK YES Station Lock

59 SYS SPD YES System Speed dial

60 TRK AREC NO Trunk call automatic record

(SVM-800)

61 TRK EHLD YES Trunk call exclusive hold

62 UNCO CNF YES Unsupervised Conference

63 VM AREC NO Auto Record(SVMi)

64 VM AME NO Answer Machine Emulation

(SVMi)

65 VM REC NO Call Record(SVMi)

66 VMS PSWD NO VMS password(SVM-800)

67 VMS REC NO VMS Call Record(SVM-800)

2 CALL STATION

GROUP

STN GROUP 01-80 YES Station group 01~80 calling

3 CALL TRUNK

GROUP

TRK GROUP 01-30 YES Trunk group 01~30 calling

4 CALL TO

BIVMS STN(SVMi).

BIVMS STN 01-16 YES SVMi port 01~16 calling

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-195

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 701.

Display shows:

COS CONTENTS(01)

TOLL LEVEL:A

2) Dial COS.(e.g., 06)

COS CONTENTS(06)

TOLL LEVEL:A

Press Volume button to select COS number and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial COS contents categories.

(e.g., 1 for Usable Features)

COS CONTENTS(06)

00:AA CALER :YES

Press Volume button to select COS categories and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Dial COS usable feature option.(e.g., 12)

COS CONTENTS(06)

12:DND :YES

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

5) Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES.

COS CONTENTS(06)

12:DND :NO

Press Volume button to select option and

press Right Soft button to return to step 4.

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 700 COPY COS CONTENTS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-196 Samsung Business Communications

[702] TOLL DENY TABLE

Provides a way to make toll restriction(call barring) very easy and flexible. There are 500

entries allowed in the deny table and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service.

Each index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards(MMC 704, Assign Wild

Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction. Wild cards can be used repeat-

edly in the dial string, limited only to what is allowed or denied in MMC 704.

Six toll levels, B to G, are programmable. Toll level A is set as ‘unrestricted’ by default and

toll level H is set as ‘in-house only’ by default.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0

PROGRAM BUTTONS

A Used to enter wild card X

B Used to enter wild card Y

C Used to enter wild card Z

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 702.

Display shows:

DENY(001):BCDEFG

:000000

2) Dial index number.(e.g., 005)

DENY(005):BCDEFG

:000000

Press Volume button to select index and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter toll pattern via dial keypad.(e.g., 212)

DENY(005):BCDEFG

212 :000000

Enter wild card(e.g., 21X) and press Right Soft but-

ton to move cursor to COS options.

DENY(005):BCDEFG

21X :000000

4) Press Volume button to move cursor along line until

under toll class mark.(e.g., E).

DENY(001):BCDEFG

212 :000100

Enter a 1 for ‘Yes’ or 0 for ‘No’.

Press Right Soft button to store and return to step 1.

Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-197

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

[703] TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

Provides a way to make toll restriction very easy and flexible. There are 500 allowable en-

tries in the allow table for an OfficeServ 7100-main system and each entry index can be as-

signed to a class of service. Each index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild

cards(MMC 704, Assign Wild Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction.

Six toll levels, B to G, are programmable. Toll level A is set as ‘unrestricted’ by default, and

toll level H is set as ‘in-house only’ by default.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0

PROGRAM BUTTONS

A Used to enter wild card X

B Used to enter wild card Y

C Used to enter wild card Z

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 702.

Display shows:

ALOW(001):BCDEFG

:000000

2) Dial index number.(e.g., 005)

ALOW(005):BCDEFG

:000000

Press Volume button to select index and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter toll pattern via dial pad.(e.g., 202)

ALOW(005):BCDEFG

202 :000000

Enter wild card(e.g., 20X) and press Right Soft but-

ton to move cursor to COS options.

ALOW(005):BCDEFG

20X :000000

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-198 Samsung Business Communications

4) Press Volume button to move cursor along line

until under toll class mark.(e.g., E).

ALOW(001):BCDEFG

202 :000100

Enter a 1 for ‘Yes’ or 0 for ‘No’.

Press Right Soft button to store and return to step 1.

Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE

MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-199

[704] ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

Provides flexibility to toll restriction(call barring) when a specific numbering plan is de-

sired. There are only three entry tables but more than one digit can be assigned per table if

needed.

DEFAULT DATA

X ENTRIES SET TO 1

Y AND Z ENTRIES SET TO 0

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 704.

Display shows:

:0123456789*#

X:111111111111

2) Press Volume button to select X, Y, or Z(e.g., Z)

and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to

:0123456789*#

Z:000000000000

option line.

3) Press Volume button to move cursor to option

digit desired(e.g., 5) and enter 1.(put under other

:0123456789*#

Z:000001000000

digits as required)

Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

Press Right Soft button to return to step 1.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE

MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-200 Samsung Business Communications

[705] ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

Enables the assignment of system speed dialling numbers. There are up to 450 entries

available for programming.(or 950 entries if set in MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS) Each

speed dial number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator

and up to 24 digits to be dialled. These dialled digits may consist of 0-9, and #. If the sys-

tem recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access number, it will automatically insert the

separator.

NOTE: If 500 entries are allowed, the bin numbers are 500-945; if 950 entries are allowed,

the bin numbers are 050-999.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS

B Used to insert a flash code ‘F’

C Used to insert a pause code ‘P’

D Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’.

E Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘[’ or ‘]’

F Used to enter name for speed dial bin(see MMC 706)

ANS/RLS Used to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation

table(MMC 728)

ACTION DISPLAY

Press Transfer button and enter 705.

Display shows:

SYS SPEED DIAL

500:

2) Dial speed index desired.(e.g., 505)

SYS SPEED DIAL

505:

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter access code(e.g., 9) plus the phone

number up to 24 digits(digits will scroll under)

SYS SPEED DIAL

505:9–121223456789

and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press F key to toggle to MMC 706 step 3 to enter

name.

SYS SPEED NAME

505:

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-201

5) If you want to save the speed dial number and name

to the CID translation table.(MMC 728)

SYS SPEED DIAL

ADD CLI XLT ?NO

Press the ANS/RLS button and dial 1 for YES.

(The speed dial name must exist)

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

[706] SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered for each system speed dial location.

This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using the directory dial fea-

ture.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NO NAMES

PROGRAM BUTTONS

ANS/RLS Used to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation

table(MMC 728).

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 706.

Display shows:

SYS SPEED NAME

500:

2) Dial system speed entry number.(e.g., 505)

SYS SPEED NAME

505:

Press Volume button to select entry number and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-202 Samsung Business Communications

3) Enter name using dial keypad and press Right Soft

button to return to step 2.

SYS SPEED NAME

505:TELECOMS

Press the F key to return to MMC 705, step 3. SYS SPEED DIAL

505:

4) If you want to save the speed dial number and name

data to the CLI translation table.(MMC 728)

SYS SPEED NAME

ADD CLI XLT ?NO

Press ANS/RLS button and dial 1 for YES.

(The speed dial number must exist)

5) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.

Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

MMC 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-203

[707] AUTHORIZATION CODE

Enables the authorization feature on a per-class of service selection. There are 500 avail-

able entries. Authorization codes must be 4-10 digits long.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 707.

Display shows:

AUTHOR.CODE(001)

C:01

2) Dial code index number.(e.g., 005)

AUTHOR.CODE(005)

C:01

Press Volume button to selected index number and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter authorization code(minimum of four digits and

a maximum of 10 digits) via dial keypad

AUTHOR.CODE(005)

1234567890 C:01

(e.g., 1234567890) and press Right Soft button to

move cursor.

4) Enter class of service number 01-30.(e.g., 05)

AUTHOR.CODE(005)

1234567890 C:05

Press Volume button to select COS and press Right

Soft button to select and return to step 2.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE

MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-204 Samsung Business Communications

[708] ACCOUNT CODE

Enables the account code entry feature. There are 999 available entries.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 708.

Display shows:

ACCOUNT CODE

001:

2) Dial code index number.(e.g., 005)

ACCOUNT CODE

005:

Press Volume button to selected index number

and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter account code(maximum 12 digits) via

dial keypad(e.g., 1234) and press Right Soft button

ACCOUNT CODE

005:1234

to move cursor back to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-205

[709] TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE

This MMC provides a means to program trunk code tables as described below.

No Special Code Description

0 PBX CODE This table contains up to five entries and is used to identify the

trunk access codes needed for toll restriction when the system

is used with either a PBX or a CENTREX-supplied dial tone. Toll

restriction will only be applied on trunks flagged as PBX in MMC

401 if a trunk access code entered in this table is dialled. Toll

restriction will be applied to the digits following the trunk access

code.

1 SPECIAL CODE This table identifies the special feature codes used to activate

central office custom-calling features such as CID Block and

Call Waiting Disable. The special feature codes can be used on

a per-call basis without affecting LCR or toll restriction pro-

gramming. There is a maximum of 10 entries available, each of

which may be up to four digits long.

2 TOLL OVERRIDE This table of eight entries is used to identify the numbers that

will bypass all dialling restrictions. This bypass includes toll re-

striction, trunk access and forced authorization or account

codes. Each entry in the table can be up to 14 digits long.

3 OVRD USE TRK GRP This entry designates the trunk group that toll override calls will

access.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 709.

Display shows:

PBX ACCESS CODE

2) Select PBX, SPECIAL CODE, TOLL OVERRIDE

or OVRD USE TRK GRP.

TOLL OVERRIDE

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter index number.(e.g., 3)

TOLL OVERRIDE

3:_

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-206 Samsung Business Communications

4) Enter via dial keypad the desired access/feature

code.(e.g., 911)

TOLL OVERRIDE

3:911

Press Right Soft button to enter and return

to step 3 and enter more entries.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 401 TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE

MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE

TOLL RESTRICTION

MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE

MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-207

[710] LCR DIGIT TABLE

The LCR DIGIT TABLE contains all numerical digits for the completion of outgoing call

placement. This table works in conjunction with LCR ROUTE TABLE, LCR TIME TA-

BLE and LCR MODIFY DIGITS TABLE. There is a maximum 2000 entries with a digit

string length of 10 numerical digits. This system automatically maintains entered digit

strings in numerical order. The characters * and # are also accepted for use with feature

codes.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 710.

Display shows:

LCR DIGIT (0001)

DIGIT:

2) Dial LCR entry.(e.g., 0005)

LCR DIGIT (0005)

DIGIT:_

Press Volume button to select entry and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter LCR digit string via the dial keypad and

press Right Soft button.

LCR DIGIT (0005)

DIGIT:305426

Press Left Soft button to return to step 1.

4) Enter digit length.(max. 31)

Cursor will move to RT.(route selection)

LCR DIGIT (0005)

LENGTH:10 RT:01

5) Enter RT(01-32)

Valid entry will return you to step 1.

LCR DIGIT (0005)

LENGTH:10 RT:01

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-208 Samsung Business Communications

[711] LCR TIME TABLE

This table, through the LCR ROUTES, allows calls placed at any given time of day to use

the least cost trunk route that is available. When LCR ROUTE ADVANCE is allowed, it is

possible for calls to be placed on more expensive trunks on any given time of day. There

are four possible time entries per day; the start time of the next time period is the end time

of the previous time period.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 711.

Display shows:

LCR TIME (SUN:A)

HHMM: LCRT:-

2) Dial day of week.(SUN-SAT, e.g., WED)

LCR TIME (WED:A)

HHMM: LCRT:-

Press Volume button to make day selection and

press Right Soft button.

3) Dial time band.(A-D, e.g., B)

LCR TIME (WED:B)

HHMM: LCRT:-

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button.

4) Dial time via keypad.(24-hour format, e.g., 0800)

Cursor moves to LCRT.(see MMC 712)

LCR TIME (WED:B)

HHMM:0800 LCRT:-

5) Dial time table number.(1-4)

LCR TIME (WED:B)

HHMM:0800 LCRT:1

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button.

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE

MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE

MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-209

[712] LCR ROUTE TABLE

The LCR ROUTE TABLE is responsible for selecting a specific trunk group in the comple-

tion of an outward bound call. This table works in conjunction with LCR DIGIT TABLE,

LCR TIME TABLE, LCR COS TABLE and LCR MODIFIED DIGITS TABLE. After you

dial a valid digit string, the system uses the LCR ROUTE TABLE to select a specific pre-

determined trunk group. There is a maximum of 99 routes available.

If more than one trunk group is available for call completion, the system uses the first des-

ignated trunk group and then the succeeding trunk groups. If all trunk groups are busy in a

selected route, call queue becomes active and allocates trunks as they become available.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 712.

Display shows:

LCR ROUTE (01:1)

C:1 G:NONE M:---

2) Dial LCR ROUTE table number.(e.g., 05)

LCR ROUTE (05:1)

C:1 G:NONE M:---

Press Volume button to selected table and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial TIME BAND index number 1-4.(e.g., 2)

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

C:1 G:NONE M:---

Press Volume button to selected index and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Dial LCR COS number 1-8.(e.g., 4)

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

C:4 G:NONE M:---

Press Volume button to selected COS and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

5) Dial TRUNK GROUP access code.(e.g., 801)

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

C:4 G:801 M:---

Press Volume button to selected access code and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-210 Samsung Business Communications

6) Dial MODIFY DIGITS index number.(e.g., 050)

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

C:4 G:801 M:050

Press Volume button to selected index number and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Press Right Soft button to skip step and move

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

C:4 G:801 M:---

cursor to step 2.

7) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE

MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE

MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-211

[713] LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

This program is sometimes referred to as Outgoing Dial Rules. It enables the system to add

or delete a digit string or singular digit if needed to complete a call. With these digits in-

serted, a long distance call will be placed over a local line using the common carrier net-

work. The characters * and # can also be entered. There are 200 modify digit entries avail-

able.

Option Description Max. No. of Digit Entries

NOF DEL DGT Number of digits to delete 15

I Insert(before dialling string) 14

A Append(after dialling string) 14

DIGIT STRING KEY

Insert String + Digit String(delete) + Append String

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 713.

Display shows:

LCR MODIFY (001)

NOF DEL DGT:00

2) Enter index number.(e.g., 005)

LCR MODIFY (005)

NOF DEL DGT:00

Press Volume buttons to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter number of digits to delete.

LCR MODIFY (005)

NOF DEL DGT:01

Press Right Soft button to skip step and move

cursor to next step.

4) Enter digits to be inserted.(e.g., 10288)

LCR MODIFY (005)

I:10288_

Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store

information and advance to next step.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-212 Samsung Business Communications

5) Enter digits to be appended.(e.g., 45678)

LCR MODIFY (005)

A:_

Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store infor-

mation and return to step 2.

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE

MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE

MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-213

[714] DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

Assigns an incoming DID call to a specific ring plan destination. It also provides a call

waiting option, if needed, so that a second incoming DID call can be received. The table is

also used to define which MOH source a caller to that DID number will hear when placed

on hold. A name up to 11 characters can be added to the number. There is a maximum of

999 entries. If there is no matching number on DID service, the call is routed to the opera-

tor group.

Option Description

DGT Digits to be received from Trunk line.(up to 16 digits may be entered)

MOH SOURCE Allows the technician to select what the calling party will hear if the call is

placed on hold. There are four possible music selections.

PRI DID priority option. There are nine priority levels: priority 1 is the highest

and priority 9 is the lowest. When calls come into a station group and all

group members are busy, the system will assign a priority to the DDI

numbers so that calls from a high-priority DDI number will be placed at the

front of the group queue. If this option is set to NO, the call held longest in

the group queue has the highest priority.

RING PLAN

1: XXX, 2: XXX,

3: XXX, 4: XXX,

5: XXX, 6: XXX

Ring plan and destination during each ring plan. The destination can be a

station, station group, trunk or trunk group. If a trunk or trunk group is se-

lected the trunks must be programmed as E & M trunks to allow the re-

ceived digits to be re-sent. This is referred to as DID Repeat digits over tie

line. Entering the character ‘B’ means to repeat the received digits.

CW Call Waiting Yes/No.(Allows a second DID call to be received.)

MC The maximum call count. When this is set to 99, the feature will not work. When

set to 0, if a call comes in that matches DID digits and DGT field then the sys-

tem will reject the call. When set between 1 and 98, if a call comes in that

matches DID digits and DGT field then the system counts the same DID digits,

and if the count is the same or higher than this value, the system sends busy

signal to caller.

DC The number of digits to delete. This is useful with Tandem switching,

mixed numbering plans and DID Repeat digits over tie line. Maximum

number of digits that can be deleted is 16.

NAME Enter up to 11 characters to identify call. Refer to MMC 104, STATION

NAME, for how to enter the name.

TONE Assigns ring tone to DLI port.

CADENCE Assigns ring cadence to SLT port.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-214 Samsung Business Communications

DEFAULT DATA

INDEX DIGIT MOH PRI 1-6 CW MC DC NAME

001 2*** NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE

002 3*** NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE

003 5*** NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE

004 8*** NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 714.

Display shows:

DID DIGIT (001)

DGT:

2) Enter valid index number(e.g., 005) via dial keypad.

DID DIGIT (005)

DGT:

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter digits to be translated(e.g., 5065) via dial key-

pad and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

DID DIGIT (005)

DGT:5065

4) Enter the MOH source for this entry.

DID DIGIT (005)

MOH:NONE PRI:NO

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button to return to step 3 above.

5) Enter priority level via dial keypad.

(1-9 or NO)

DID DIGIT (005)

MOH:NONE PRI:NO

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft buttons to advance to next step.

6) Enter station or group number for each Ring Plan

destination via dial keypad.(e.g., 530)

DID DIGIT (005)

1:530 2:

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance to next step.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-215

7) Enter call wait option via dial keypad.

(1 for YES, 0 for NO)

DID DIGIT (005)

CW:N MC:99 DC:0

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance to next step.

8) Enter maximum call count via dial keypad.(00-99)

DID DIGIT (005)

CW:N MC:99 DC:0

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance to next step.

9) Enter number or delete digit via dial keypad.(0-16)

DID DIGIT (005)

CW:N MC:99 DC:0

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to advance to next step.

10) Enter the name via dial keypad and press Right

Soft button to return to Step 1.

DID DIGIT (005)

NAME:

11) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-216 Samsung Business Communications

[715] PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

Allows custom messages to be programmed or default messages to be changed.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

There are 15 messages in the system:

MESSAGES 01-10 are 16-character pre-programmed default messages. Any of them can

be changed. MESSAGES 11-15 are 16-character blank messages that can be created.

DEFAULT DATA

TEN PROGRAMMED MESSAGES:

01. IN A MEETING 06. OUT OF TOWN

02. OUT ON A CALL 07. IN TOMORROW

03. OUT TO LUNCH 08. RETURN AFTERNOON

04. LEAVE A MESSAGE 09. ON VACATION

05. PAGE ME 10. GONE HOME

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 715.

Display shows:

PGM.MESSAGE (01)

IN A MEETING

2) Enter message number.(e.g., 11)

PGM.MESSAGE (11)

Blank Message

Press Volume button arrow to make selection.

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter message via dial keypad.(maximum 16

characters)

PGM.MESSAGE (11)

IN MEETING ROOM

Use ‘A’ button to toggle upper case/lower case.

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-217

[716] UK LCR OPTION

This MMC provides UK LCR options.

No Option Description

0 NETWORK CODE This table is used to network access code when the call is routed to

the secondary network. This table contains up to 16 entries. Each

code has 4 digits maximum in length and use option for None, CCC, PIN

or Both.(Default: all codes are empty and all use options are none)

0 NONE: This code doesn’t use.

1 CCC: This code uses with Call Cast Code(CCC).

2 PIN: This code uses with PIN Code.

3 BOTH: This code uses with PIN code and Call Cast Code.

1 PIN CODE This table is used to PIN code when the call is routed to the secondary

network. This table contains up to 4 entries and each code has 10

digits maximum in length.(Default: all tables are empty)

2 CCC OPTION This is used to which number used for Call Cost Code.

(Default: Station Number)

0 STATION NUMBER: Station number uses for Call Cost Code.

1 NONE: Doesn’t use Call Cost Code.

3 STATION PIN NO. This is assigned to PIN code table number for each station num-

ber.(Default: all stations are 1)

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 716.

Display shows:

NETWORK CODE

01: USE:NONE

2) Enter option number 0-3.

NETWORK CODE

01: USE:NONE

Press Volume buttons to select number

and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter number 0-16.

NETWORK CODE

02:_ USE:NONE

Press Volume buttons to select number

and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter network access code via dial keypad. NETWORK CODE

02:1234 USE:NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-218 Samsung Business Communications

5) Enter use option number.(0-3)

NETWORK CODE

02:1234 USE:CCC

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 400 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE

MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE

MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE

MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-219

[717] UCD AGENT ID

This MMC defines UCD agent ID numbers or PIN numbers. These numbers are used to log

UCD agents into the UCD groups. There are 100 available entries and each entry is tied to

a specific UCD group. Agent ID codes can be up to 4 digits long.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 717.

Display shows:

AGENT PIN (001)

ID: GRP:NONE

2) Dial code entry number.(e.g., 005)

AGENT PIN (005)

ID:_ GRP:NONE

Press Volume buttons to select number

and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter ID code via dial keypad(e.g., 1234) and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

AGENT PIN (005)

ID:1234 GRP:NONE

4) Enter group number.(e.g., 505)

AGENT PIN (005)

ID:1234 GRP:505

Press Volume button to select group and

press Right Soft button to select and return to step 2.

Select all groups.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-220 Samsung Business Communications

[718] MY AREA CODE

This MMC defines the home area code and country code. This information is used for

caller ID and ISDN calls in defining the area code on incoming calls. This MMC removes

the local area code to allow callback without digit modifications in LCR.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 718.

Display shows:

MY AREA CODE

AREA :

2) Enter 0 for COUNTRY or 1 for AREA.

MY AREA CODE

AREA :

Press Volume buttons to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter area code(maximum 4 digits) via dial keypad

(e.g., 2) and press Right Soft button to move

MY AREA CODE

AREA :2

cursor back to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-221

[719] IDLE DISPLAY

This program allows you to enter guidance data to be displayed on large LCD phones.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 719.

Display shows:

IDLE DISPLAY (01)

2) Enter the number of the line on a large LCD phone

(01~12) on which guidance data is to be displayed.

IDLE DISPLAY (02)

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter guidance data via dial keypad and press

Right Soft button to save and move to step 2.

IDLE DISPLAY (02)

WELCOME TO ABC

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 120 LARGE LCD OPTIONS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-222 Samsung Business Communications

[720] COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

Provides a tool for duplicating key assignments from one phone to another. This can be

done on a per-station basis or on all stations, but not on a group of stations. A limitation is

that the original and target phones must be of the same type.(the same number of buttons)

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 720.

Display shows:

[201] COPY KEY

FROM:NONE

2) Enter the station number to copy to.(e.g., 205)

[205] COPY KEY

FROM:NONE

Press Volume buttons to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all stations.

3) Enter station number to copy from.(e.g., 203)

and cursor returns to step 2.

[205] COPY KEY

FROM:203

Press Volume buttons to make selection and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER

MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-223

[721] SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

Provides a service tool which minimizes the accidental loss of programmable buttons on

phones. First the data is saved and then the station can be replaced with another station type

or the keys can be reprogrammed to other features. Once testing or replacement is com-

pleted, the data can be restored to the individual station, providing the same type is in place.

CONDITIONS

This program must be used carefully because key programming data is saved to a common

programming database. When a new phone is connected, the system copies data from this

database to the new phone.

DEFAULT DATA

RESTORE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 721.

Display shows:

[201] SAVE KEY

RESTORE

2) Enter desired station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] SAVE KEY

RESTORE

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

3) Press Volume button to make function selection

and press Right Soft button to enter and return to

[205] SAVE KEY

SAVE

step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER

MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-224 Samsung Business Communications

[722] STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

Allows the customizing of programmable buttons on specific phones and add-on modules

(AOMs). For phones, buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by default. For AOMs, all

buttons are set as DS keys by default. Features are selected by pressing the dial keypad but-

tons the required number of times. For example, for OHVA, the number 6 is pressed three

times. If the BOSS key is required, 2 is pressed for the first letter B and then the Volume

button used to change the selection from BARGE to BOSS.

DIAL KEYPAD

COUNT 1 2 3 4

DIAL 2 AB BARGE CAD

DIAL 3 DGPALM EP FAUTO

DIAL 4 GPIK HDSET ICONF

DIAL 5 LANREQ LANREQ LANREQ

DIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVA

DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB SETDND

DIAL 8 TG UA VG

DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP

Programmable Button Assignments

Feature Description Feature Description

AB ABSENCE MMPG MEET ME PAGE

ABAND ABANDONED CALL MS MANUAL

SIGNALLING

ABW AGENT BUSY/WRAP UP MSG MESSAGE

ACC ACCOUNT MUTE MUTE

MW MESSAGE WAIT

AN/RLS ANSWER/RELEASE NEW NEW CALL

BARGE BARGE-IN NND NAME NUMBER

DATE

BILL BILL(Hotel Feature) NOCLIP NO CID SEND

BLOCK OHVA BLOCK NPG NETWORK

PAGE

BOOTH BOOTH(Hotel Feature) NS NETWORK

STATION

BOSS BOSS/SECRETARY NXT CID NEXT

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-225

(continued)

Feature Description Feature Description

CAD CALL ACTIVITY DISPLAY OHVA OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE

CALL CALL BUTTON OPER OPERATOR

CAMP STATION CAMP-ON PAGE PAGE

CANMG MESSAGE CANCEL PAGPK PICKUP PAGE HOLD

CBK CALLBACK PARK CALL PARK ORBIT

CC CALL COVERAGE PAUSE PAUSE

CCBS ISDN CALL BACK

CHIN CHECK IN(Hotel Feature) PMSG PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

CHOUT CHECK OUT(Hotel Feature) PRB PRIVACY RELEASE AND BRIDGE

CHOICE CHOICE

(Related to News Server)

PROG SET PROGRAM

CLIP CALLER ID PTHR PATH REPLACEMENT

CONF CONFERENCE RB ROOM BILL(Hotel Feature)

CONP CONNECTED NAME

DISPLAY

REJECT OHVA REJECT

CR CALL RECORD

(Requires SVMi card)

RETRY AUTO REDIAL ON BUSY

CREDIT CREDIT(Hotel Feature) REVW REVIEW

CS CALL STATUS RP RING PLAN

CSNR CALLER ID SAVE NUMBER

REDIAL

RSV ROOM STATUS VIEW

(Hotel Feature)

DGPALM EASY ALARM SET TO

REMOTE STATION

RTO RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE

DICT DICTATION SETDND SET DO NOT DISTURB

DIR DIRECTORY SETMG SET MESSAGE W/O RING

DIVERT EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT

TO SECRETARY

SG STATION GROUP

DLOCK DOOR LOCK SLOCAT STAFF LOCATOR(Hotel Feature)

SMDR SMDR KEY

DND DO NOT DISTURB SNR SAVED NUMBER REDIAL

DNDO DO NOT DISTURB

OVERRIDE

SP UCD SUPERVISOR

DP DIRECT PICKUP SPD SPEED DIAL

DROP CALL DROP SPKR SPEAKER

DS DSS KEY SSET ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE

SET

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-226 Samsung Business Communications

(continued)

Feature Description Feature Description

DT DTS KEY STATE SET EXECUTIVE STATE

ECT EXPLICIT CALL TRANSFER

EP ESTABLISHED CALL

PICKUP

STORE STORE DISPLAYED NUMBER

EXTMIC EXTERNAL MIC SYSALM SYSTEM ALARMS

TCLIP TEMP CLIP

FAUTO FORCED AUTO ANSWER TG TRUNK GROUP

FLASH FLASH TIMER TIMER

FWRD CALL FORWARD TP TERMINAL PORTABILITY

TRARPT TRAFFIC REPORT

GPIK GROUP PICKUP TRSF TRANSFER

HDSET HEADSET MODE UA UNIVERSAL ANSWER

HLDPK HOLD PICKUP

HOLD HOLD VM VOICE MAIL MEMO

(Requires SVMi card)

HOTEL HOTEL(Hotel Feature) VMADM VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION

(Requires SVMi card)

ICONF ISDN 3 PTY CONFERENCE VMAME ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION

(Requires SVMi card)

IDISC ISDN 3 PTY

DISCONNECTION

VMMSG VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY

(Requires SVMi card)

IG IN/OUT GROUP

IHOLD ISDN 3-PARTY HOLD

INFDSP INFORMATION DISPLAY

(Requires News/Call Plus)

INQIRE INQUIRE

IRET ISDN 3 PTY RETRIEVE

ISPY CID SPY VT VOICEMAIL TRANSFER

WAKEUP WAKE UP(Hotel Feature)

LCR LEAST COST ROUTING XCHIN EXPRESS CHECK IN

(Hotel Feature)

LISTN GROUP LISTENING

LNR LAST NUMBER REDIAL

LOG CALL LOGGING

MMPA MEET ME PAGE ANSWER

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-227

DEFAULT DATA

For phones, buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by default.(Other settings depend on

the keyset type.) For AOMs, all buttons are set as DSS buttons by default.

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 722.

Display shows:

[201] KEY (MAST)

01:CALL1Æ

2) Enter selected station number.(e.g., 205)

[205] KEY (MAST)

01:CALL1Æ

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter selected key number.(e.g., 18)

[201] KEY (MAST)

18:NONEÆ_

Press Volume button to select key number and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Using table above, press dial keypad to select num-

ber.

[201] KEY PROG.

18:NONEÆGPIK_

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 5 to

enter extender, if required, or to return to step 2.

5) Enter extender if required.(e.g., 03)

[201] KEY PROG.

18:NONEÆGPIK03

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to return to step 2.

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER

MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-228 Samsung Business Communications

[723] SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

This MMC is similar to MMC 722, Station Key Programming, except that changes are

made system-wide rather than on a per-station basis. Features are entered via the dial key-

pad by pressing numbers as shown in the table.

TYPE OF PHONE

No Type of Phone Description

00 24 BTN SETS Phone with 24 program buttons

01 12 BTN SETS Phone with 12 program buttons

03 EU 6B SETS EU phone with 6 program buttons

05 48/64 BTN AOMS AOM with 48/64 program buttons

06 20 BTN SETS Phone with 20 program buttons

07 28 BTN SETS Phone with 28 program buttons

08 18 BTN SETS Phone with 18 program buttons

09 8 BTN SETS Phone with 8 program buttons

10 99 BTN SETS Phone with 99 program buttons

11 38 BTN SETS Phone with 38 program buttons

12 21 BTN SETS Phone with 21 program buttons

13 14 BTN SETS Phone with 14 program buttons

14 DS-07S SETS 7000 Range phone

DIAL KEYPAD

COUNT 1 2 3 4

DIAL 2 AB BARGE CAD

DIAL 3 DGPALM EP FAUTO

DIAL 4 GPIK HDSET ICONF

DIAL 5 LANREQ LANREQ LANREQ

DIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVA

DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB SETDND

DIAL 8 TG UA VG

DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP

See Programmable Button Assignments in MMC 722.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-229

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DEFAULT DATA IN MMC 722

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 723.

Display shows:

TYPE:24 BTN SETS

01:CALL1Æ

2) Enter type of set via dial keypad.(e.g.,1)

TYPE:12 BTN SETS

01:CALL1Æ

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

3) Enter key number.(e.g., 03)

TYPE:12 BTN SETS

03:NONEÆ

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

4) Using table above, press dial keypad to select number.

TYPE:12 BTN SETS

03:NONEÆGPIK

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step

5 to enter extender, if required.

Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

5) Enter extender if required.(e.g., 03)

TYPE:12 BTN SETS

03:GPIKÆGPIK03

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER

MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-230 Samsung Business Communications

[724] DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

This MMC allows the technician to change directory numbers for stations, trunks, station

groups, trunk groups and feature access codes. The system can be pre-programmed with

default 3- or 4-digit numbering for stations, station groups and trunk numbers depending

on the position of the DIP switches on the MCP card. There is an error message provided to

prevent the accidental duplication of a directory number or feature access code.

No Type of Dial No Description

00 STN DIAL NO. This is where station directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 201-2xx, 3xx(last 319) or 2001-2xxx

01 TRK DIAL NO. This is where trunk directory numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 701-7xx or 7001-7xxx

02 AA/VD DIAL NO Not used

03 MISC DIAL NO. This is where directory numbers for relays, MOH ports and the

alarm sensor are changed or assigned.

Default: MISC01:371

MISC02: 361

MISC03:362

MISC04:3999

04 STNG DIAL

NUMBER

This is where station group numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 500-5xx or 5001-5xxx

05 TRKG DIAL

NUMBER

This is where trunk group numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: The first is 9 or 0, 800-809

06 FEAT DIAL NUMBER This is where feature access codes are changed or assigned. Dial-

ling codes are entered via the dial keypad by pressing a number

the required number of times to select the feature. For example, for

OHVA, the number 6 would be pressed three times.

Please remember that this program is system-wide.

07 S0 STN DIAL NO. This is where directory numbers for BRI station ports are changed

or assigned.

Default: 8701-8708

09 NTWK LCR DIAL NO This is where additional LCR access codes are entered if two or

more OfficeServ 7100 systems are networked together.

Default: NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-231

(continued)

No Type of Dial No Description

10 VIRT EXT DIAL NO This is where virtual station directory numbers are

changed or assigned.

Default: SLT: 3501-3508, DGP: 3401-3416

11 MGI DIAL NO. This is where MGI port directory numbers are changed or

assigned.

Default: 3801-38xx

12 IP STN DIAL NO. This is where IP-based station directory numbers are

changed or assigned.

Default: 3201-3208

13 WLAN DIAL NO, This is where IP-based station directory numbers are

changed or assigned.

Default: 3301-3308

14 SPNET DIAL NO This is where Samsung proprietary switch-to-switch VoIP

networking trunk signalling port directory numbers are

changed or assigned.

Default: 8301-8308

15 H323 TRK DIAL NO This is where VoIP H.323 trunk signalling port directory

numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 8401-8408

16 SIP TRK DIAL NO This is where VoIP SIP trunk signalling port directory

numbers are changed or assigned.

Default: 8501-8508

FEATURE NUMBERING DIAL KEYPAD

COUNT 1 2 3 4

DIAL 2 AB BARGE CAD

DIAL 3 DGPALM EP FAUTO

DIAL 4 GPIK HDSET ICONF

DIAL 5 LANREQ LANREQ LANREQ

DIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVA

DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB SETDND

DIAL 8 TG UA VG

DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-232 Samsung Business Communications

Feature Code Assignments and Default

Feature Default Description

ABAND 64 ABANDONED CALL

ABS NONE ABSENCE

ABW NONE AGENT BUSY/WRAP UP

ACCT 47 ACCOUNT

ALLCLR NONE ALL CLEAR

AUTH NONE AUTHORIZATION CODE

BARGE NONE BARGE-IN

BILL NONE BILL(Hotel Feature)

BLOCK NONE OHVA BLOCK

BOSS NONE BOSS/SECRETARY

CAMP 45 STATION CAMP-ON

CANMG 42 MESSAGE CANCEL

CBK 44 CALLBACK

CHIN NONE CHECK IN(Hotel Feature)

CHOUT NONE CHECK OUT(Hotel Feature)

CHOICE NONE CHOICE(Related to News Server)

CONF 46 CONFERENCE

CONP NONE CONNECTED NAME DISPLAY

CR NONE CALL RECORD(Requires SVMi card)

CREDIT NONE CREDIT(Hotel Feature)

DGPALM NONE EASY ALARM SET TO REMOTE STATION

DICT NONE DICTATION

DIR NONE DIRECTORY

DIRPK 65 DIRECT PICKUP

DISALM 58 DISA ALARM CLEAR

DIVERT NONE EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT TO SECRETARY

DLOCK 13 DOOR UNLOCK

DND 40 DO NOT DISTURB

DNDO NONE DO NOT DISTURB OVERRIDE

E-LCR1 NONE SECOND LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION

E-LCR2 NONE SECOND LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION

E-LCR3 NONE SECOND LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION

E-LCR4 NONE SECOND LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION

FAUTO 14 FORCED AUTO ANSWER

FLASH 49 FLASH

FWD 60 CALL FORWARD

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-233

(continued)

Feature Default Description

GRPK 66 GROUP PICKUP

HDSET NONE HEADSET MODE

HLDPK 12 HOLD PICKUP

HOLD 11 HOLD

HOTEL NONE HOTEL(Hotel Feature)

ICONF NONE ISDN 3-PARTY CONFERENCE

IDISC NONE ISDN 3-PARTY DISCONNECTION

IG 53 IN/OUT GROUP

IHOLD NONE ISDN 3-PARTY HOLD

INFDSP NONE INFORMATION DISPLAY(Requires News/Call Plus)

IRET NONE ISDN 3-PARTY RETRIEVE

LCR # LEAST COST ROUTING

LISTN NONE GROUP LISTENING

LNR 19 LAST NUMBER REDIAL

LOG NONE CALL LOGGING

MMPA 56 MEET ME PAGE ANSWER

MMPG 54 MEET ME PAGE

MSG 43 MESSAGE

MYGRPK 28 MY PICKUP GROUP CALL PICKUP

NEW NONE NEW CALL

NOCLIP NONE NO CID SEND

NPAGE NONE NETWORK PAGE

OHVA NONE OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE

OPER 0 OPERATOR

PAGE 55 PAGE

PAGPK 10 PICKUP PAGE HOLD

PARK NONE CALL PARK ORBIT

PMSG 48 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

PTHR NONE PATH REPLACEMENT

RB NONE ROOM BILL(Hotel Feature)

REJECT NONE OHVA REJECT

RP NONE RING PLAN

RSV NONE ROOM STATUS VIEW(Hotel Feature)

RTO NONE RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE

SELFID NONE SELF SYSTEM ID

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-234 Samsung Business Communications

(continued)

Feature Default Description

SETMG 41 SET MESSAGE W/O RING

SLOCAT NONE STAFF LOCATOR(Hotel Feature)

SLTALM NONE EASY ALARM SET TO SELF STATION

SLTMMC 15 NORMAL PHONE PROGRAMMING

SNR 17 SAVED NUMBER REDIAL

SPEED 16 SPEED DIAL

SRELOC NONE SET RELOCATION

SSET NONE ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE SET

STATE NONE SET EXECUTIVE STATE

TCLIP NONE TEMP CLIP

TP NONE TERMINAL PORTABILIY

UA 67 UNIVERSAL ANSWER

VMADM NONE VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION(Requires SVMi card)

VMAME NONE ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION(Requires SVMi card)

VMMEMO NONE VOICE MAIL MEMO(Requires SVMi card)

VMMSG NONE VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY(Requires SVMi card)

VMSCMT NONE VMS COMMENT(Requires SVM -800)

VMSMSG NONE VMS MESSAGE(Requires SVM -800)

WAKEUP 18 WAKE UP(Hotel Feature)

WCOS 59 WORKING CLASS OF SERVICE

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

FEATURE CODES DEPEND ON COUNTRY

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-235

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 724.

Display shows:

STN DIAL NUM:C1

S2-P01:201Æ

2) Dial option number to make selection.(e.g., 06)

FEAT DIAL NUMBER

ABAND :64Æ_

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3) Dial first letter of feature name.(e.g., 7)

FEAT NUMBER PLAN

PAGE :55Æ

Press Volume button to make selection then press

Right Soft button to advance cursor.

FEAT NUMBER PLAN

PARK :NONEÆ_

4) Enter digits(e.g., 63) via the dial keypad.

FEAT NUMBER PLAN

PARK :NONEÆ63

5) Press Right Soft button to enter change and

continue to make changes.

FEAT NUMBER PLAN

PARK :NONEÆ63

If an error message appears indicating duplication

of access code, enter 1 for YES for change or

SAME DIAL EXIST

CHANGE? Y:1,N:0

enter 0 for NO for no change.

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

ALL MMCs

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-236 Samsung Business Communications

[725] SMDR OPTIONS

Allows the system administrator to select the information printed on the SMDR report.

The following options may be selected:

No Option Default Description

00 PAGE HEADER YES This option determines whether a page header will print

at the top of each page. This would normally be turned

off if SMDR is being sent to a Call Accounting machine.

01 LINE PER PAGE 66 This option selects the length of each page to determine

when to print the SMDR header. The number of lines is

in the range 01-99.

02 INCOMING CALL YES This option determines whether incoming calls will print

on SMDR.

03 OUTGOING CALL YES This option determines whether outgoing calls will print

on SMDR.

04 AUTHORIZE

CODE

NO This option determines whether authorization codes will

print on SMDR. If this option is set to NO, ‘****’ is

printed on SMDR.

05 SMDR START

TIME

YES This option determines whether valid calls will include

the minimum call time in total call duration.

06 IN/OUT GROUP NO This option allows a message, IN GROUP or OUT

GROUP, to be printed in the ‘digits dialled’ column each

time a station enters or leaves a group.

07 DND CALL NO This option allows a message, IN DND or OUT DND, to

be printed in the ‘digits dialled’ column each time a sta-

tion enters or leaves DND.

08 WAKE-UP CALL YES This option determines whether stations receiving an

alarm reminder call will print on SMDR.

09 DIRECTORY

NAME

NONE This option allows the system administrator to enter a

name up to 16 characters which will appear on the

SMDR header.

10 CALLER ID DATA NO This option can be selected to print Caller ID data re-

ceived from the Central Office on incoming calls.

This option requires the use of a 132-column wide carriage

printer or an 80-column printer set for condensed print.

11 ABANDON CALL NO If this option is set to YES, unanswered calls for which

CID information was received will print on SMDR.

13 NO. OF DIAL

MASK

0 If this option is set to a numeric value, the selected last

digits of the number dialled field will be masked as as-

terisks(*) on the SMDR print out. Maximum masked

digits is 18. First 4 digits will not mask.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-237

(continued)

No Option Default Description

15 INCOMING

ANSWER

NO If this option is set to YES, the duration of calls ringing

before being answered will print on SMDR.

16 INTERCOM CALL NO This option determines whether intercom calls will print

on SMDR.

17 KEY MMC IN/OUT NO If set to YES the SMDR record will show programming

being opened and closed in MMC 200 and MMC 800.

20 HOTEL PAGE

FEED

END This option determines where the page feed is inserted

on HM REPT.(Hotel Application Only)

21 HOTEL START

LINE

0 This option determines that the number of empty lines

per each page on HM REPT.(Hotel Application Only)

23 DID NUM/NAME YES If this option is set to YES, received DID information will

print on SMDR.

24 ITP

REGISTRATION

NO If set to YES the SMDR record will show registration of

ITP phones.

25 SET

RELOCATION

NO If set to YES the SMDR record will show Set Reloca-

tions.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-238 Samsung Business Communications

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 725.

Display shows:

PAGE HEADER

PRINT: YES

2) Dial the option number.(e.g., 01)

LINE PER PAGE

60 LINE/PAGE

Use the Volume buttons to scroll through

the options and press Right Soft button

to select an option.

3) Enter the option data.

LINE PER PAGE

50 LINE/PAGE

Use the Volume buttons to press Right

Soft button to save the data and return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-239

[727] SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY

This MMC is used for system version display only.(READ ONLY) The displays depend on

which modules are included in the system

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 727.

Display shows:

MP10-MAIN VERS

07.02.26 V4.01.p

2) Press Volume button to show other modules, e.g.,:

SP Modules MP10-SP VERS

07.02.26 V1.01.e

VMS Modules

MP10-VMS VERS

07.02.26 V4.01.p

DATA Modules

MP10-DATA VERS

NO VERSION DATA

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-240 Samsung Business Communications

[728] CID TRANSLATION TABLE

Allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CID number received from the

central office with a name programmed in this translation table. If there is no match be-

tween a received number and a name in this table, ‘no CID name’ will be displayed.

The translation table consists of 1000 entries. Each entry comprises a telephone number up

to 14 digits and a name up to 16 digits.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 728.

Display shows first entry

CLIP XLAT(0001)

DGT:

2) Dial entry number.(e.g., 0005)

CLIP XLAT (0005)

DGT:_

Use Volume button to scroll through entries

and press Right Soft button to select entry.

3) Enter telephone number and press Right Soft

button to advance to name entry.

CLIP XLAT (0005)

DGT:3054264100

Enter telephone number and press Left Soft

button to return to step 2.

4) Enter associated name and press Right Soft button

to return to step 2.

CLIP XLAT (0005)

SAMSUNG TELECOM

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID

MMC 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-241

[740] STATION PAIR

Assigns a secondary station to a phone. This secondary station can be a keyset or single

line phone. The secondary station assumes the Call Forwarding, Class of Service, LCR

Class, and DND attributes of the primary station. The secondary station will ring when the

primary station rings, and vice versa. Features can be set or cancelled at either station.

When changing the COS

If the COS is changed for either station in MMC 301, the change affects

both stations. Messages from the secondary extension will display the

secondary extension number.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 740.

Display shows

[201] PRIMARY

SECONDARY:NONE

2) Enter the primary station number via dial

Keypad.(e.g., 201)

[201] PRIMARY

SECONDARY:NONE

Use Volume button to select and press Right Soft

button.

3) Enter the secondary station number via dial

Keypad.(e.g., 205)

[201] PRIMARY

SECONDARY:205

Use Volume button to select and press Right Soft

button.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 102 CALL FORWARD

MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS

MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-242 Samsung Business Communications

[746] COSTING DIAL PLAN

The COSTING DIAL PLAN is used to analyze the leading dialled digits of a dialled num-

ber and determine what DIAL PLAN it is to follow. Data entry for this program is in three

fields: ENTRY, DIGITS and COST RATE table reference.

DIGITS

Up to 500 entries may be made. Each entry can be up to 10 digits. These are the entries that

will be searched to find a match with the digits dialled by the station making the call. This

is a leading digits table and the system will look for the exact leading digits in the table that

match the number dialled. For example, if a user dials 1305 and the COSTING DIAL

PLAN contains 1, 1308 and 1312, the dialled digits will be matched to 1 because 1308 and

1312 do not form a complete match. When this table is created by the technician or when

any new entries are added, the system automatically places all entries in numerical order.

Wild cards(∗) can be used to represent any digit. The Toll Restriction Wild Card Character

assignment(MMC 704) is common with Call Costing and Toll Restriction. When all entries

are used, [LAST ENTRY] is displayed.

DIAL PLAN

This shows in the programming display as DP and represents a pattern(1-7, 8). This pattern

is used by MMC 433, TRUNK COST RATE, to determine the correct billing according to

MMC 749, RATE CALCULATION TABLE

When the system finds a DIAL PLAN match for the digits dialled, the system checks

MMC 749 to see what RATE CALCULATION to use for costing the call.

EXAMPLES

When a station user dials a number, the system will search the COSTING DIAL PLAN to

find a match. If 13056 is dialled and this MMC contains entries 1, 13, 1305 and 1401, the

closest match is 1305 and this will be selected. If 1305 is dialled and this MMC contains

entries 1, 13, 13056 and 1401, no action will be taken until the station user dials another

digit. If the next digit is 6, the 13056 entry is the closest match and this entry will be se-

lected, but if the next digit is anything other than 6, the 13 entry is the closest match.

Whenever a new entry is added, the system will sort all entries in numerical order because

this is the logical order in which the system analyzes digits. Wild cards are checked after

exact digits. If 1813 and 18∗∗ are entered, the system will check 1813 first. If no match is

found, it will check 18∗∗.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-243

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 746.

Display shows:

COST DP (001)

DIGIT:

2) Dial CALL COST entry.(e.g., 005)

COST DP (005)

DIGIT:_

Press Volume button to select entry and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter digit string via the dial keypad and

press Right Soft button.

COST DP (005)

DIGIT:1305

4) Enter DIAL PLAN 1-8.(e.g., 8)

COST DP (005)

CALL RATE: 8

Press Volume button to select dial plan and

press Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 433 COST RATE

MMC 747 RATE CALCULATION TABLE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-244 Samsung Business Communications

[747] RATE CALCULATION TABLE

The RATE CALCULATION TABLE is used to define the billing charges for each COST

RATE. These rate tables correlate with the Trunk Cost Rate and the Costing Dial Plan.

There are eight call costing rates. Each rate has the following data fields.

No Type Description

0 1ST DUR

(FIRST INTERVAL

DURATION)

This is the amount of time at the beginning of each call to which a

fixed cost is applied.

The range is 0-999 seconds; e,g. 180 seconds(three minutes).

1 1ST COST

(FIRST INTERVAL

COST)

This is the cost for the first interval duration in £s sterling or Euros.

The range is 0 to 999; e.g., 345(£3.45 or €3.45).

2 2ND DUR

(SECOND INTER-

VAL DURATION)

This is the duration of each billing increment after the first interval

has expired.

The range is 0-999 seconds; e.g., 006 seconds(six seconds).

3 2ND COST

(SECOND INTER-

VAL COST )

This is the cost for each billing increment, in £s sterling or Euros,

after the first interval has expired.

The range is 0-999; e.g., 100(£1.00 or €1.00).

4 SURCHARGE

This is a one-time charge, in £s sterling or Euros, that is applied to

the call over and above the time charges.

The range is 0-999; e.g.,150(£1.50 or €1.50).

Currency values(£ or €)

Currency values(£ or €) depend on the setting for the USE EURO option

in MMC 210.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL COST RATES: NO DATA

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 747.

Display shows:

COST RATE (1)

1ST DUR :000 SEC

2) Dial COST RATE number 1-8.(e.g., 3)

COST RATE (3)

1ST DUR :000 SEC

Press Volume button to select COST RATE and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-245

3) Dial option number 0-4.(e.g., 1)

COST RATE (3)

1ST COST:000

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter data via dial keypad.(e.g., 125=1.25)

COST RATE (3)

1ST COST:125

Press Volume button to select data and press

Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 433 COST RATE

MMC 746 COSTING DIAL PLAN

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-246 Samsung Business Communications

[750] VM CARD RESTART

This MMC is used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail card.

There are four options available in this MMC:

No Option Description

0 MBX DOWNLOAD When the Built-In Voice Mail module starts, part of the power up

procedure will download data from the system to determine time,

date, what mailboxes to create, and system numbering plan. This

must be done at least once, but once done this download feature

can be turned NO to save boot up time.

This option is determine which type virtual port include during

mailbox and system numbering plan downloading procedure.

The virtual port type are followed:

No Type Description

0 VIRTUAL EXT Virtual extension number

1 DESKTOP ITP DESKTOP IP-based phone number

2 DECT PHONE DECT terminal number

3 MOBILE ITP Wireless IP-based mobile phone num-

ber

4 BRI STATION ISDN terminal number

5 VOIP NET TRK VoIP networking trunk number

6 VOIP 323 TRK VoIP H.323 trunk number

7 VOIP SIP TRK VoIP SIP trunk number

2 VIRTUAL NUMBER

DOWNLOAD

8 REMOTE STN Remote station number via networking

3 VM CONNECTION Select VMS Type. There are 3 types: SVMi CARD, DLI CON-

NECT, IP-UMS SERVER(impossible simultaneously use all type)

DEFAULT DATA

ALL OPTIONS ARE NO

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-247

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 750.

Display shows:

MBX DOWNLOAD

2) Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button.

VM RESTART

RESET NOW ? NO

3) Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

VM RESTART

RESET NOW ? YES

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-248 Samsung Business Communications

[751] ASSIGN MAILBOX

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail card. It assigns mailboxes to

each station or group as required. During Voice Mail card power up, mailboxes will be cre-

ated for each directory number with a ‘YES’ entry. Once the Voice Mail database has been

created, new mailboxes can be added:

y Through Voice Mail administration.

y By adding a new mailbox in this MMC.

If a mailbox is to be removed, this must be done through Voice Mail administration.

If a station that does not have an associated mailbox calls the Voice Mail system, it will be

answered by the Voice Mail system main greeting.

CONDITIONS

Mailboxes that are needed for users who do not have an extension must be added through

Voice Mail programming.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL STATIONS: YES

ALL GROUPS: NO

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 751.

Display shows:.

ASSIGN MAIL BOX

[201] YES

2) Dial station number.

ASSIGN MAIL BOX

[202] YES

Press Volume button to scroll the number and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES.

ASSIGN MAIL BOX

[202] NO

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-249

[752] AUTO RECORD

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail card. Specific stations in the

phone system can be assigned to automatically record conversations. When this option is

set, all incoming, all outgoing, or all calls(incoming and outgoing) can be recorded.

In this MMC you can assign:

y Station number: Which station can use this feature.

y Mailbox number: What mailbox the conversations are recorded in.

y I, O or B: What type of calls are recorded.(in, out or both)

y Voice mail port number: What port is dedicated to the station.

Before using the Auto Record feature

Before using the Auto Record feature, make sure that you are not violating any

laws. Samsung is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature.

CONDITIONS

A maximum of eight stations can use this feature at one time. The same port cannot be as-

signed to more than one station. Attempts to do this will result in an error message. When a

Voice Mail port is assigned here, it is automatically removed from the Voice Mail group de-

fined in MMC 601.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 752.

Display shows:

AUTO RECORD

STN:201 MB:NONE

2) Dial station number via dial keypad.

AUTO RECORD

STN:201 MB:NONE

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial mailbox number via dial keypad.

AUTO RECORD

STN:201 MB:201

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-250 Samsung Business Communications

4) Dial VM number via dial keypad.

AUTO RECORD

PORT:209 CALL:I

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5) Dial call type via dial keypad.(0: I, 1: O or 2: B)

AUTO RECORD

PORT:209 CALL:B

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-251

[753] WARNING DESTINATION

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail card. It provides an emer-

gency destination for calls destined for the card if the card is removed or is offline.

In addition, any calls that are forwarded to the card will not forward; they will remain ring-

ing at the ‘fwd from’ station until answered. This destination can be a station number or a

group number.

DEFAULT DATA

5000

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 753.

Display shows:

WARNING DEST.

DEST:500

2) Dial station number or group number.

WARNING DEST.

DEST:501

Press Volume button to scroll through numbers

and select.

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-252 Samsung Business Communications

[754] VM HALT

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. It is used to halt the Voice

Mail Module. If the Voice Mail module is halted by using this MMC, system has to restart

to use the Voice Mail module again. At that time, ‘RESTART’ option can be used.

DEFAULT DATA

RESTART

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 754.

Display shows:

VM HALT

STATUS:RESTART

2) Enter 1 to HALT or 0 to PROC

VM HALT

STATUS:RESTART

Press Volume button to select.

3) If you select 1 to halt, display shows:

Press 1 to confirm. VM HALT

ARE YOU SURE? YES

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-253

[755] VM ALARM

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. It will generate an alarm

message in the mailbox defined in MMC 751 whenever the Voice Mail disk drive reaches a

threshold.

The threshold is measured as a percentage of capacity. This means that if the MMC is set

for 80, the alarm will be generated when the disk exceeds 80% of the available drive space.

DEFAULT DATA

THRESHOLD: 80%

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 755.

Display shows:

VM ALARM

THRESHOLD:80

2) Enter new threshold level.(e.g., 70) VM ALARM

THRESHOLD:70

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-254 Samsung Business Communications

[756] ASSIGN VMMOH

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. It is used to assign each port

a Music-On-Hold source for the system from a sound file located on the Voice Mail card

hard disk drive. The 100 available sound files are defined as numbers 5000 to 5099.

To use the default music, select the number; otherwise, make sure you record the sound file

first. Then, assign the sound file to a Voice Mail port.

For example, if you record sound file 5025 you would associate 25 with a specific Voice

Mail port, e.g., 301. This will dedicate the port for use only as MOH and remove it from

group 529 or 549. Now 301will show up as a valid music source in MMCs 308, 309 and

408.

Each Music-On-Hold source assigned here requires one Voice Mail port.

When the first Built-In Voice Mail port is used for VMMOH

If the first Built-In Voice Mail port is used for VMMOH, it must be disabled before

boot up since Built-In Voice Mail and the system use port 1 during boot up to ex-

change critical information. For this reason we suggest you use the last port as

VMMOH ports.

DEFAULT DATA

NOT USED

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 756.

Display shows:

SET VMMOH

301 : NOT USED

2) Dial VM number.(e.g., 301)

SET VMMOH

301: NOT USED

Press Volume button to make a selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter VM message number.(e.g., 25)

OR SET VMMOH

301: 25

Press Volume button to make a selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-255

[757] VM IN/OUT

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. It is used to assign each

Voice Mail port as used for incoming, outgoing or both-way calls. This MMC must support

outgoing calls if off-premises notification(beeper, outbound follow me or outbound notifi-

cation) is used.

DEFAULT DATA

IN/OUT

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 757.

Display shows:

VM IN/OUT

301: IN/OUT

2) Dial VM number.(e.g., 301)

VM IN/OUT

301: IN/OUT

Press Volume button to make a selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter option via dial keypad.(e.g., IN)

VM IN/OUT

301: IN

Press Volume button to make a selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-256 Samsung Business Communications

[758] VM DAY/NIGHT

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. The module can operate in

either a DAY or NIGHT operating mode. The mode determines what main menu greetings

and options are played to callers and can change automatically (if enabled in the card) ac-

cording to the settings in this MMC.

This MMC contains either a DAY or NIGHT instruction for each Ring Plan.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL RING PLANS: DAY

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 758.

Display shows:

VM DAY/NIGHT

RING 1 : DAY

2) Enter ring plan number.

VM DAY/NIGHT

RING 3 : DAY

Press Volume button to make a selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 0 for day or 1 for night.

VM DAY/NIGHT

RING 3 : DAY

Press Volume button to make a selection and

press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-257

[759] CLI RINGING

This MMC assigns a specific CID number received from the central office to a specific

ring plan destination. Also allows you to reject a specific CID number and assign priorities.

There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest.

It also allows you to select the ring tone heard at a phone when called by a specific CID number.

There is also a cadence control option to perform a similar function for SLTs. There are eight ring

tones available along with a Follow Station(NO) option. There are five cadences and a Follow

Station option(NO) for SLTs. The CID Ringing table consists of 100 entries.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

Option Description

CLI CID number to be received from the central office. Up to 16 digits may be

entered.

REJ CID call reject option. When this sets YES, if a call comes that matched CID

number and CLI field then the system will be reject call.

PRI CID priority option. There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and

priority 9 is the lowest. When calls into station group come and group mem-

bers are all busy, the system will assign a priority to the CID number so that

calls from a high priority CID number will be placed at the front of the group

queue.

If this option sets NO, the longest call that placed at the group queue has

the highest priority.

R1: XXX, R2: XXX,

R3: XXX, R4: XXX,

R5: XXX, R6: XXX

Ring plan and destination during each ring plan. The destination can be a

station, station group.

Ring Tone options for a specific CID Number.(NO, 1~8)

No Calls will ring with the phone users choice of ring frequency.

TONE

1~8 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring phones with this

ring frequency.

Ring Cadence options for a specific CID Number at SLT’s(NO, 1~5)

No Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences.

1 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the intercom

ring cadence.

2 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the CO ring

cadence.

3 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the DOOR

ring cadence.

4 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the ALARM

ring cadence.

CAD

5 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the CALL-

BACK ring cadence.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-258 Samsung Business Communications

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 759.

Display shows: CLI RINGING(001)

CLI:

2) Dial entry number.(e.g., 005)

OR CLI RINGING(005)

CLI:_

Press Volume button to make a selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter CID number and press Right Soft button

to advance to next entry. CLI RINGING(005)

CLI:1234567

Enter CID number and press Left Soft button

to return to step 2.

4) Enter reject option via dial keypad.

(1 for YES, 0 for NO) CLI RINGING(005)

REJ:NO PRI:NO

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

5) Enter priority level via dial keypad.(1-9 or NO)

OR CLI RINGING(005)

REJ:NO PRI:NO

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

6) Enter station or group number for each Ring.

Plan destination via dial keypad.(e.g., 501) CLI RINGING(005)

R1:501 R2:NONE

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

7) Dial 1-8(or NO) to select ring tone.(e.g., 2)

OR CLI RINGING(005)

TONE:2 CAD:NO

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

8) Dial 1-5(or NO) to select ring cadence.

OR CLI RINGING(005)

TONE:2 CAD:NO

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

9) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-259

[760] ITEM COST TABLE

This MMC provides a means to assign a code to a billable item along with a 10-character

name for the item. There are a maximum of 100 entries(00 to 99) in the table with item 00

reserved as the code for room deposits, 01 reserved as the code for phone deposits and

items 89 to 99 reserved for other PMS stream items.

These item codes, with the exception of codes 93 to 99, will appear on the guests’ bills at

checkout and will serve to identify what each charge on the bill is for. The room bill, when

printed, will also show telephone calls with an item designation of TEL and the name field

will show the number dialled. In addition to the name, up to eight of the tax codes or rates

defined in MMC 761 can be applied to each item.

PRE DEFINED CODES

No Code Description

00 Room Deposit This is the code used for pre-pay room deposits.

01 Phone Deposit This is the code used for pre-pay phone deposits.

02-88 - User-Assignable code

89 W/UP SET A wake up call was set.

90 W/UP ANS A wake up call was answered.

91 W/UP N/ANS A wake up call was not answered.

92 W/UP CANCL A wake up call was cancelled.

93 Check In A guest has checked into a room.

94 Check out A guest has checked out of a room.

95 Available A room has been flagged as AVAILABLE.

96 Occupied A room has been flagged as OCCUPIED.

97 Clean Room A room has been flagged as NEEDS CLEANING.

98 Fix Room A room has been flagged as NEED MAINTENANCE.

99 Hold A room has been flagged as HOLD.

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL

OPERATION.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

NO ENTRIES

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-260 Samsung Business Communications

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 760.

Display shows:

ITEM CODE (00)

NAME:RM Deposit

2) Enter valid code number(e.g., 02) via dial

keypad.

ITEM CODE (02)

NAME:

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter item name(e.g., ROOM COST) via

keypad.

ITEM CODE (02)

NAME: ROOM COST

4) Press Right Soft button to move cursor to tax

entries.

ITEM CODE (02)

TAXES:00000000

5) Enter the tax rates that apply to this item(‘1’ selects

each rate) and press Right Soft button to return to

ITEM CODE (02)

TAXES:11000000

step 2.

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 761 TAX RATE SETUP

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-261

[761] TAX RATE SETUP

This MMC allows the technician to set up the eight tax rates used in MMC 760. Each tax

rate may be defined as a fixed value or as a percentage of the item cost. In addition, a 10-

character name may be used to define the reason for the tax. The options are detailed below.

Option Description

TAX RATE The number assigned to this tax rate. Tax rates are numbered 1 to 8 to match the

rate field in MMC 760, counting from left to right.

TYPE The type of tax. Defines if the VALUE is applied as a percentage(%) of the cost of

an item(e.g., service charge) or is added as a fixed currency value(C) to an item

or is applied as a Inclusive VAT percentage(I) of the cost of an item.

VALUE The actual tax rate that will be applied to the item cost.

NAME A 10-character name that will be displayed on the room bill alongside the tax.

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL

OPERATION.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL RATES ARE %

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 761.

Display shows:

TAX RATE (1)

TYPE:% VAL:00.00

2) Enter valid tax number, e.g., 2, via dial keypad.

TAX RATE (2)

TYPE:% VAL:00.00

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 0 for ‘%’, 1 for ‘C’ or 2 for ‘I’.

(Refer to table above)

TAX RATE (2)

TYPE:C VAL:00.00

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-262 Samsung Business Communications

4) Enter the tax rate or value via dial keypad.

TAX RATE (2)

TYPE:C VAL:01.25

Press Volume button to make selection.

If valid entry, system advances cursor.

5) Enter name and press Right Soft button to return to

step 2.

TAX RATE (2)

NAME:MIA BED

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-263

[762] ROOM COST RATE

This MMC allows the technician to set up the cost rates for a week. Each room cost rate

can be assigned with a percentage of the actual room cost from Sunday to Saturday.

EXAMPLE: If you set SUN: 150%, 1. MON: 100%, 2.TUE: 090% .

Then, if you set £100 as the room cost when checking in a guest, the real room cost will be

£150 on Sunday, £100 on Monday and £90 on Tuesday.

CONDITIONS

This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in ‘MMC 813, HOTEL

OPERATION’.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL RATES ARE 100%

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 762.

Display shows:

RM COST RAT(SUN)

100% :

2) Dial day number 0-6.(e.g., 2)

RM COST RAT(TUE)

100% :

Press Volume button to select day and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter room cost rate.(001-999, e.g., 090) RM COST RAT(TUE)

100% :090

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-264 Samsung Business Communications

[763] SECOND LCR

This MMC allows the technician to input the Extended LCR information table.

Max table index is 200. This table have translation and route information for input digits.

The last table(index 200) has only ‘NEXT ROUTE’ option. This is used for the case there

are no matching table for user input digits. NEXT ROUTE option can be set by LCR or

trunk group as follows.

Option Description Default

IN DIGIT Define user input digits after E-LCR code

(Max 16 digits)

OUT DIGIT Outgoing digits(these digits will be sent instead of input digits) (Max

16 digits)

USE LCR NUM Select which E-LCR code(E-LCR1, E-LCR2, E-LCR3, E-LCR4)

used for this table index.

ALL

NEXT ROUTE Select ‘LCR’ or trunk group to seizure.

‘LCR’ means that MMC710 LCR DIGIT table will be used with out-

going digits(OUT DIGIT).

LCR

CONDITIONS

MMC724 FEATURE CODE: E-LCR1, E-LCR2, E-LCR3, E-LCR4 addition

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 763.

Display shows:

(001)IN DIGIT

2) Dial Table number 001-200.

(001)IN DIGIT

Press Volume button to select Table number and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter IN DIGIT maximum 16 digits, and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

(001)IN DIGIT

1234

4) Enter OUT DIGIT option number([1]).

(001)OUT DIGIT

Press Volume button to select OUT DIGIT and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-265

5) Enter OUT DIGIT maximum 16 digits, and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

(001)OUT DIGIT

7500

Enter USE LCR NUM option number([2]).

(001)USE LCR NUM

Press Volume button to select USE LCR NUM and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

7) Enter USE LCR NUM maximum 16 digits, and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

(001)USE LCR NUM

8) Enter NEXT ROUTE option number([3]).

(001)NEXT ROUTE

Press Volume button to select NEXT ROUTE and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

9) Enter USE LCR NUM maximum 16 digits, and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

(001)NEXT ROUTE

LCR

10) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 310 LCR CLASS

MMC 711 LCR TIME

MMC 712 LCR ROUTE

MMC 713 LCR MODF. DGT

MMC 724 NUMBER PLAN

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-266 Samsung Business Communications

[800] ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

Used to open and close technician-level programming. If programming is not opened and

an attempt is made to access a system MMC, an error message will be displayed.

CONDITIONS

A 4-digit passcode is required to access this MMC. Each character can be digits 0-9. When

opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs.

DEFAULT DATA

DISABLE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 800.

Display shows:

ENABLE TECH.PROG

PASSCODE:

2) Enter passcode.

ENABLE TECH.PROG

PASSCODE:∗∗∗∗

Correct code shows: ENABLE TECH.PROG

DISABLE TENANT:1

Incorrect code shows:

ENABLE TECH. PROG

PASSCODE ERROR

3) Enter 1 to enable or 0 to disable.

ENABLE TECH.PROG

ENABLE TENANT:1

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move tenant number and

enter tenant number(1-2).

4) Press Speaker button to advance to MMC entry level. 801:TEC.PASSCODE

SELECT PROG.ID

5) Enter the MMC required to begin programming.

6) To log out and return to MMC 800, press

Volume button to select DISABLE.

Press Speaker button then Transfer to return to

normal display.

Programming option will time out.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-267

[801] CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE

Used to change the passcode which allows access to MMC 800, Enable Technician Pro-

gram, from its current value.

CONDITIONS

The passcode is four characters long. Each character can be digits 0-9. The current or old

passcode is required for this MMC.

DEFAULT DATA

DEFAULT PASSCODE: 4321

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 801. TECH. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:_

2) Enter new passcode. TECH. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:∗∗∗∗

3) Enter new passcode again.

TECH. PASSCODE

VERIFY :∗∗∗∗

4) If passcode is correct, press Right Soft

key to continue and enter desired MMC.

TECH. PASSCODE

VERIFY :SUCCESS

If passcode is incorrect. TECH. PASSCODE

VERIFY :FAILURE

System returns to step 2. TECH. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:∗∗∗∗

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-268 Samsung Business Communications

[802] CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER

Allows the System Administrator(customer) to have access to certain MMCs. For example,

it is required that the customer has access to MMC 102, Call Forward, for call forwarding

but it is not required that the customer has access to MMC 710, LCR Digit Table, for LCR

dial plans.

This MMC is for both tenants.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 802.

Display shows:

CUST.USE MMC :1

100:STN LOCK:YES

2) Enter desired tenant number(1-2) via dial keypad.

CUST.USE MMC :1

100:STN LOCK:YES

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter desired MMC number via dial keypad.

CUST.USE MMC :1

102:CALL FWD:YES

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO via dial keypad.

CUST.USE MMC :1

102:CALL FWD:NO

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Left Soft button to return to step 3 to

make additional entries.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-269

[805] TX LEVEL AND GAIN

Allows the system administrator to set the base level of TX volume on phones. There are

eight levels that can be controlled by the Volume buttons on phones, and 10 controllable

levels in the system. This MMC allows the system administrator to classify any desired

eight levels within 11.

No Option Description

Adjusts the transmitting sensitivity(max.: 9) Default values are:

INDEX: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0 TX LEVEL CONTROL

LEVEL: 0 1 2 4 3 5 6 7

1 MISC TSW GAIN Adjusts the level of the internal music source of the MCP card or

the external music source of the MIS card(0~7, higher numbers

mean lower levels). Default value is 0.

2 TSW GAIN

CONTROL

Adjusts the tone sensitivity. There are eight types of matrix connec-

tions of the T-Switch that adjust the tone sensitivity(0-7, below).

Connection between Trunk lines are only applicable when set as 0

in MMC 421.

0 DGP DLI phone

1 SLT SLI phone

2 ATRK Analogue trunk

3 DTRK Digital trunk

4 DECT DECT terminal

5 VOIP MGI port or IP-based phone

6 SVMi SVMi port

7 WLAN WIP port

When changing the MMC [805]

‘MMC [805] TX LEVEL AND GAIN’ should not be changed from the default levels

without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

DEFAULT DATA

TX DGP SLT ATRK DTRK DECT VOIP SVMi WLAN

DGP Æ 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 +1.9

SLT Æ 0.0 -2.5 0.0 -2.5 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 +1.9

ATRK Æ 0.0 0.0 +1.9 -6.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 +1.9

DTRK Æ 0.0 -2.5 +1.9 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0

DECT Æ 0.0 0.0 0.0 +1.9 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0

VOIP Æ 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0

SVMi Æ 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0

WLAN Æ -6.0 -2.5 -6.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 +1.9

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-270 Samsung Business Communications

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 805.

Display shows:

TX LEVEL CONTROL

LEVEL 0Æ0

2) Press Volume button to make selection(0-3) and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

TX LEVEL CONTROL

LEVEL 1Æ1

3) (When the TX LEVEL CONTROL is selected)

a. Select the desired volume level via dial keypad.

TX LEVEL CONTROL

LEVEL 1Æ1

Press Volume button to go to the next volume level

and press Right Soft button.

b. Enter desired volume data via dial keypad.

TX LEVEL CONTROL

LEVEL 1Æ3

4) (When the MISC TSW GAIN is selected)

a. Enter desired MISC/BGM TSW gain via dial keypad.

MISC TSW GAIN

BGM/MOH :0

Press Volume button to select desired MISC/BGM

TSW gain and press Right Soft button.

5) (When the TSW GAIN CONTROL is selected)

a. Select the TX TWS connect type via dial keypad.

TSW GAIN CONTROL

SLTÆDGP :+0.0

Press Volume button to go to the next TX TSW

connect type and press Right Soft button.

b. Select the RX TSW connect type via dial keypad.

TSW GAIN CONTROL

SLTÆATRK:+0.0

Press Volume button to go to the next RX TSW

connect type and press Right Soft button.

c. Enter desired TSW gain control data via dial keypad.

TSW GAIN CONTROL

SLTÆATRK:+1.9

Press Volume button to scroll data and press

Right Soft button.

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-271

[806] CARD PRE-INSTALL

Allows the pre-programming of a card slot for a specific card type. A card inserted into a

system will not be recognized by the system until it is enabled using this MMC. Cards in-

stalled using this MMC will not be assigned in the system numbering plan—you should

use MMC 724 to assign the desired directory numbers to extensions, trunks, ports or mis-

cellaneous functions.

When a card is removed and a different type card is inserted

If a card is removed and a different card is inserted, and this MMC is performed,

the memory associated with the previous card(e.g., key programming) will be

erased.

When a previous card is UNI Board and a current card is the same, but the

modules are changed

If a UNI card is removed and a UNI card which has different modules is inserted,

system will recognize automatically. So it does not need to preinstall.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 806.

Display shows:

C:1–S:1

8 DLIÆ8 DLI

2) Enter cabinet number via dial keypad.(e.g., 1)

C:1–S:1

8 DLIÆ8 DLI

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

3) Enter slot number via dial keypad.(e.g., 6)

C:1–S:6

16 DLIÆ16 DLI

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

4) Dial 1 for YES to reset card or dial 0 for NO.

C:1–S:6

RESET CARD ? NO

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-272 Samsung Business Communications

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

5) Dial 1 for YES to reset card or dial 0 for NO.

C:1–S:6

ARE YOU SURE?NO

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-273

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

[807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL

Allows the system administrator to set phone volume levels.

Phone Volume Level FX

No Type No Type

0 KEY TONE VOL 0 LINE VOLUME

1 SIDETONE VOL 1 SPEAKER VOLUME

2 HANDSET TX 2 NOR.LP ATTEN

3 MIC TX LEVEL 3 MIC LP ATTEN

4 NOISE GUARD 4 ACOU DECOUPL

5 NOISE THRES 5 ELEC DECOUPL

6 ALC THRES 6 T/R RATIO

7 TX/RX THRES. 7 R/T RATIO

8 TX/RX COMP

9 MIN RX VOL(28D, 12L, 21D, ITP)

When changing the MMC [807]

‘MMC [807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL’ should not be changed from the de-

fault levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-274 Samsung Business Communications

DEFAULT DATA

DEPENDS ON PHONE TYPE(SHOWN FOR 21D)

21D FX

Type Default Type Default

KEY TONE VOL 1 LINE VOLUME 3

SIDETONE VOL 1 SPEAKER VOLUME 14

HANDSET TX 4 NOR.LP ATTEN 4

MIC TX LEVEL 3 MIC LP ATTEN 5

NOISE GUARD 8 ACOU DECOUPL 8

NOISE THRES 1 ELEC DECOUPL 8

ALC THRES 7 T/R RATIO 2

TX/RX THRES. 3 R/T RATIO 2

TX/RX COMP 5

MIN RX VOL 6

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 807.

Display shows:

VOL.CONTROL:US24

KEY TONE VOL:1

2) Enter phone type via dial keypad.

VOL.CONTROL:EU24

KEY TONE VOL:1

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter volume item via dial keypad.

VOL.CONTROL:EU24

SIDETONE VOL:1

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter volume data via dial keypad.

VOL.CONTROL:EU24

HANDSET TX :6

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-275

[810] HALT PROCESSING

Used only in the event that all data processing needs to be stopped either in a single cabinet

slot or in the entire system.

DEFAULT DATA

PROC

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 810.

Display shows:

HALT/PROCESSING

C:ALL S:ALLÆPROC

2) Enter cabinet selection via dial keypad.

HALT/PROCESSING

C:1 S:ALLÆPROC

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

Select all cabinets and slots.(and go to step 4) HALT/PROCESSING

C:ALL S:ALLÆPROC

3) Enter slot number via dial keypad.

HALT/PROCESSING

C:1 S:2ÆPROC

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

4) Enter 1 for HALT or 0 for PROC.

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to enter and return to step 2.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-276 Samsung Business Communications

[811] RESET SYSTEM

Provides a means of restarting the system. The system can simply be reset or it can be reset

and all memory cleared to default values. Extreme care should be taken when using this

MMC. If the system is restarted, all voice/data connections are dropped. If memory is

cleared, all customer data is deleted and the system returns to defaulted status.

No Type Description

0 RESET SYSTEM System reset only with MC card read.

1 CLEAR MEMORY System reset and make default system with MC card read.

2 FAST RESTART System reset only without MC card read.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 811.

Display shows:

SYSTEM RESTART

RESET SYSTEM?NO

2) Enter reset type(0-2) via dial keypad.

SYSTEM RESTART

CLEAR MEMORY?NO

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

SYSTEM RESTART

CLEAR MEMORY?YES

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button.

4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

SYSTEM RESTART

ARE YOU SURE?YES

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button.

5) If clear memory, system will return with default time

and date and default extension number.

If system just restarted, it will return to normal pro-

grammed status.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-277

[812] SET COUNTRY CODE

Selects the country for correct system programming and operation.

When changing the MMC [812]

‘MMC [812] SET COUNTRY CODE’ should not be used from the default levels

without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 812.

Display shows:

SELECT COUNTRY

Undefined

2) Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

SELECT COUNTRY

RUSSIA/CIS

3) Press Volume button to select YES or NO and

press Right Soft button.

DEFAULTING SYSTM

ARE YOU SURE?NO

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 811 RESET SYSTEM

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-278 Samsung Business Communications

[813] HOTEL OPERATION

Allows the installing technician to enable the HOTEL feature.

DEFAULT DATA

DISABLE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 813.

Display shows:

HOTEL OPERATION

DISABLE

2) Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE.

HOTEL OPERATION

ENABLE

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

HOTEL OPERATION

CHANGE NOW ? NO

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

HOTEL OPERATION

ARE YOU SURE?YES

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

Hotel Related MMCs

MMC 221 EXTENSION TYPE

MMC 222 FAX PAIR

MMC 513 HOTEL TIMER

MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE

MMC 761 TAX RATE SETUP

MMC 762 ROOM COST RATE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-279

[815] CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY

This enables the on-board customer database(SRAM) to be copied to the MC Data-

base(MCDB) and also allows the MCDB database to be copied to the SRAM. A daily save

can be programmed to automatically save the SRAM to the MCDB. This ensures that an

up-to-date database is always available in case of a catastrophic failure. A daily save time

of 00:00 means that no daily save is performed.

It is recommended that the MCDB is cleared before the SRAM is copied to it. When the

SRAM is copied to the MCDB there is no interruption in service. If the MCDB is copied to

the SRAM, the system will reset to accept the new data.

MCDB(Mc card database)

Option Description

S:mm/dd/yy hh:mm Indicates the time the database was saved to the MCDB.

CLEAR MCDB Clear MCDB.

COPY TO SRAM Copy MCDB to SRAM.

SRAM(MCP on-board database)

Option Description

S:mm/dd/yy hh:mm Indicates the time the SRAM was last saved.

COPY TO MCDB Copy SRAM to MCDB.

DAILY SAVE hh:mm The time the SRAM will be saved to the MCDB.

A MC Card of 256 MB

A MC Card of 256 MB must be installed in order to copy the on board data-

base(SRAM) on to the MC card (MCDB).

DEFAULT DATA

DAILY SAVE 00:00(no daily save)

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 815.

Display shows:

CUST DBASE:MCDB

S:12/01/01 00:00

If MC card is in use, the display shows: CUST DBASE:MCDB

MMC IS BUSY

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-280 Samsung Business Communications

2) Press Right Soft button to move cursor. CUST DBASE:MCDB

S:12/01/01 00:00

3) Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

CUST DBASE:MCDB

CLEAR SMDB :NO

4) Press Volume button to select YES or NO and

press Right Soft button.

CUST DBASE:MCDB

CLEAR SMDB :YES

5) Press Volume button to select YES or NO and

press Right Soft button.

CUST DBASE:MCDB

ARE YOU SURE?NO

If you select YES, the display shows. CUST DBASE:MCDB

Cleared....

6) Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

CUST DBASE:SYSDB

DAILY SAVE:00:00

7) Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

CUST DBASE:SYSDB

DAILY SAVE:00:00

8) Input save time.

CUST DBASE:SYSDB

DAILY SAVE:23:30

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

9) Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

CUST DBASE:SYSDB

COPY TO SMDB:NO

10) Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to make changes and return to

CUST DBASE:SYSDB

ARE YOU SURE?:YES

step 9.

11) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-281

[818] PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

Change the system version by downloading the new version stored on the MC card to the

APP/SYS/DRV/WEB/RUT/MSP/CSP and TEPRI cards.

Option Description

APP To upgrade application (including MP and VM module)

SYS Include all modules. (?)

DRV To upgrade Driver, F/W (including SP, MGI, drivers)

WEB To upgrade WEB UI

RUT To upgrade Router module (limited in MP11)

MSP To upgrade MSP driver

CSP To upgrade CSP driver

PR2 To upgrade TEPRI2 Package

PRI To upgrade TEPRI/ TEPRIa Package

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 818.

Display shows:

PGM DOWNLOAD

APP:ap10v014.pkg

2) Press Volume button to select program type

and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

PGM DOWNLOAD

SYS:rd10v014.pkg

3) Press Volume button to select YES and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

SYSTEM PKG

DOWNLOAD NOW?YES

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-282 Samsung Business Communications

[819] MC FILE CONTROL

Displays the size(in bytes) of various system program files on the MC card.

Files included in MC card are described below:

File Name Description

Startup.ini If user designates an MCP program in MMC 818, related data are saved in this file.

This file is initially not included but is created when the above programs are se-

lected at MMC 818.

Ms10v508.pkg MSP driver program

This program must be included in MC card to start the system.

Cs10v101.pkg MSP driver program

This program must be included in MC card to start the system.

Ap10v014.pkg Appication program.

MP and VM module is included in this package.

Dr10v014.pkg This package includes SP, MGI and other drivers.

Rd10v014.pkg RAMDISK program

Ws10v014.pkg WEB UI program

vm_l_use.tar/

vm_l_uk.tar

VM prompt

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-283

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 819.

Display shows:

Startup.ini

sz:512 bytes

2) Press Volume button to confirm program type Cs10v101.pkg

sz:14418432 bytes

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-284 Samsung Business Communications

[820] ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

This MMC is used to assign the system link ID for PRI and VoIP networking. Up to 100

link IDs can be entered including SELF ID. In addition, each Link ID is associated with the

IP address and IP address type of the MCP card for that system.

Option Description

LINK ID System ID for networking feature.

SIGNAL G/W System IP address for VoIP networking.

IP TYPE System IP address type for VoIP networking. SELF system IP address type

determines ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’ in MMC 830.

CONDITIONS

‘SELF’ represents self-node, and must be set to use the networking function. Items other

than ‘SELF’ are used for station numbers and can be omitted.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 820.

Display shows:

SELF :LINK ID

2) Enter SELF link ID via dial keypad and

press Right Soft button.

SELF :LINK ID

3) Press Volume button to select other link ID

and press Right Soft button to mover cursor.

SYS01:LINK ID

4) Enter other link ID via dial keypad and

press Right Soft button.

SYS01:LINK ID

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK

MMC 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS

MMC 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION

MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-285

[821] ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK

Assigns the Q-signalling PRI trunk for networking. It is assigned data on a per-TEPRI card

basis.

DEFAULT DATA

NORMAL

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 821.

Display shows:

[701] Q-SIG TRK

NORMAL

2) Enter first trunk number of PRI card.

[701] Q-SIG TRK

NORMAL

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter 0 for NORMAL, or 1 for Q-SIGNALLING.

[701] Q-SIG TRK

Q-SIGNALLING

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-286 Samsung Business Communications

[822] VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE

Assigns the virtual extension port type. The virtual extension port types are followed:

No Type Description

00 SLT Emulates SLI port

01 24 BTN SET 24 buttons phone

02 12 BTN SET 12 buttons phone

03 7 BTN SET 7 buttons phone

04 6 BTN SET 6 buttons phone

05 28 BTN SET 28 buttons phone

06 18 BTN SET 18 buttons phone

07 8 BTN SET 8 buttons phone

08 38 BTN SET 38 buttons phone

09 21 BTN SET 21 buttons phone

10 14 BTN SET 14 buttons phone

11 LARGE SET Large LCD phone

12 7 BTN LCD 7 buttons LCD phone

13 0 BTN LCD 0 button LCD phone

14 NONE not used

DEFAULT DATA

3501-3522: SLT

3401-3440: 21 BTN SET

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-287

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 822.

Display shows:

[3501]PORT TYPE

SLT

2) Enter virtual extension number.

[3501] PORT TYPE

SLT

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Select all ports.

[ALL] PORT TYPE

SLT

3) Enter virtual extension type.

[3501] PORT TYPE

SLT

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-288 Samsung Business Communications

[823] ASSIGN NETWORK COS

Assigns the class of service for networking.

No Option Default Description

01 CALL OFFER Y Call Offer

04 CC SIG CONN Y CC Retention of Signal Connection

05 CC SVC RETN Y CC Service Retention

06 CCBS N Call Completion to Busy Subscriber

07 CCNR N Call Completion on No Reply

08 CFB Y Call Forward Busy

09 CFNR Y Call Forward No Reply

10 CFU Y Call Forward Unconditional

11 CI N Call Intrusion

12 CI CAPABIL 2 Intrusion Capability Level(1~3)

14 CI PROTECT 2 Intrusion Protection Level(0~3)

23 CONP LEVEL 3 CONP Level(0: none, 1: Alert, 2: Busy, 3: Both)

26 CT RE-ROUTE N Transfer By Rerouting

27 DND TONE N DND Announcement

28 DNDO Y Do Not Disturb Override

29 DNDO CAPABL 2 DNDO Capability Level(0~3)

30 DNDO PROTEC 2 DNDO Protection Level(1~3)

31 PAGE Y PAGE

32 PATH REPL. Y Path Replacement

33 PATH RETEN N Path Retention

CONDITIONS

NONE

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-289

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 823.

Display shows:

NETWORK COS (01)

01:CALL OFFER :Y

2) Dial the class of service number.(01-30)

NETWORK COS (02)

01:CALL OFFER :Y

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial the feature number.

NETWORK COS (02)

03:CC PATH RSV:Y

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter 0 for NO, or 1 for YES.

NETWORK COS (01)

03:CC PATH RSV:N

Press Volume button to select YES or NO and

Press Right Soft button to store data.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-290 Samsung Business Communications

[824] NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION

Assigns the digit translation table used for networking. Generally, under networking condi-

tions, you must dial the node ID and extension number to call the another node extension.

In this MMC, the system provides a simple digit translation so that the user need only dial

the extension number to call the station on the other node. The access digit needs to be pro-

grammed in MMC 724(‘NTWK LCR DIAL NO.’ option) first. The system allows 96 en-

tries for network dial translation.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 824.

Display shows:

01:601Æ

SIZE:0 MAX:00

2) Dial the entry number.

01:601Æ_

SIZE:0 MAX:00

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter digit string for access to node(max. 8 digits)

and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

01:601Æ60201

SIZE:0 MAX:00

4) Enter number of digits user will dial.(e.g., 3 for 3-

digit extension)

01:601Æ60201

SIZE:3 MAX:00

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

5) Enter max. number of digits system will dial.

01:601Æ60201

SIZE:3 MAX:08

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

6) Enter YES/NO to display other node extension

in internal extension number format.

01:601Æ60201

DISP:N MBX:N

Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft

button to move cursor.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-291

7) Enter YES/NO to assign Mailbox to remote

extension automatically.

01:601Æ60201

DISP:Y MBX:N

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

8) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE

MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

MMC 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-292 Samsung Business Communications

[825] ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS

Assigns the options used for networking.

No Option Description

0 ADD NUMBER TO NAME Assign to include the extension number in the name field of

Q-SIG standard message.

1 USE REMOTE VM Assign to use SVMi on remote system.

2 REMOTE VM NUMBER Assign to access number of remote SVMi when the Remote

VM is used.

3 REMOTE CID NUMB Assign to use delete node number when CID number send to

SVMi.

4 USE REMOTE ATTN Use Attendant on remote system.(RING 1-6, Y/N)

5 REMOTE ATTN NUMB Access number of remote Attendant when the remote Atten-

dant is used.(RING 1-6)

6 SPNET DIGIT SEND Specify by which method dialled digits are sent across the

network.

DEFAULT DATA

ADD NUMB TO NAME: YES

USE REMOTE VM: NO

REMOTE VM NUMBER: NONE

REMOTE CID NUMB: YES

USE REMOTE ATTN: NO

REMOTE ATTN NUMB: NONE

SPNET DIGIT SEND: MGI SIGNALLING

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-293

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 825.

Display shows:

ADD NUMB TO NAME

YES

2) Dial the option number.

USE REMOTE VM

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

USE REMOTE VM

YES

Press Volume button to select YES/NO and

press Right Soft button to mover cursor.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-294 Samsung Business Communications

[826] ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK

The system clock may be synchronized with an external clock source from the TEPRI or

BRI card, or it can use the internal clock source.

This MMC can assign the system clock source priority when the external clock source is

used.

DEFAULT DATA

PRIORITY 1: C1-S0

PRIORITY 2: C1-S1

PRIORITY 3: SELF

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 826.

Display shows:

REFERENCE CLOCK

PRIORITY 1:C1-S0

2) Dial the priority number

REFERENCE CLOCK

PRIORITY 1:C1-S0

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Dial the priority data.

REFERENCE CLOCK

PRIORITY 1:C1-S0

Press Volume button to select and Press

Right Soft button to store.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-295

[829] LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS

This program sets the various parameters required for printing to a LAN-connected device.

The data listed below can be printed.

01. SMDR

02. UCD REPORT

03. TRAFFIC REPORT

04. ALARM REPORT

05. UCD VIEW

06. PERIODIC UCD

07. HOTEL REPORT

08. PMS

The items that are set in this program are:

No Option Default Description

00 DATA TYPE - Type of data to be displayed

01 CURR STATUS OFF Current status of the LAN printer

02 EMPTY BUFF NO Prints all data left in the buffer

03 UPDATE LAN NO Applies modified values set in this MMC

04 DESTINATION OFF Data transmit destination(Off, Printer, PC, Both)

05 PRINTER IP 200.1.1.1 The IP address of the LAN printer

06 PRINTER TCP 10010 The TCP port of the printer

07 LAN TCP 10020 LAN TCP port

08 RETRY COUNT 03 Re-transmit attempt count(00~10)

09 RETRY WAIT 010 sec Wait time for re-transmit(005~250 sec)

10 PJL ENABLE FALSE Sets PJL(0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)

11 LANGUAGE RAW Printer language(0. RAW, 1. PCL, 2. PS)

12 PAPER SIZE A4 Paper size(0. A4, 1. LETTER)

13 FONT TYPE COURIER Font type(0.COURIER, 1.TIMES NEW ROMAN)

14 DUPLEX ENAB FALSE Sets duplex(0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)

15 ORIENTATION PORTRAIT Orientation(0. PORTRAIT, 1. LANDSCAPE)

16 PRINT TRAY DEFAULT Printer tray(0.Default, 1.Tray1, 2.Tray2, 3.Manual)

17 RESOLUTION 300 Resolution(0.300, 1.600)

18 LINE/PAGE 60 Lines per page

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-296 Samsung Business Communications

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 829.

Display shows:

[01] DATA TYPE

SMDR

2) Enter type of data to be printed.

[02] DATA TYPE

UCD REPORT

Press Volume button to select the type and

press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3) Enter the item number.

[02] PRINTER IP

200. 1. 1. 1

Press Volume button to select the item and

press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

4) Select the data.

[02] PRINTER IP

168.219. 83.101

Press Volume to select the data and press

Right Soft button to move the cursor.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-297

[830] ETHERNET PARAMETERS

This MMC provides a mean to configure the Internet Protocol(IP) addressing of the MCP

card.

No Parameter Description

00 SYSTEM IP ADDR Specifies the IP address for the MCP card.

01 SYSTEM GATEWAY Specifies the designated gateway IP address used for contacting

IP devices beyond the local network subnet.

02 SYSTEM NET MASK Specifies the IP subnet mask.

This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP

devices(subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’ of the MCP.(without

having to go through the designated network IP gateway)

03 SYSTEM RESET Prompt to reset system MCP when system IP address is changed.

This reset is same as FAST RESTART in MMC 811.

04 SYSTEM IP TYPE Specifies if the system will be routing data over a public or private

network.

05 SYSTEM PUBLIC IP The MCP will originate communications to IP phones and VoIP

connections outside the local network using this IP address. Com-

munications to/from this IP will require involvement of the MGI

card. The system identifies communications to/from this address

as ‘public’. This allows devices, on remote networks/subnets, to

establish communications with the system, without exposing the

LAN. See ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’.

08 SYSTEM MAC ADDR For reference, and cannot be changed. The unique hardware

(MAC) address of the MCP card.

12 PCMMC ADDRESS When the system wants to connect to PCMMC, it will be sent to

this IP address for a connection message.(Reserved for future

use.)

13 SM MANAGER IP Not used.

14 CTI SERVER ADDR IP address of CTI Server

17 NEWS ADDRESS IP address of News Server

18 MMS SERVER IP IP address of MMS Server

19 MMS WEB SERV IP IP address of MMS WEB Server

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-298 Samsung Business Communications

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

- The first three parameters: SYSTEM IP ADDR, SYSTEM GATEWAY, and SYS-

TEM NET MASK are stored separately from the main system database and thus

will not be defaulted when MMC811 ‘CLEAR MEMORY’ is performed. Further-

more, any changes to these parameters will not be applied until the MCP2 is re-

set.

- When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for

each(octet) field. For example 192.168.1.10 should be entered as: 192 168 001

010.

CONDITIONS

y This MMC must be used if there are ITP phones and/or MGI cards on the system.

y After changing Ethernet parameters, restart the system to apply the new settings.

DEFAULT DATA

SYSTEM IP ADDR: 165.213.97.185

SYSTEM GATEWAY: 165.213.97.1

SYSTEM NET MASK: 255.255.255.0

SYSTEM RESET: NO

SYSTEM IP TYPE: PRIVATE IP ONLY

SYSTEM PUBLIC IP: 1.1.1.1

SYSTEM MAC ADDR: CARD DEPENDENT

PCMMC ADDRESS: 168.219.1.101

SM MANAGER IP: 0.0.0.0

CTI SERVER ADDR: 0.0.0.0

NEWS ADDR: 0.0.0.0

MMS SERVER IP: 0.0.0.0

MMS WEB SERV IP: 0.0.0.0

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-299

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 830.

Display shows the system IP address.

SYSTEM IP ADDR

165.213. 97.185

2) Press Volume button to make selection and

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

SYSTEM IP ADDR

165.213. 97.185

3) Using the keypad, enter 3-digit IP numbers.

(e.g., 192 168 001 010 for 192.168.1.10)

SYSTEM IP ADDR

192.168.001.010

Cursor will return to step 1 upon completion

of IP address entry.

4) Press Volume button to make selection and

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

SYSTEM GATEWAY

165.213. 97. 1

5) Using the keypad, enter 3-digit IP numbers.

(e.g., 192 168 001 001 for 192.168.1.1)

SYSTEM GATEWAY

192.168.001.001

Cursor will return to this step on completion

of system gateway entry.

6) Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

SYSTEM RESTART

ARE YOU SURE? NO

7) Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to store and move cursor.

SYSTEM RESTART

ARE YOU SURE? NO

8) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-300 Samsung Business Communications

[831] MGI PARAMETERS

This MMC provides a mean to configure the Internet Protocol(IP) addressing of the MGI

card(s) in the system.

No Parameter Description

0 IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address for the MGI card.

1 GATEWAY Specifies the designated IP gateway address used for contacting

IP devices beyond the local subnet.

2 SUB MASK Specifies the IP subnet mask. This parameter is used by the system to

calculate the range of IP devices(subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’

of the MGI.(without having to go through the designated network IP

gateway)

3 IP TYPE Specifies if the system will be routing data over a public or private

network.

4 PUBLIC IP The MGI will originate communications, to IP phones and VoIP

connections outside the local network, using this IP address. If this

IP address sets 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255 or default value then this

MGI card uses private IP only. See System IP Type on MMC 830.

5 PUB PORT Public Port

6 VERSION No entry required. Used to indicate revision of MGI3 S/W.

8 CARD RESET Reboots MGI card.

9 IP VERSION Specidies MGI IP version is IPv4 / IPv6.

MGI PARAMETERS

- IP ADDRESS, GATEWAY, and SUB MASK—any changes to these parameters

will not be applied until the MGI card is reset.

- When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each

(octet) field. For example, 192.168.1.10 should be entered as 192 168 001 010.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-301

CONDITIONS

This MMC cannot be accessed unless there is an MGI card installed in the system.

DEFAULT DATA

IP ADDRESS: 1.1.1.1

GATEWAY: 1.1.1.1

SUB MASK: 255.255.255.0

IP TYPE: PRIVATE IP ONLY

PUBLIC IP: 1.1.1.1

PUB PORT: 00000

VERSION: V4

CARD RESET: NO

IP VERSION: IPv4

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 831.

Display shows the first MGI card.

[3801] IP ADDRESS

168.219. 76.101

2) Enter MGI number.

[3801] IP ADDRESS

168.219. 76.101

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter MGI parameter number.

[3801] IP ADDRESS

168.219. 76.101

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter MGI parameter.

[3801] IP ADDRESS

165. 10. 1.100

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-302 Samsung Business Communications

[832] VoIP ACCESS CODE

Provides a means to apply the Internet Protocol(IP) address to the VoIP gateway. This

MMC also assigns the number of channels that can be used for IP faxes.

TABLE(00~62): Outbound or Inbound table used for specific access codes. Usually when

the MCP2 card is used as a VoIP gateway, the Outbound table is used. The Inbound table is

used to determine the number of digits to receive before processing the call. Each table has

63 entries(00~62).

No Option Description

0 ACCESS DGT This is the access code that is used once the VoIP gateway is ac-

cessed; this directs a call based on the routing tables used. An access

code table then references an access code and correlates an IP ad-

dress to the access code for routing. A maximum of eight digits are

available.

1 DGT LENGTH This field requests the number of digits that are expected to be received

to make up the whole access code.

2 DEL.LENGTH This is the number of digits to delete after receiving the access code.

If no digits are deleted the access code will be sent as part of the call to

the destination to continue routing.

3 INSERT DGT Digit(s) to insert for routing at the destination. This can be used when

different numbering plans exist or if a dial 9 access is to be inserted in

the dialled digits.

4 IP TABLE 1 This is the first table referenced for routing the access code to an IP

address. The system has 64 IP tables(00~63) with 16 entries(00~15) in

each table. See MMC 833.

6 IP START This entry indicates where in a table to start looking for an IP code to

associate with the access code. This can be used to manage where to

start looking for an IP address in high traffic VoIP gateway applications.

For example: If IP address routing to the desired destination is known to

be in the last seven entries of a table, the IP START location would be 8.

IP address searching would start at entry 8.

7 SERVER USE This parameter determines whether a H.323 Gatekeeper will be utilized

to establish this connection.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-303

DEFAULT DATA

ACCESS DGT: 00~09(digits 0~9), 10~62 NONE

DGT LENGTH: 1

DEL.LENGTH: 1

INSERT DGT: NONE

IP TABLE 1: 00

IP START: NONE

SERVER USE: NO

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 832.

Display shows the outbound and first access

(O:00)ACCESS DGT

code.

2) Enter 0 for O(outbound) or 1 for I(inbound)

code table.

(O:00)ACCESS DGT

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter access code table number(00-62) via dial

keypad.

(O:01)ACCESS DGT

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter access code item(0-6) via dial keypad.

(O:01)ACCESS DGT

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

5) Enter access code data via dial keypad.

(O:01)ACCESS DGT

840

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to save and move cursor.

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 833 VOIP IP TABLE

MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS

MMC 836 H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS

MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-304 Samsung Business Communications

[833] VoIP IP TABLE

This MMC provides the IP addresses in tables pointed to by the VoIP code entry(MMC

832). There are 63 tables with up to 16 entries each. The destination IP address is required

to route dialled digits based on the access code and digits dialled. The IP entry field is di-

vided into 4 sections allowing modification of separate IP address fields.

When changing IP

When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for

each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010

DEFAULT DATA

TB(00) ENTRY(00): MMC 830 SYSTEM IP ADDR

ALL OTHERS: EMPTY

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 833.

Display shows the first table number.

TB(00) ENTRY (00)

0. 0. 0. 0

2) Enter table number(00-62) via dial keypad.

TB(00) ENTRY (00)

0. 0. 0. 0

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter entry number(00-15) via dial keypad.

TB(00) ENTRY (00)

0. 0. 0. 0

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter IP address via dial keypad.

Cursor will be return step 3.

TB(00) ENTRY (00)

165.213. 87.110

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC entry.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS

MMC 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE

MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS

MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS

MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-305

[834] H.323 OPTIONS

This MMC provides various VoIP support options. The options set in this MMC apply sys-

tem wide.

No Parameter Description Default

00 GATEWAY CALL ID Numeric identifier for system(up to 12 digits) 1234

01 H.323 FAST SETUP Enables or disables the H.323 Fast Start call setup

method.

ENABLE

02 CALLER ID TYPE This option controls the calling party identification

type. There are 3 possible selections:

0 GWID: shows the gateway call ID.

1 ANI: shows the calling station number

2 IP: shows the calling H.323 gateway IP ad-

dress.

ANI

06 TUNNELING Enables or disables the need for additional chan-

nels using H.245 signalling. Tunneling allows use

of the H.245 signal channel with the Q.931 chan-

nel.

ENABLE

07 DEFAULT DIL NO This allows programming of the default direct-in-

line number when digits are missing or incorrect on

an inbound call.

500

11 CODEC AUTO NEGO Enables or disables Auto CODEC Negotiation

when the MGI is used as an H.323 gateway.

14 SIGNAL PORT Indicate the port number for H.323 signalling and

sets a range of numbers allowed by firewall

equipment. The common and default IP path or

port used is 10000.

10000

17 SEND CLIP TABLE Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER(MMC 323), which

provides calling party identification when using the

MGI as a H.323 gateway. This provides station ID

of the calling station. A single-digit value corre-

sponding with the desired table in MMC 323

should be entered here. This is only used when

MMC 405 value is null.

18 INCOMING MODE This option selects how incoming calls are routed

when the MGI is used as a H.323 gateway.

0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING: Follows MMC 406

1 FOLLOW DID TRANS: Follows MMC 714

2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT: Follows MMC 724

DID TRANS

19 ALLOW GW CHECK When using a gatekeeper, this permits the H.323

gateway to check for gatekeeper presence.

DISABLE

20 CLIR WITH NUMBER When this option is enabled, the CLIP number is

sent to the network even if the CLIP restriction flag

is set.

DISABLE

21 USE OVERLAP DIAL Enables use of overlap dialing. ENBLOC

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-306 Samsung Business Communications

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 834.

Display shows the first option.

GATEWAY CALL ID

1234

2) Enter H.323 option number(00-20) via

dial keypad.

H.323 FAST SETUP

DISABLE

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter H.323 option data via dial keypad.

H.323 FAST SETUP

ENABLE

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-307

[835] MGI DSP OPTIONS

This MMC provides various MGI DSP options.

No Parameter Description Default

00 CODEC-FRAME Selects which audio CODEC compression will be used

and the transmission interval time of VoIP packets gen-

erated by the MGI card. MGI3 card supports

G.729A(8 K), G.729(8 K), G.711(64 K), and

G.723.1(5.3~6.4K).

G.729A –

20 Ms

01 ECHO CANCEL Enables or disables echo cancellation. This function

removes the echo that is generated by voice reflection

and packet delay.

ENABLE

02 SILENCE SUP This parameter determines whether silence suppression

is used. This prevents transmission during the silence

period of a call, and conserves bandwidth when en-

abled.

DISABLE

03 IN FILTER This option selects input filtering of the DSP. This should

always be set to ENABLE.

ENABLE

04 OUT FILTER This option selects output filtering of the DSP. This

should always be set to ENABLE.

ENABLE

05 INPUT GAIN PCM input gain value of DSP. The range is-

31 dB~32 dB(0~63).

This set the quality of PCM voice from the VoIP DSP to

the site. Default is 32(0 dB).

06 VOICE VOL This value selects the voice volume. The range is-

31 dB~31 dB(0~63).

32(0 dB).

08 JITTER OPT This is a scale value that introduces a intentional

buffer(delay) of the transmission of VoIP packets gener-

ated by the MGI card. This value determines whether

the focus is on packet loss or packet delay.

The range is 00~12.

09 MIN JITTER Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter

adjustment.

The range is 010~300 ms

30 ms

10 MAX JITTER Decides the maximum time to consider delay for jitter

adjustment.

The range is 010-300 ms.

150 ms

11 FAX ECM This option selects retry of Fax-over-IP if errors are de-

tected.

ENABLE

12 MAX FAX CNT This is the maximum number of channels that can be

simultaneously used for Fax-over-IP. The range is

00~16.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-308 Samsung Business Communications

(continued)

No Parameter Description Default

13 DTMF TYPE There are two types of DTMF transmission: INBAND,

which is industry standard(H.245) type DTMF transport,

and OUTBAND which is a Samsung proprietary

method.

OUTBAND

14 TOS FIELD An 8-bit binary value that will be used by external

routers, switches, etc,(that optionally support TOS-bit

prioritization) to identify the transport-priority value of

data packets generated by the MGI card. This value can

be left at the default value(00000) if your network infra-

structure does not support this method of bandwidth

management.

All bits 0

15 FAX RETRY This option selects retry count of Fax-over-IP if errors

are detected. The range is 0~4(0 means no retry).

16 RTP CHK TM This option selects the interval time for sending RTCP. 5 SEC

17 USE T38 711 If use T38 FAX, specifies 711 Codec use Enable

18 802.1 VLAN Set value (0000~4095) 0000

19 802.1 PRIOR Set value (0~7) 0

20 802.1Q Enable or disable for 802.1Q

(including 802.1 VLAN and 802.1 PRIOR)

DISABLE

21 EC GAIN Set EC gain value (18~38) 32

22 NLP Set NLP value (0~2) 0

23 EC TAIL LEN Set EC TAIL LEN (8~128) 064 MS

24 JIT PEROID Set JITTER PERIOD (1~10) 01

25 JIT DEL TM Set JITTER DELETE TIME (0~500) 250

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 835.

Display shows the first option.

MGI3:CODEC-FRAME

G.729A –40 MS

2) Enter MGI type(0-2) via dial keypad.

MGI3:CODEC-FRAME

G.729A –40 MS

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter MGI DSP parameter via dial keypad.

MGI3:CODEC-FRAME

G.729A –40 MS

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-309

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter MGI DSP parameter.

MGI3:CODEC-FRAME

G.729A –20 MS

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-310 Samsung Business Communications

[836] H.323 GK OPTIONS

Provides a means to set the H.323 gatekeeper parameters for an optional, external industry-

standard H.323 network gatekeeper, using Registration, Admissions and Status signalling

(RAS). The settings apply system wide.

When changing IP

When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for

each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010

No Parameter Description Default

00 GK CONNECTION This enables the H.323 call to connect to a gate-

keeper.

DISABLE

01 GK ROUTING This enables routing of calls through a gatekeeper. DISABLE

02 GK IP ADDRESS This is the gatekeeper’s IP address. 0.0.0.0

03 GK NAME This is the alphanumeric identifier of the gate-

keeper.(Up to 16 characters.)

‘Gatekeeper’

04 ALTER GK IP ADDR This provides an alternate gatekeeper address. 0.0.0.0

05 H.323 GATEWAY ID This is the H.323 identifier used by the MGI when

registering with the gatekeeper.(Up to 32 charac-

ters.)

‘OfficeServ’

06 E.164 GATEWAY

This is the E.164 identifier used by the H.323 trunk

when registering with the gatekeeper.(Up to 16

digits long.)

1234

07 GK KEEP ALIVE This is the timer that the MGI uses to acknowledge

the presence of the gatekeeper. The range is

000~999 seconds.

0 SEC

08 GK DOWN ROUTE This provides an alternate route if the primary gate-

keeper is down. Selections are PSTN or ALTER

GK.

PSTN

09 GK RAS TYPE Select if AUTO or MANUAL, depending on your

gatekeeper’s capabilities.

AUTO

10 URQ REASON

MODE

Select ON or OFF for use of Un-register Request

RAS(URQ) messages.

12 RRQ FAIL TIME Programs the time frame to re-send Registration

Request RAS(RRQ) messages to a gatekeeper.

The range is 1~99.

30 seconds

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-311

No Parameter Description Default

13 GRQ SEND Select ON or OFF for use of Gatekeeper RAS Re-

quest(GRQ) messages.

OFF

14 USE MULTI E.164 When this option is set to ENABLE, the E.164 identi-

fier can be assigned.

DISABLE

15 E.164 LISTS This is the E.164 identifier used by the H.323 trunk

when registering with the gatekeeper. There is a

maximum 32 E.164 identifier lists with a digit string

length of 16 digits.

NONE

16 GK REGISTERED Display the status of registration to the Gatekeeper. NO

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 836.

Display shows the first available option.

GK CONNECTION

DISABLE

2) Enter H.323 GK option via dial keypad.

GK ROUTING

DISABLE

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter H.323 GK option data.

GK ROUTING

ENABLE

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-312 Samsung Business Communications

[837] SIP OPTIONS

This MMC permits the adjustments of optional Session Initiation Protocol(SIP) trunk pa-

rameters. The MCP supports SIP and H.323 on a per-call-per-port basis. The settings are

system wide.

When changing IP

When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for

each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010

No Parameter Description Default

00 GATEWAY

CALL ID

Numeric system identifier(up to 12 digits) ‘1234’

01 CALLER ID

TYPE

This option controls the calling party identification type.

There are 3 possible selections:

0 GWID: shows the gateway call ID.

1 ANI: shows the calling station number.(default)

2 IP: shows the calling H.323 gateway IP address.

ANI

05 DEFAULT DIL

This allows programming of the default direct-in-line

number when digits are missing or incorrect on an in-

bound call.

5000

06 UDP PORT:

TRUNK

Sets the UDP port used on a SIP trunk call. 5060

07 UDP PORT:

PHONE

Sets the UDP port used on a SIP phone call. 5070

09 RE-TRANS.

T1 TIME

The initial re-transmission time if there is no answer,

based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is

0~9900 ms.

500 ms

10 RE-TRANS.

T2 TIME

The maximum re-transmission time if there is no answer,

based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is

0~9900 ms.

4000 ms

11 RE-TRANS.

T4 TIME

The time the User Agent Server waits after receiving the

ACK message. Based on the RFC2543 specification. The

range is 0~9900 ms.

5000 ms

12 GENERAL

RING TM

The server retransmits the response for this length of

time until the requested retransmission is received. For

example, the wait time after sending 200 OK for INFO.

The range is 0~99900 ms.

5000 ms

13 INVITE LING

After the client sends ACK for the INVITE Final Response, the

client cannot confirm if the server received the ACK message.

The client waits for this length of time after sending ACK

for the Final Response. The range is 0~99900 ms.

5000 ms

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-313

(continued)

No Parameter Description Default

14 PROVISIONAL

TIME

After receiving the Provision Response, the User Agent

waits for this length of time until Timeout ends. The range

is 0~999900 ms.

180000 m

15 INV.NO RESP

TIME

Before sending Cancel for the Invite Request, the User

Agent waits for this length of time. The range is

0~99900 ms.

5000 ms

16 GEN.NO

RESP TIME

Before sending Cancel for General Request, the User

Agent waits for this length of time. The range is

0~99900 ms.

5000 ms

17 REQ.RETRY

TIME

After sending General Request, the User Agent waits for

the Final Response for this length of time. The range is

0~99900 ms.

5000 ms

18 SIP SERVER

ENABLE

Sets ENABLE or DISABLE to use an optional, external

industry-standard SIP Server.

DISABLE

20 SIP SERVER

Sets SIP server IP address. 0.0.0.0.

28 SIP SERVER

PORT

Sets the port to use on the SIP Server. 5060

29 SIGNAL PORT Indicates the port number for SIP signalling and sets a

range of numbers allowed by firewall equipment. The

common and default IP path or port used is 10000.

10000

32 SEND CLIP

TABLE

Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER(MMC 323), which pro-

vides calling party identification when using the MGI as a

SIP gateway.

This provides station ID of the calling station. A single-

digit value corresponding to the desired table in MMC

323 should be entered here. This is only used when

MMC 405 value is null.

33 INCOMING

MODE

This option selects how incoming calls are routed when

the MGI is used as a SIP gateway.

0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING: Follows MMC 406

1 FOLLOW DID TRANS: Follows MMC 714(default)

2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT: Follows MMC 724

FOLLOW DID

TRANS

34 ALLOW GW

CHECK

When using a gatekeeper, this permits the SIP gateway

to check for gatekeeper presence.

DISABLE

35 REGIST T-GW

NUM

System number when registering as a trunking gateway. 4100

36 REGIST S-GW

NUM

System number when registering as a gateway for sta-

tions.

4200

37 CLIR WITH

NUMBER

When this option is enabled, the CLIP number is sent to

the network even if the CLIP restriction flag is set.

DISABLE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-314 Samsung Business Communications

(continued)

No Parameter Description Default

38 SIP

REGISTERED

Display the status of registration to the SIP Server.

39 GW SERVICE When using SIP Server, if this option is ENABLE, then

number.

DISABLE

40 GW DOMAIN

NAME

Domain name for authorization when using SIP Server

41 GW USER ID User ID for authorization when using SIP Server

42 REGISTER

PSWD

This password must be used to register SIP Server -

43 REG EXPIRE

TIME

This tims value is expire time. 000000 SEC

44 SESSION

TIMER

Settion Timer Value can be set.

(0:NONE, 1:UPDATE, 2:REINVITE)

NONE

45 SERVER

VENDOR

SIP server vender value can be set.

(0:IETF, 1:IMS, 2:BroadWorks, 3:Xener, 4:Telcoware,

5:SEC-IMS)

46 LINK TEST This value is for Link test between Proxy Server and Of-

ficeServ system.

(0:NONE, 1:OPTIONS)

NONE

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 834.

Display shows the first option.

GATEWAY CALL ID

1234

2) Enter SIP option number 00-38(e.g., 01) via dial

keypad.

CALLER ID TYPE

ANI

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter SIP option data via dial keypad.

CALLER ID TYPE

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-315

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER

MMC 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

MMC 306 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

MMC 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE

MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-316 Samsung Business Communications

[839] SIP USER

This MMC is used to register sip user and password.

DEFAULT DATA

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 839.

Display shows the first table number.

REG-01 : USER NUM

2) press Right Soft button to move cursor. REG-01 : USER NUM

3) Enter registration number(01-100) via dial keypad.

REG-01 : USER NUM

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter table number(0,1) via dial keypad.

REG-01 : USER NUM

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5) Enter user number or password via dial keypad.

REG-01 : USER NUM

press Right Soft button to save

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC entry.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-317

[838] PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES

This MMC is used to select which SYSTEM IP Address(PRIVATE or PUBLIC) is used to

connect other devices via an H.323 or SIP trunk. The device that use the PRIVATE IP Ad-

dress assigned in this MMC, the PRIVATE SYSTEM IP Address will be used to connect

the device.

When changing IP

When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for

each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010

DEFAULT DATA

TABLE(80): 165.213.255.255

ALL OTHERS: 0.0.0.0

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 838.

Display shows the first table number.

PRIVATE IP (01)

0. 0. 0. 0

2) Enter table number(01-80) via dial keypad.

PRIVATE IP (01)

0. 0. 0. 0

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter IP address via dial keypad.

Cursor will return to step 3.

PRIVATE IP (01)

165.213. 87.110

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC entry.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS

MMC 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE

MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS

MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-318 Samsung Business Communications

[840] IP PHONE INFORMATION

This MMC provides a means to register IP phones with the OfficeServ 7100 system. Dur-

ing registration, the IP and MAC addresses are also registered. The User ID and Password

must match the table entry in this MMC for the IP phone to be registered. The system de-

fault phone numbers are 3201~3299 and default User IDs match the default station num-

bers. The system default password is 1234. IP phones must be individually programmed

with a User ID and Password in order to register with the system.

No Option Description Default

00 USER ID This is the ID the IP phone must match to register

with the OfficeServ 7100 system.(alphanumeric)

First 99 IP phones

are 3201~3299,

others are EMPTY.

01 USER PSWD This is the password the IP phone must have to reg-

ister with the OfficeServ 7100 system.

(alphanumeric)

‘1234’

02 IP ADDR This is the IP address of the IP phone when regis-

tered with the system.(Read only)

0.0.0.0.

03 MAC ADDR This is MAC address of the IP phone when regis-

tered with the system.(Read only)

FFFFFFFFFFFF

04 SIG PORT This is the IP UDP port of the IP phone when regis-

tered with the system.(Read only) This information

will be needed when traversing NAT routers, fire-

walls, etc.

6000

05 VOICE PORT This is the IP RTP port of the IP phone when regis-

tered with the system.(Read only) This information

will be needed when traversing NAT routers, fire-

walls, etc.

9000

06 IP TYPE This is the type of IP network used: PRIVATE or

PUBLIC.

PRIVATE

07 DSP TYPE This selects which CODEC this phone’s DSP will use.

G.729A(low bandwidth) or G.711(high bandwidth).

This data uses IP phone to IP phone connection

only; others follow MGI CODEC type.

G.729A

08 PHONE TYPE This is the type of IP phone used, SAMSUNG or SIP

(future). Use SAMSUNG.

SAMSUNG

09 REGIST CLR This is used to clear the registration of a particular

IP phone. This is similar to unplugging and plugging

in the phone and is useful for maintenance.

10 FRAME

COUNT

This value determines the transmission interval time

of VoIP packets generated by the IP phone. This

data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN =

PHONE DATA only. The range is 10~40 ms.

20 ms

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-319

(continued)

No Option Description Default

11 JITTER BUF Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter

adjustment. This data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP

PARA DOWN = PHONE DATA only. The range is

10~90 ms.

20 m

12 TOS FIELD An 8-bit binary value that will be used by external

routers, switches, etc,(that optionally support TOS-

bit prioritization) to identify the transport-priority

value of data packets generated by the IP phone.

This value can be left at the default value(00000) if

your network infrastructure does not support this

method of bandwidth management. This data uses

MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN = PHONE DATA

only.

All bits 0

13 S/W VERSION Display IP phone software version.(Read only) -

14 S/W UPGRADE This is used as IP phone software upgrade request

command. When YES is selected and Right Soft

button is pressed, the system requests IP phone

software upgrade with TFTP IP address.

15 TIME ZONE Allows remote IP phones to display own time zone. 00.00

16 PUBLIC TO

PUBLIC

When this option is set to USE MGI, the MGI can be

allocated between remote IPs in the same private

zone.

NOT USE MGI

17 SIG TYPE This option can change UDP/TCP signal type for

IPs.(ITP V3.xx only supports the TCP signal type. If

TCP is set and ITP V2.xx attempts to connect, the

TCP signal type will change from TCP to UDP

automatically.)

UDP

18 PRIVATE IP Displays private IP address of remote IP phone allo-

cated by phone’s router.

19 VIDEO DSP This option is codec value o f Video IP phone

(0 : MPEG4, 1 : H.263)

H.263

20 VIDEO SIZE This option is for video size

(0 : CIF, 2 : QCIF)

CIF

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-320 Samsung Business Communications

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 840.

Display shows:

[3201]USER ID

3201

2) Enter IP phone number via dial keypad.

[3210]USER ID

3210

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter IP phone option number via dial keypad.

[3210]DSP TYPE

G.729A

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter option data via dial keypad.

[3210]DSP TYPE

G.711

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 615 MGI GROUP

MMC 616 MGI USER

MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS

MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS

MMC 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS

MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-321

[841] SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

This MMC provides various proprietary Samsung VoIP and IP integration options.

The options set in this MMC apply system wide.

No Option Description Default

00 PHONE VERSION Sets running IP-based phone and new phone soft-

ware version with the system.

0 LARGE DGP: Large LCD phone

1 LARGE ITP: Large LCD IP-based phone

2 2LINE ITP2: 2-line LCD IP-based phone

3 WIPM APPL: Wireless IP-based mobile phone

software.

4 SOFT PC: IP phone emulation on PC (Soft-

Phone application)

5 SOFT PDA: IP phone emulation on PDA (Soft-

Phone application)

8 WIPM BOOT: Wireless IP-based mobile phone

boot program.

9 SOFT MENU: Soft menu version

0000

01 PHONE TFTP IP Sets phone software upgrade TFTP server IP ad-

dress.

0.0.0.0

Defines the method that IP-based phones use to

0 TYPE:

a) SYS PSWD: System will authenticate the

IP-based phones with the value in ITP

REGISTRATION: PSWD parameter(see 1,

below).

B) PHONE PSWD: System will authenticate

the IP-based phones according to entries

made in MMC 840.

c) DISABLE: System will not authenticate

IP-based phones.

SYS PSWD

02 ITP REGISTRATION

1 PSWD: This is a system-wide password used

for registration of IP phones.

‘1234’

Sets EasySet link via LAN option with the system.

0 PSWD: This is a system-wide password used

for authentication of EasySet server.

‘1234’

03 EASYSET OPTION

1 ALIVE: This is an EasySet link via LAN alive

check timer.

0 SEC

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-322 Samsung Business Communications

(continued)

No Option Description Default

Sets CTI link via LAN option with the system.

0 SMDR REPORT: Sets YES or NO for SMDR data

to CTI link via LAN.

1 UCD REPORT: Sets YES or NO for UCD data to

CTI link via LAN.

04 CTI LINK OPTION

2 ALIVE: This is a CTI link via LAN alive check

timer. If this is set to 0, the system will not

check link alive.

300 SEC

Sets IP phone DSP parameter system wide.

0 M-FRAME: This value determines the trans-

mission interval time of VoIP packets generated

by the IP phone. This data uses DOWN = SYS

DATA only(see 3, below). The range is

10~40 ms.

10 ms

1 JITTER: Decides the minimum time to consider

delay for jitter adjustment. This data uses

DOWN = SYS DATA only(see 3, below). The

range is 10~90 ms.

20 ms

2 TOS: An 8-bit binary value that will be used by

external routers, switches, etc,(that optionally

support TOS-bit prioritization) to identify the

transport-priority value of data packets gener-

ated by the IP phone. This value can be left at

the default value(00000) if your network infra-

structure does not support this method of

bandwidth management. This data uses DOWN

= SYSTEM DATA only(see 3, below).

All bits 0

05 ITP DSP PARA

3 DOWN: Determines whether system-wide data

or individual phone data is used for DSP control

of IP-based phones.

a) SYSTEM DATA: System-wide data will be

used.(MMC 841)

b) PHONE DATA: Individual phone data will

be used.(MMC 840)

SYS DATA

06 ITP TX GAIN/HSET Sets IP-based phone Handset TX gain value of

each level.

Depends on

country

07 ITP RX GAIN/HSET Sets IP-based phone Handset RX gain value of

each level.

Depends on

country

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-323

(continued)

No Option Description Default

08 ITP TX GAIN/MIC Sets IP-based phone MIC gain value of each level. Depends on

country

09 ITP RX GAIN/SPKR Sets IP-based phone SPKR gain value of each

level.

Depends on

country

Sets IP-based phone software upgrade option with

the system.

0 TYPE:

a) MMC COMMAND: IP-based phone soft-

ware upgraded manually in MMC 840.

b) PHONE CON: IP-based phone software

upgraded automatically when phone con-

nected.

c) AUTO TIME: IP-based phone software up-

graded automatically at set time.

MMC

COMMAND

1 START(HHMM): IP-based phone software

automatic upgrade start time.

0000(Disable)

10 ITP VERS

UPGRADE

2 INTERVAL: IP-based phone software automatic

upgrade interval time.

10 seconds.

11 MGI ALIVE PERIOD Set the time interval of checking the link connec-

tion of MGI card and the system.

13 LICENSE KEY Insert the license key to enable SoftPhone connec-

tion.

NONE

14 LICENSE STATUS The status(Valid or Invalid) of the inserted license

key.

15 DATA CARD IPC Set the value(YES or NO) to support IPC by DATA

CARD

YES

16 MP MGI/VM KEY Insert the license key to enable MGI, VM ports -

17 MP MGI/VM STATUS The status of the inserted MP MGI/VM license key.

1. MGI ALLOW (0~8)

2. VMS ALLOW (0~4)

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-324 Samsung Business Communications

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 841.

Display shows the first available option.

PHONE VERSION

LARGE DGP: 0000

2) Enter option category number 0-13 via dial

Keypad.(e.g., 2)

ITP REGISTRATION

TYPE: SYS PSWD

Press Volume button to make select and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter option number via dial keypad.

ITP REGISTRATION

PSWD: 1234

Press Volume button to make select and

press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter option data.

ITP REGISTRATION

PSWD: 8228

Press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 199 SHOW LICENSE STATUS

MMC 840 IP PHONE INFORMATION

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-325

[845] WLAN PARAMETERS

This MMC modifies the WLAN parameters.

The SYSTEM KEY is used internally to distinguish between systems when registering a

terminal. The default value is ‘00000’, but this must be changed to another value to enable

the use of WLAN terminals. In addition, the SYSTEM KEY serves as an identification ID

when a WLAN terminal connects to the WBS24.

The default value of the SYSTEM ID, ‘WBS24’, must also be changed to another value in

order to use multiple systems in one area. The DNS setting for WLAN is additionally de-

scribed in this MMC.

Set the network configuration for WBS24 by setting the IP assignment, Netmask and

Gateway. These settings should be compatible with the Intranet since the network configu-

ration setting is essential for data service. In addition, the RF frequency for WBS24 should be se-

lected. Currently up to 14 frequencies may be selected.

Session Initiation Protocol(SIP) variables used for the WBS24(Basic) can be defined.

WLAN PARAMETER

No Parameter Description Default

05 CODEC LIST CODEC that can be used for VoIP calls between

WBS24 and terminal. G.711u, G.711a, G.726, and

G.729 can all be assigned.

CODEC 1: G.729

CODEC 2: NONE

CODEC 3: NONE

CODEC 4: NONE

06 RF CHANNEL Set a RF CHANNEL value that can be used by

WBS.

USE CH 1: 01

USE CH 2: 06

USE CH 3: 11

USE CH 4: 00

USE CH 5: 00

USE CH 6: 00

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-326 Samsung Business Communications

(continued)

No Parameter Description Default

07 VERSION WLAN module version. Version

20 MAX AP CH. Set the maximum channel number of AP 00

21 WLAN SWTCH Support WLAN switch function DISABLE

SIP PARAMETER

No Parameter Description Default(ms)

0 RE-TRANS T1 When using an unreliable transmission protocol such

as UDP, retransmission is required when no reply is

received. RE-TRANS.T1 TIME is the initial retrans-

mission interval defined in RFC2543.

500

1 RE-TRANS T2 Maximum retransmission interval defined in RFC

2543

4000

2 RE-TRANS T4 RFC 2543 defines this parameter for various pur-

poses. For example, this parameter can be used as

the time waited by User Agent Server after receiving

ACK message in an unreliable transmission proto-

col.

5000

3 GEN RING TM When using an unreliable transmission protocol, the

server cannot be sure if the client has received the

last reply. Thus, the server must retransmit the reply

for this length of time until it receives the requested

retransmission. For example, this parameter can be

used as the waiting time after sending 200 OK for

INFO.

6000

4 INV RING TM When using an unreliable transmission protocol, the

client cannot verify if the server has received the

ACK returned to the server for the INVITE Final Re-

sponse. The client waits for this length of time after

sending the ACK for the Final Response.

1000

5 GEN NO RESP Waiting time before cancelling SIP related Request. 5000

6 INV NO RESP Waiting time before cancelling SIP INVITE Request. 6000

7 REQ

RETRY

Waiting time for receiving final response for SIP re-

lated Request.

5000

8 PROVISIONAL On receiving Provision Response, the User Agent

must wait for this length of time until Timeout.

180000

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-327

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 845. WLAN: SYSTEM ID

WBS24

2) When the cursor is on WLAN, press Volume button

and select WLAN, WBS, or SIP.

WLAN: SYSTEM ID

WBS24

3) Press Right Soft button to move to the SYSTEM ID.

When the cursor is below SYSTEM ID, press

WLAN: SYSTEM ID

WBS24

Volume button to select the setting menu for WLAN.

4) Set the items below at the WLAN menu.

SYSTEM ID: Use the Soft button to move the

cursor and enter the new WLAN SYSTEM ID to

WLAN: SYSTEM ID

WBS24

Press Soft button and proceed to next register status.

00000

0. 0. 0. 0

Select the voice codec. Select from G711a, G711u,

and G729 CODEC.

WLAN: CODEC LIST

CODEC 1: G.711a

Numbers are given from 1 to 4 based on priority.

Select the usable RF channel. Maximum six channels

can be used for a system.

WLAN: RF CHANNEL

USE CH 1: 01

(Default RF channel: 1, 6, 11)

Used to change the TX POWER of all WBS.

(Default: LEVEL 1~4)

WLAN: WBS TX PWR

DEFAULT

Used to clear registration information of all WBS. WLAN: CLR WBSREG

ARE YOU SURE?NO

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-328 Samsung Business Communications

5) Set the items below at the WBS24 menu. The se-

lected WBS is as set in MMC 849(SELECT AP

TYPE option) i.e. CWBS=COMBO WBS,

BWBS=BASIC WBS.

0. 0. 0. 0

255.255.255. 0

0. 0. 0. 0

Displays the WBS24 MAC ADDRESS. CWBS1 : MAC ADDR

FFFF FFFF FFFF

Displays the WBS24 VERSION. CWBS1 : VERSION

Displays the WBS24 STATUS. CWBS1 : STATUS

OFF

channel must be selected from the pre-assigned

CWBS1 : RF CHAN

USE CH 1:01

RF channels in WLAN RF CHANNELS).

(Default: LEVEL 1~4)

CWBS1 : TX POWER

DEFAULT

Used to clear the WBS parameter. CWBS1 : PARA CLR

ARE YOU SURE?NO

6) Set the items below at the menu.

The initial re-transmission time if no answer,

SIP : RE-TRANS T1

000500MS

based on the RFC2543 specification.

The range is 0-9900 ms.(Default: 500 ms)

The maximum re-transmission time if no answer,

SIP : RE-TRANS T2

004000MS

based on the RFC2543 specification.

The range is 0-9900 ms.(Default: 4000 ms)

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-329

Server waits after receiving the ACK message.

SIP : RE-TRANS T4

005000MS

Based on the RFC2543 specification.

The range is 0-9900 ms.(Default: 5000 ms)

the response for this length of time until the

SIP : GEN RING TM

006000MS

requested retransmission is received. For example,

the wait time after sending 200 OK for INFO.

The range is 0-99900 ms.(Default: 6000 ms)

ACK for the INVITE Final Response, the client

SIP : INV RING TM

001000MS

can not confirm if the server received the ACK mes-

sage. The client waits this long after sending ACK for

the Final Response.

The range is 0-99900 ms.(Default: 1000 ms)

for General Request, the User Agent waits this long.

SIP : GEN NO RESP

005000MS

The range is 0-99900 ms.(Default: 5000 ms)

for the Invite Request, the User Agent waits this

SIP : INV NO RESP

006000MS

long.

The range is 0-99900 ms.(Default: 5000 ms)

quest, he User Agent waits for the Final Response

SIP : REQ RETRY

005000MS

for this length of time.

The range is 0-99900 ms Default is 5000 ms

Provision Response, the User Agent waits this long

SIP : PROVISIONAL

180000MS

until Timeout ends.

The range is 0-999900 ms.(Default: 180000 ms)

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION

MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST

MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-330 Samsung Business Communications

[846] WIP INFORMATION

This MMC sets up the WIP-5000M wireless terminal information.

No Parameter Description Default

00 REGISTERED Shows if the terminal is registered. NO

01 LOCATED Shows if the terminal is connected to the system. DETACH

02 PHONE TYPE Shows the type of the terminal. NONE

03 WLI NUMBER Number of WLI connected to the WBS24 servic-

ing the terminal

04 WBS NUMBE Number of WBS24 servicing the terminal -

05 IP OFFSET Location of IP pool of the terminal IP -

06 IP ADDRESS Terminal IP address 0.0.0.0

07 MAC ADDR Terminal MAC address 0000 0000 0000

08 USER ID User ID per terminal 1212

09 PASSWORD Password of terminal user 0000

10 INSERT DGT If five or more numbers are entered into the WIP

terminal, this INSERT DGT is prefixed to the

numbers, provided the entered numbers do not

start with a C.O. number, C.O. group number,

LCR, network LCR, or function code.

DEFAULT DATA

SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 846. [3301] REGISTERED

2) Dial the WIP number.

[3301] REGISTERED

Press Volume button to select station and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Set the items below at the menu.

Confirm the status of terminal registration for each

phone number.

[3301] REGISTERED

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-331

Displays the location of the registered terminal. [3301] LOCATED

DETACH

Displays the PHONE TYPE of the registered termi-

nal.

[3301] PHONE TYPE

Displays the WLI NUMBER of the registered ter-

minal.(currently not used)

[3301] WLI NUMBER

Displays the WBS NUMBER of the registered ter-

minal.

[3301] WBS NUMBER

Displays the IP OFFSET of the registered terminal. [3301] IP OFFSET

Displays the IP ADDRESS of the registered termi-

nal.

[3301] IP ADDRESS

Displays the MAC ADDRESS of the registered ter-

minal.

[3301] MAC ADDR

1212

0000

(These digits will be automatically inserted in

[3301] INSERT DGT

front of user dialling digits when there are more

than 4 digits and they do not start with the trunk ac-

cess code or feature code.)

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST

MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-332 Samsung Business Communications

[848] WLAN IP/MAC LIST

This MMC is used when viewing the IP list assigned to WLAN, or when creating a new IP

list. This IP address is automatically assigned to WIP-5000M during a new registration

procedure. If the IP address is already assigned, the assigned terminal number will be

shown in the USED field.

Also, the MMC is used to set MAC addresses in the terminal in order to use the wireless

LAN.(not yet implemented)

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button, and enter 848. IP:001 USED:

0. 0. 0. 0

2) Select the menu.(0: IP LIST, 1: MAC LIST) IP:001 USED:

0. 0. 0. 0

3) Select the table number. IP:001 USED:

_ 0. 0. 0. 0

4) Enter the IP ADDRESS. IP:001 USED:

168. 0. 0. 0

5) A number next to USED indicates the terminal num-

ber to which the IP ADDRESS was assigned.

IP:001 USED:3301

168.219.149. 5

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION

MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-333

[849] WLAN CONFIGURATION

This MMC is used to set the WLAN configuration.

Parameter Description

WIP REGIST CLEAR Used to clear the registration of WIP. FORCED mode clearing is used

when the device is not connected normally(e.g., device broken), other-

wise the NORMAL mode clearing can be used.

WBS WEP SERVICE Enable or disable the WEP(Wired Equivalent Privacy) feature.

WEP KEY Assign the WEP key.(13 characters only)

STATIC WBS IP Select the use of Static WBS IP.

STATIC WIP IP Select the use of Static WIP IP.

SELECT AP Select if using DUAL AP or BASIC APs

DEFAULT DATA

WIP REGIST CLEAR: FORCED

WBS WEP SERVICE: DISABLE

WEP KEY: NONE

STATIC WBS IP: DISABLE

STATIC WIP IP: DISABLE

SELECT AP TYPE: BASIC AP(DEPENDS ON COUNTRY)

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button, and press 849. ENTER PASSWORD

2) Enter the PASSCODE.

(This PASSCODE is assigned in MMC 202

ENTER PASSCODE

****

WLAN REGST)

3) Select ENABLE to register a terminal. REGISTER VoWLAN

ENABLE

4) Select WIP REGIST CLEAR to clear the registration

status for a terminal.

WIP REGIST CLEAR

3301:FORCED

5) Select the WEP KEY setting when ENCRYPTION

is selected.

WBS WEP SERVICE

DISABLE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-334 Samsung Business Communications

6) Enter WEP KEY values when the WBS WEP SER-

VICE is enabled.(13 characters only)

WEP KEY

7) Select ENABLE to use the static WBS IP. STATIC WBS IP

DISABLE

8) Select ENABLE to use the static WIP IP. STATIC WIP IP

DISABLE

9) Select AP TYPE of the system. If you change the AP

type, the system must be restarted.

SELECT AP TYPE

COMBO AP

SELECT AP TYPE

RESET SYSTEM?NO

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION

MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-335

[850] SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY

This MMC is used for system resource display.(used and free resources) This is a READ-

ONLY MMC.

0. DTMFR DSP’S

1. CID DSP’S

2. R2MFC DSP’S

3. CONF GROUP’S

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 850.

Display shows:

DTMFR DSP’S

USE:000 FREE:008

2) Enter the option number.(0-3)

CID DSP’S

USE:000 FREE:008

Press Volume button to select.

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-336 Samsung Business Communications

[851] ALARM REPORTING

This MMC is used to view, store, print or clear system alarms. Two levels of faults are dis-

played via an alarm code: major alarms and minor alarms. Major alarms codes are usually

service affecting and require a certified technician to determine the fault. A minor alarm in-

dicates a fault that may or may not be service affecting and usually does not seriously de-

grade the system’s operating capabilities.

The alarm buffer holds up to 100 alarms on a First In-First Out(FIFO) basis. Alarms pro-

vide a date and time stamp based on the system time. If applicable, the hardware cabinet,

port, and/or slot will be displayed. If an ALARM SIO port is programmed(MMC 804),

alarm information can be printed on demand and as it is provided.

ALARM REPORTING OPTIONS(Select one of the options)

No Option Description

0 VIEW ALARMS View alarm buffer.

1 OVERFLOW

CONTROL

Determines buffer control when buffer is full.

0 OVERWRITTEN: When buffer is full, the oldest entry in

buffer is overwritten.(Default.)

1 STOP RECORDING: When buffer is full, stop recording

alarms.

2 CLEAR ALARM BUF Clears alarm buffer.

3 PRINT ALARM BUF Prints contents of alarm buffer to the assigned alarm IO port.

ALARM CODE DEFINITION

See Alarm Code Definitions in MMC 852.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-337

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 851.

Display shows:

SYS ALARM REPORT

VIEW ALARMS

2) Enter desired option.

SYS ALARM REPORT

VIEW ALARMS

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) System displays the alarm count number, date and

time stamp.

[00] 02/18 14:30

MNF02 C1-S02

Alarm type and cause code will display.

4) Press Volume button to scroll through other alarms.

SYS ALARM REPORT

VIEW ALARMS

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-338 Samsung Business Communications

[852] SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

This MMC allows the assignment of system alarms to ring and display on stations that

have an Alarm key assigned. The Alarm key is assigned in MMC 722(Station Key Pro-

gramming). Alarm key programming is tenant wide(tenants 1 and 2). Alarms not pro-

grammed to report to the system Alarm key will still be retained in the maintenance alarm

buffer for Alarm Reporting(MMC 851). The alarm buffer holds up to 100 alarms on a First

In-First Out(FIFO) basis. Pressing the Alarm key will silence the audible alarm until an-

other alarm is generated by the system. Alarm conditions that have multiple causes(e.g.,

PRI errors and synchronization loss) will print all associated alarm information if an SIO

port is programmed as an ALARM port. The specific fault alarm data can be displayed via

MMC 851, System Alarm Reporting.

Alarm Notification

Alarm Notification Off/On(0/1) determines if the alarm provides a visual and audi-

ble notification to the System Alarm key station(s). Pressing the System Alarm

key and the release key will silence the audible alarm only at the station that

pressed the System Alarm key and the release key. See alarm displays table for

assignments.

Alarm Code Definitions:

No Code Alarm Name Definition

- MJA-- MCP2 Error System Fault

01 MJA01 POR Restart MCP2 restart process has been executed via power on

restart.(POR)

02 MJA02 Soft Restart MCP2 restart process has been executed via button reset.

03 MJA03 Mem Reset The system RAM has been cleared via manual program-

ming(PCMMC or KMMC) resulting in a system reset.

04 MJA04 MCP Reset The MCP2 has software exception error.

Alarm data = Reason

- BUS ERR: Restart Bus Error

- ADDR.ERR: Restart Address Error

- ILLEGAL: Restart Illegal Opcode

- ZERO DIVID: Restart Zero Divide

- PRIVILEGE: Restart Privilege Violation

- ENDL LOOP: Restart Endless Loop

05 MJA05 LCP Reset The SCP2 or LCP2 has reset

Alarm data = Cabinet(1, 2 or 3)

06 MJA06 PCM Switching A fault has occurred in the Switching Control

Alarm data = MCP BASE, ESM: 1, ESM: 2 or ESM: 3

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-339

(continued)

No Code Alarm Name Definition

- MJB-- LCP/TASK Error LCP or TASK Fault

08 MJB01 HDLC Com Error Communications to LCP lost or faulty.

09 MJB02 Memory Alarm 1 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the

MCP2.

10 MJB03 Memory Alarm 2 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in cabinet 1

SCP2.

11 MJB04 Memory Alarm 3 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in cabinet 2

LCP2.

12 MJB05 Memory Alarm 4 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in cabinet 3

LCP2.

13 MJB06 IPC MSGQ Over IPC TX queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.

Alarm data = IPC Queue type

(MCP-LAN, MCP-SCP, MCP-LCP1, MCP-LCP2)

14 MJB07 Task MSGQ Over Task MSG queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.

Alarm data = Error Task

MJC-- DSP Error System DSP Fault

16 MJC01 DTMF Fault An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system

DTMF resources.

Alarm data = DTMF Receiver DSP position

17 MJC02 Tone Fault An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system

tone resources.

Alarm data = TONE Receiver DSP position.

25 MJC10 AA-DTMF Fault An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card

DTMF resources.

Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

26 MJC11 AA-MFR Rec An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card

DTMF resources has recovered.

Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

27 MJC12 E911 Restart The E911 card has restarted.

Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

28 MJC13 E911 Block The E911 card has blocked because the system

detects the card does not work correctly.

Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

31 MJC16 WLI Restart The WLI card has restarted.

Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

32 MJC17 WLI Block The WLI card has blocked because the system

detects the card does not work correctly.

Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-340 Samsung Business Communications

(continued)

No Code Alarm Name Definition

- MJD-- DTRK Error ISDN or E1 card Fault

33 MJD01 Sync Failure Clocking on TEPRI cards has become asynchronous.

34 MJD02 Sync Recovery Clocking on TEPRI cards has become synchronous.

35 MJD03 Red Alarm Locally detected loss of PCM carrier on TEPRI card for

more than 250 ms.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

36 MJD04 Red Alarm Rec PCM carrier detected locally on TEPRI cards.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

37 MJD05 Yellow Alarm Remotely detected failure transmitted in frame on

TEPRI card.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

38 MJD06 Yellow Alarm

Rec

Remotely detected failure restored transmitted on

TEPRI card.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

39 MJD07 Blue Alarm All 1's being transmitted on facility on TEPRI card.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

40 MJD08 Blue Alarm Rec A blue alarm condition has been cleared.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

41 MJD09 Bit Error Alarm Alarm is activated when the error rate exceeds 1 x 10-6

errors. Note: 1x10-6 is threshold for minor alarm, 1 x 10-3 is

threshold for major alarm errors on E1, PRI or BRI.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

42 MJD10 NTWRK Event An Implausible event has occurred on the PRI or BRI

Network digital line. Protocols do not match or sub-

scriber ID mismatch.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

43 MJD11 SPID Init Error The BRI received an error from the network.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)

44 MJD12 SPID Init Rec The BRI has recovered from an error on the network

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)

45 MJD13 LPBK Error Internal on demand loopback failed.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)

46 MJD14 LPBK Recovery Internal on demand loopback test passed.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)

47 MJD15 BRI DL Unavail A BRI data link is out of service.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)

48 MJD16 BRI DL Recovery A BRI data link is back in service.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)

49 MJD17 RAM Error An error has occurred in the TEPRI or BRI card RAM.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-341

(continued)

No Code Alarm Name Definition

- MJD-- DTRK Error ISDN or E1 card Fault

50 MJD18 E1 Restart The E1 card has restarted.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

51 MJD19 PRI Restart The PRI card has restarted.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

52 MJD20 BRI Restart The BRI card has restarted.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

53 MJD21 PCM Loss Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

54 MJD22 PCM Recovery Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

- MJE-- MGI Error MGI card Fault

55 MJE01 MGI Restart The MGI card has restarted.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

56 MJE02 MGI Stop The MGI card has stoped.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

57 MJE03 MGI IP Duplicate The MGI card IP address is duplicated.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

58 MJE04 MGI NTWK Error The MGI card has blocked because the system detects

the card doesn’t respond via network link.

External ping test.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

59 MJE05 MGI NTWK Rec The MGI card has restarted because the system detects

the card does respond via network link.

External ping test.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

60 MJE06 MGI DSP Error The MGI card DSP has blocked because the system

detects the card DSP does not run correctly.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

61 MJE07 MGI DSP Run The MGI card DSP has restarted because the system

detects the card DSP runs correctly.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

62 MJE08 WBS Disconnect Indicates the WBS is disconnected.

Alarm Data = CWBS:xx or BWBS:xx

63 MJE09 WBS connect Indicates the WBS is connected.

Alarm Data = CWBS:xx or BWBS:xx

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-342 Samsung Business Communications

(continued)

No Code Alarm Name Definition

MNF-- Minor Error Minor Fault with Alarm Buffer saving

64 MNF01 Card Out A circuit card mounted in a universal slot has been re-

moved from service or is not recognized by the system.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

65 MNF02 Card In A circuit card mounted in a universal slot has been re-

turned to service.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

66 MNF03 IPC Error Inter-processor communication error has occurred.

Alarm Data = Cabinet-Slot(Cx-Syy)

67 MNF04 Trunk Fault Out of service trunk detected via loop detect. Internal

CODEC test.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

68 MNF05 Trunk Recovery Out of service trunk detected via loop detected as out of

service is now operational.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

69 MNF06 Trunk Discon-

nect

Out of service trunk detected via seizure of trunk. Exter-

nal seizure test.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

70 MNF07 Trunk Connect Out of service trunk recovered via seizure of trunk. Ex-

ternal seizure test.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

71 MNF08 SIO TxQ Over SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.

Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)

72 MNF09 SIO TxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MCP2.

Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)

73 MNF10 E1 Out Of Srv E1 Digital line status has been changed to out of ser-

vice.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

74 MNF11 E1 In Service E1 Digital line has been restored to normal service.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

75 MNF12 SIO Out IO port has lost DTR.

Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)

76 MNF13 SIO In IO port has regained DTR.

Alarm Data = SIO 1 through 6

77 MNF14 TODC Error Time of Day Clock in the MCP2 has erred.

78 MNF15 TSW Over Alarm The TSW has been requested to exceed the capacity of

available time slots. Maximum 192 per cabinet.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

79 MNF16 PSU Alarm There are more ports than can be supported in a

cabinet and more power is required.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-343

(continued)

No Code Alarm Name Definition

80 MNF17 PSU Alarm Rec

Over-configuration of cabinet has been corrected.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

81 MNF18 SLI Fault An SLI card has been detected as out of service via an

internal CODEC test.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

82 MNF19 SLI Recovery An SLI card detected as out of service has been de-

tected as recovered and is in service via internal CO-

DEC test.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

83 MNF20 PSUB Alarm Indicates there are over 120 ports in a cabinet with two

PSUs.

Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

84 MNF21 DSS Alarm System capacity of 64-button DSS modules has been

exceeded.

85 MNF26 SIO RxQ Over SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.

Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)

86 MNF27 SIO RxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MCP2.

Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)

87 MNF28 LAN Printer Err LAN printer error has occurred in the MCP2.

Alarm Data = Data Type(SMDR)

88 MNF29 LAN Printer Rec LAN printer error has recovered in the MCP2.

Alarm Data = Data Type(SMDR)

MNG-- Minor Error Minor Fault without Alarm Buffer saving

89 MNG01 Phone Discon-

nect

Indicates the Phone is disconnected.

Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

90 MNG02 Phone Connect Indicates the Phone is connected.

Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

91 MNG03 Off Hook Alarm Indicates Extension Off Hook Alarm timer has expired.

Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

92 MNG04 On Hook Indicates the Off Hook Alarm Extension is on hook.

Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

93 MNG05 MGI Packet Loss Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet loss is more

than 10 %.

Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

94 MNG06 MGI Packet Delay Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet delay is more

than 500 ms.

Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-344 Samsung Business Communications

DEFAULT DATA

ALL OFF

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 852.

Display shows:

01:MJA01 ACT:OFF

POR Restart

2) Enter desired Alarm Display number.(e.g., 64)

64:MNF01 ACT:OFF

Card Out

Press Volume buttons to select desired option and

press Right Soft button to advance the cursor.

3) To select if the alarm is active, press 1 for

YES and 0 for NO.

64:MNF01 ACT:ON

Card Out

An entry will return the cursor to step 2.

Press Volume buttons to make selection and press

Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS

MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC 851 ALARM REPORTING

MMC 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-345

[853] MAINTENANCE BUSY

This MMC is used to place stations, trunks and common resources equipment in a mainte-

nance busy condition. This can be used to isolate suspected intermittent problems. Stations

placed in maintenance busy will behave like a station in DND when called. The calling sta-

tions display will show ‘MADE BUSY’. Stations receiving DID or E&M type calls will re-

ceive a DND/ No more calls tone. The station display will still function with station and

date.

When the busy station is accessed, it will function like a ‘locked all’ station. Trunks made

busy cannot originate calls. Ring down type trunks will still ring the programmed destina-

tion. Common resource equipment such as DSPs, CID DSPs and miscellaneous equipment

such as page ports and voice mail card ports can also be placed in a maintenance busy state.

MAINTENANCE BUSY OPTIONS

No Option Description

0 TRK Trunks

1 STN Stations

2 PAGE Page Ports

4 DTMFR DTMF Receiver(4/DSP)

5 CID CID Receiver(14/DSP)

6 R2MFC R2MFC Receiver(8/DSP)

7 CONF GRP #01-24

8 MGI MGI Ports

DTMFR/CID/R2MFC DSP

If DTMFR, CID or R2MFC is selected when DSP is not mounted, display will

show NONE. If mounted, display will show IDLE by default.

DEFAULT DATA

ALL IDLE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-346 Samsung Business Communications

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 853.

Display shows busy functions:

MAINTENANCE BUSY

TRK :NONEÆ

2) Enter busy function type(0-8) via dial keypad.

MAINTENANCE BUSY

STN :NONEÆ

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter station number.

MAINTENANCE BUSY

STN :201ÆIDLE

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Press 1 to make busy or 0 to make idle.

MAINTENANCE BUSY

STN :201ÆBUSY

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to save and return step 3.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 851 ALARM REPORTING

MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-347

[854] DIAGNOSTIC TIME

Provides a means to set the Diagnostic Time. The system diagnostics tests include memory

audits, internal loopback tests on digital trunks, and DSP, AA DSP tests. Additional tests

include CODEC tests on analogue trunk and station cards and tone tests. If the diagnostics

cannot complete the tests because of system traffic, the system will abort the tests and retry

during the next programmed diagnostic time. It is recommended to assign the diagnostic

time during non-peak traffic periods.

DEFAULT DATA

NO DIAGNOSTIC TIME SET

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 854.

Display shows:

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

SUN: :

2) Enter weekday number.

(0: Sun, 1: Mon, …, 6: Sat)

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

SUN:_ :

Press Volume button to make selection and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter hour(24-hour clock) via the dial keypad.

Cursor will advance to next entry.

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

SUN:23:_

4) Enter minutes(24-hour clock) via the dial keypad.

Cursor will return to step 2.

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

SUN:23:30

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 851 ALARM REPORTING

MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

MMC 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-348 Samsung Business Communications

[856] TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS

This MMC lists the date, time and entry location of the last eight times that technician-

level programming was accessed. This allows a technician to determine if there was unau-

thorized access to system programming and where this access occurred. The information

stored in this log is displayed, for each of the eight accesses, as follows: first line shows the

start date and time of access; second line shows the access type(see table) and end date and

time of access.

There are four access types:

Type Description

NNNN The extension number of a phone that accessed programming directly(e.g., 3203)

MODEM Programming was accessed by PCMMC via the integrated V90 modem attached to

the IOM board of the main cabinet.

LAN Programming was accessed by PCMMC via the LAN connection on the MCP2 card

of main cabinet.

SIOx Programming was accessed by PCMMC via one of the SIO connections on the IOM

board of the main cabinet, where x is the number(2 or 3) of the SIO port that was

used.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 856.

Display shows:

(1) 11/22 11:03Æ

3203 :11/22 11:27

2) Enter number 1-8 for required access display.

(e.g., 3)

(3) 11/22 12:30Æ

3203 :11/22 13:30

Press Volume button to scroll.

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-349

[857] VIRTUAL CABINET SET

This MMC is the program that specifies the type of virtual cabinet card. The type of virtual

cabinet card is as follows:

Type Range Type Range

SLT C2S01 ~ C2S03 BRI STN C4S02 ~ C5S01

DGP C2S01 ~ C2S03 GCONF

STN

C4S02 ~ C5S01

WIRED ITP C3S01 ~ C4S01 SPNET TRK C3S02 ~ C5S03

WLAN ITP C3S01 ~ C4S01 SIP TRK C5S01 ~ C5S03

SIP STN C3S01 ~ C4S01 H323 TRK C5S01 ~ C5S03

IP UMS -

DEFAULT DATA

Cabinet Slot Card Type Cabinet Slot Card Type

1 SLI 1 WIRED ITP

2 DLI 2 WIRED ITP

3 DLI

3 WIRED ITP

1 WLAN ITP 1 SPNET TRK

2 BRI STN 2 SIP TRK

3 GCONF STN

3 H323 TRK

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 857.

Display shows:

C4-S01:SLT

SLT

2) Enter number 1-3 for cabinet number and enter num-

ber 1-12 for slot number.

C4-S01:SLT

SLT

Press Volume button to scroll.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-350 Samsung Business Communications

3) Press Volume botton to scroll card type and Select

card type by pressing Right soft botton.

C4-S01:SLT

DGP

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 724 NUMBER PLAB

MMC 822 VIR.EXT TYPE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-351

[859] HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY

This MMC is used for system hardware EPLD/PCB version display. This is a READ-

ONLY MMC.

No Option Description

1 MP CARD Shows the EPLD/PCB version of MCP.

2 C1S1 Shows the EPLD/PCB version of card in cabinet1/slot1.

3 C1S2 Shows the EPLD/PCB version of card in cabinet1/slot2

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 859.

Display shows:

EPLD/PCB VERSION

MP CARD :V30

2) Enter the option number.

EPLD/PCB VERSION

C1S1 : UNI :V30

Press Volume button to scroll.

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-352 Samsung Business Communications

[861] SYSTEM OPTIONS

Sets a number of system options.

DEFAULT DATA

AUTO UPDATE TIME: DISABLE

SYSTEM SPEED BIN: MAX 500

IDLE WHEN ENBLOC: DISABLE

2 LINE ENBLOCK: DISABLE

2 ZONE EXT PAGE: DISABLE

USE LB FOR PAGE: NONE

LP TRK TONE DISC: DISABLE

ISDN SS FEATURE: DISABLE

SPNET OVERLAP: DISABLE

SPNET CLI TABLE: NONE

E-LCR CLI TABLE: NONE

EXTERNAL BGM/MOH: INT.CHIME

No Option Description

1 AUTO UPDATE TIME Sets enable(1) or disable(0) the system automatically time and

date update from ISDN call connection message. If sets enable,

when system receives ISDN call connection message, system

checks valid data of encapsulated time and date, and update

system time and date device.

2 SYSTEM SPPED BIN Sets max 500(0) or max 950(1) for the maximum number of sys-

tem speed dial bin.

3 IDLE WHEN ENBLOC Decides the state of Large LCD Phone treated as idle or busy

when the user of Large LCD Phone is dialling in ENBLOCK

mode.

4 2 LINE ENBLOCK Decides the usage of ENBLOCK mode for 2 line LCD Phone with

navigation buttons.

7 LP TRK TONE DISC When this option is set to ON, loop trunk can be disconnected by

detecting busy tone.

8 ISDN SS FEATURE Decides whether ISDN SS(Supplement Service) is used or not.

9 SPNET OVERLAP To assign other dial tone, OVERLAP by spnet function can be

enable.

10 SPNET CLI TABLE If network call and this option is set, CLI have to be applied by

CLI TABLE.

11 E-LCR CLI TABLE If E-LCR call and this option is set, CLI have to be applied by CLI

TABLE.

12 EXTERNAL BGM/MOH Backgroud music source can be use internal source or external

source, In case of external source, music source can be sup-

ported in MISC port.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-353

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 861.

Display shows:

AUTO UPDATE TIME

DISABLE

2) Enter the option number.

AUTO UPDATE TIME

DISABLE

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-354 Samsung Business Communications

3) Enter 1 or 0 to enable or disable.

AUTO UPDATE TIME

ENABLE

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to store.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER

MMC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED DIAL BLOCK

MMC 705 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications 2-355

[863] NODE INFO

This MMC allows 1000 systems to be connected by u spnet service.

No Option Description

1 ACCESS NUM Sets the system node ID

2 IP ADDR Sets the system IP address

3 TEL NUMBER Sets the system CO tel number

4 MAX COUNT Sets this value to support ENBLOCK DIAL MODE.

CONDITIONS

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 863.

Display shows:

(0001) ACCESS NUM

2) Select the entry number.(0001 ~ 2000)

(0001) ACCESS NUM

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Select the option number.(0~3)

(0001) ACCESS NUM

Press Volume button to select and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

(e.g ACCESS NUM)

4) Enter the system node ID (0001) ACCESS NUM

Right Soft button to save.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2-356 Samsung Business Communications

[890] INITIALIZE PORT

This MMC clears a call process or initializes the database for specific station or trunks.

This will return the port to default condition.

DEFAULT DATA

NONE

ACTION DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 890.

Display shows:

[201] CALL CLEAR

ARE YOU SURE?NO

2) Enter the station or Trunk line.

[202] CALL CLEAR

ARE YOU SURE?NO

Press Volume button to make selection and press

the Right Soft button to move cursor.

3) Enter 0 to call clear only or 1 to initialize port.

[202] DB INITIAL

ARE YOU SURE?NO

Press Volume button to make selection and press

the Right Soft button to move cursor.

4) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.

[202] DB INITIAL

ARE YOU SURE?YES

Press Volume button to make selection and press

the Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

NONE

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications I

ABBREVIATION

AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting

AC Alternating Current

ACD Automatic Call Distribution

ALG Application Level Gateway

AME Answering Machine Emulation

AMI Alternate Mark Inversion

AOM Add On Module

AP Access Point

BGM Background Music

BRI Basic Rate Interface

BWBS Basic Wireless Base Station(Access Point)

CA Call Agent

CCBS Call Completion to Busy Subscriber

CCNR Cell Completion on No Reply

CID Caller Identification

CLI Call Line Identification

COM Communication

COS Class Of Service

CPLD Complex Programmable Logic Device

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Code

CR Mode Constant Resistance Mode

CSU Communication Service Unit

CTI Computer Telephony Integration

CWBS Combo Wireless Base Station(Access Point)

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

II Samsung Business Communications

DASL Digital Adapter Subscriber Loops

DID Direct Inward Dialling

DECT Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications

DGP Digital Phone

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

DLI Digital Line Interface

DND Do Not Disturb

DPIM Door Phone Interface Module

DSP Digital Signal Processor

DSU Data Service Unit

DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency

E&M Ear&Mouth

EMI Electro-Magnetic Interference

ESM Expanded Switch Module

GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol

GK Gatekeeper

GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol

HDLC High level Data Link Control

HLR Home Location Register

HTML Hypertext Markup Language

HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol

ID Identification

IDS Intrusion Detection System

IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol

IMAP Internet Messaging Access Protocol

IN-SCP Intelligent Network Service Control Point

IOM Input/Output Module

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications III

IP Internet Protocol

IPC Inter-Processor Communication

IPDC Internet Protocol Device Control

IPM Inter-Processor Communications and Memory Module

IP-SCP Internet Protocol Service Control Point

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network

ISUP ISDN User Part

ITM IP Telephony Module

ITP IP Telephone

KDB Keyset Daughterboard

LAN Local Area Network

LCD Liquid Crystal Display

LCP Local Control Processor

LED Light Emitting Diode

LIM LAN Interface Module

MCP Main Control Processor

MDF Main Distribution Frame

MEGACO Media Gateway Control

MFM Multi Frequency Module

MG Media Gateway

MGC Media Gateway Controller

MGI Media Gateway Interface

MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol

MISC Miscellaneous Function Module

MMC Man Machine Communication

MWSLI Message Waiting Single Line Interface

NAT Network Address Translation

NMS Network Management System

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

IV Samsung Business Communications

OPX Off Premises Extension

PAT Port Address Translation

PBA Printed(circuit) Board Assembly

PCB Printed Circuit Board

PCM Pulse Code Modulation

PCMMC PC-based Man Machine Communication

PLL Phase Locking Loop

POP3 Post Office Protocol version 3

PPP Point to Point Protocol

PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet

PRI Primary Rate Interface

PRS Polarity Reverse Detection

PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network

PSU Power Supply Unit

Q-SIG Q-Signalling

QoS Quality of Service

RCM R2/CID Module

RIP Routing Information Protocol

RTCP Real-time Transmission Control Protocol

RTP Real-time Transmission Protocol

SCM Switch and Conference Module

SCP Signal Control Processor

SDP Session Description Protocol

SG Signalling Gateway

SGCP Simple Gateway Control Protocol

SIGTRAN Signalling Transport

SIO Serial Input/Output

SIP Session Initiation Protocol

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Samsung Business Communications V

SLI Single Line Interface

SLT Single Line Telephone

SMDR Station Message Detail Recording

SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

SoL Server optimized Linux

STA Spanning Tree Algorithm

STP Signalling Transfer Point

SVMi Samsung Voice Mail(integrated)

TAPI Telephony Application Programming Interface

TCAP Transmission Control Application Part

TCP Transmission Control Protocol

TEPRI T1E1PRI

TRK Trunk

UA User Agent

UAC User Agent Client

UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter

UAS User Agent Server

UCD Uniform Call Distribution

UDP User Datagram Protocol

UPS Uninterruptible Power System

USB Universal Serial Bus

VDIAL Voice Dial

VLAN Virtual LAN

VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol

VPM Voice Processing Module

VPN Virtual Private Network

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

VI Samsung Business Communications

WAN Wide Area Network

WBS Wireless Base Station

WIM WAN Interface Module

WLI Wireless LAN Interface

xDSL x-Digital Subscriber Line

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server

Programming Guide

Information in this giude is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics

Co., Ltd.

No information contained here may be copied, translated, tran-

scribed or duplicated by any form without the prior written con-

sent of SAMSUNG.

Information in this guide is subject to change without notice.

Samsung Medical Alarms 7100 Users Manual UK_OfficeServ Call Server Programming Guide

7100 to the manual df2b25fe-4fcf-42ee-8246-a7a744abd573

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation